TeleVantage 8.x Client

TeleVantage 8.x Client
USING TELEVANTAGE
TELEVANTAGE 8
COPYRIGHT
© 2008 Vertical Communications, Inc. All rights reserved. This manual and the software described in it are copyrighted with all rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form
by any means without the written permission of Vertical Communications, Inc.
Portions © 1999, Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
TRADEMARKS
Vertical Communications, Inc. and the Vertical Communications logo and combinations thereof are trademarks of Vertical Communications,
Inc. TeleVantage and the TeleVantage logo are registered trademarks of Vertical Communications, Inc. Microsoft, Windows, and Windows
NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. SQL Server is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Adobe and Acrobat are registered
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Dialogic is a registered trademark of Dialogic Corporation. Other brand names, company names
and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
LIMITED WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE
Vertical warrants that (a) the Software will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials for a period of (30)
days from the date of receipt. Any implied warranties on the Software is limited to thirty (30) days. Some states/jurisdictions do not allow
limitations on duration of an implied warranty, so the above information may not apply to you.
CUSTOMER REMEDIES: Vertical’s and its suppliers’ entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be, at Vertical’s option, either (a) return
of the price paid, or (b) repair or replacement of the Software that does not meet Vertical’s Limited Warranty and which is returned to Vertical
with a copy of your receipt. This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the Software has resulted from accident, abuse, or misapplication. Any
replacement Software will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days, whichever is longer.
VERTICAL AND ITS SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, REPRESENTATIONS, PROMISES AND GUARANTEES,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, ON THE SOFTWARE, MEDIA, DOCUMENTATION OR RELATED
TECHNICAL SUPPORT INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
PERFORMANCE AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. VERTICAL WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY BUG, ERROR,
OMISSION, DEFECT, DEFICIENCY OR NONCONFORMITY IN ANY SOFTWARE. AS A RESULT, THE SOFTWARE AND
DOCUMENTATION IS LICENSED “AS IS”, AND THE PURCHASER ASSUMES THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO ITS QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE.
IN NO EVENT WILL VERTICAL OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONTINGENT,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR SIMILAR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM ANY DEFECT IN THE SOFTWARE OR
DOCUMENTATION, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS, DAMAGES FROM BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF OR TO DATA, COMPUTER PROGRAMS, BUSINESS, DOWNTIME, GOODWILL, DAMAGE TO OR
REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT OR PROPERTY, OR ANY COSTS OF RECOVERING, REPROGRAMMING OR REPRODUCING
ANY PROGRAM OR DATA USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCTS, EVEN IF VERTICAL, ITS SUPPLIERS OR ANYONE
ELSE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. YOU AGREE THAT VERTICAL’S AND ITS SUPPLIERS’
LIABILITY ARISING OUT OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OR WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXCEED
THE AMOUNT PAID BY YOU FOR THIS PRODUCT. ANY WRITTEN OR ORAL INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY
VERTICAL DEALERS, DISTRIBUTORS, AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES WILL IN NO WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS
WARRANTY, NOR MAY YOU RELY ON ANY SUCH WRITTEN OR ORAL COMMUNICATION.
Some jurisdictions do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages, and some
jurisdictions have special statutory consumer protection provisions which may supersede this limitation, so the above limitation or exclusion
may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from jurisdiction to
jurisdiction. This software and license may not be transferred or resold without authorization from Vertical Communications, Inc.
NETWORK CAPTURE TECHNOLOGY
Copyright (c) 1999 - 2006 NetGroup, Politecnico di Torino (Italy).Copyright (c) 2006 CACE Technologies, Davis (California). All rights
reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the Politecnico di Torino, CACE Technologies nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
Vertical Communications, Inc.
1-877-VERTICAL
www.vertical.com
#98-6603 Edition 8 January 2008
Getting Started
Chapter 1. Introducing TeleVantage ................................................1-1
About TeleVantage ...............................................................................1-2
Accessing TeleVantage ........................................................................1-2
Using the telephone .......................................................................... 1-2
Using the TeleVantage ViewPoint application.................................. 1-3
Using TeleVantage ViewPoint Web Access ..................................... 1-3
Using the TAPI Service Provider and the CMA ................................ 1-3
Feature comparison table .....................................................................1-4
Getting technical support ......................................................................1-4
TeleVantage documentation .................................................................1-5
The TeleVantage documentation set................................................ 1-5
Accessing online documentation ...................................................... 1-6
Chapter 2. Recording Your Voice Title and Voicemail Greeting ...2-1
About creating your voice title and voicemail greeting ..........................2-2
Recording your voice title......................................................................2-2
Recording your voicemail greeting........................................................2-3
Using the Telephone
Chapter 3. Placing Calls on the Phone............................................3-1
About placing calls on the phone ..........................................................3-2
Using a phone other than your own.................................................. 3-2
Using an IP phone............................................................................. 3-2
Dialing internal and external numbers...................................................3-3
Entering account codes when placing calls ...................................... 3-3
Dialing by name ....................................................................................3-4
Dialing a user’s voicemail directly .........................................................3-4
Placing calls while you are already on a call.........................................3-5
Putting your current call on hold and placing a new call................... 3-5
Ending a call without losing calls on hold.......................................... 3-5
Placing calls with * options....................................................................3-5
Redialing the last call ........................................................................ 3-5
Returning the last call........................................................................ 3-5
Disabling call waiting for a call .......................................................... 3-6
Placing calls to an IP address ...............................................................3-6
Placing a page or intercom call .............................................................3-6
Requirements for receiving a page or intercom call ......................... 3-7
Paging and intercom considerations................................................. 3-7
CONTENTS
Chapter 4. Answering and Handling Calls on the Phone .............. 4-1
About answering and handling calls on the phone ............................... 4-2
Using the Flash button on your phone .............................................. 4-2
Answering TeleVantage calls ............................................................... 4-2
Call announcing................................................................................. 4-2
Call waiting ........................................................................................ 4-3
Answering a call at another ringing phone........................................ 4-4
Using hands-free answering ............................................................. 4-4
Receiving internal intercom calls with voice-first answering ............. 4-5
Handling calls with the phone ............................................................... 4-6
Putting a call on hold ......................................................................... 4-7
Transferring a call.............................................................................. 4-8
Sending a call to voicemail................................................................ 4-9
Recording a call................................................................................. 4-9
Creating a conference call............................................................... 4-10
Parking a call ................................................................................... 4-10
Unparking a call............................................................................... 4-11
Putting a call on silent hold ............................................................. 4-11
Sending a Flash command to Centrex or another PBX.................. 4-11
Getting an internal dial tone ............................................................ 4-11
Entering an account code for a call................................................. 4-11
Using digital feature phones ............................................................... 4-11
Using line appearances................................................................... 4-12
Using custom-mapped TeleVantage commands............................ 4-13
Chapter 5. Managing Voicemail and Your Account With the Phone .
5-1
About managing your account on the phone ........................................ 5-2
Logging on to your account............................................................... 5-2
About voicemail .................................................................................... 5-2
Voicemail from the caller’s point of view ........................................... 5-2
Knowing when you have new voice messages ................................ 5-3
If voice messages disappear from your folders ................................ 5-3
Customizing voice message playback order .................................... 5-3
Listening to and managing your voicemail............................................ 5-4
Voice message telephone commands.............................................. 5-4
Deleting and undeleting messages................................................... 5-5
Replying to a voice message ............................................................ 5-5
Forwarding a voice message ............................................................ 5-5
Calling back a voice message........................................................... 5-6
Sending a message directly to a user’s voicemail ................................ 5-6
Managing your greetings using the phone............................................ 5-7
Managing your greetings................................................................... 5-8
Available space for greetings............................................................ 5-8
Forwarding your calls using the phone .................................................5-9
Turning call forwarding on................................................................. 5-9
Turning call forwarding off................................................................. 5-9
Checking your call forwarding number ............................................. 5-9
Ignoring your call rules ...................................................................... 5-9
Sending your calls straight to voicemail with Do Not Disturb ..............5-10
Selecting a personal status on the phone ...........................................5-10
Changing your password ....................................................................5-10
Chapter 6. Using TeleVantage With a Remote Phone....................6-1
About using TeleVantage with a remote phone ....................................6-2
Tips for all remote phone use................................................................6-5
Using TeleVantage from a remote number without ViewPoint..............6-5
Logging on to TeleVantage from a remote number.......................... 6-6
Receiving TeleVantage calls at a remote number............................ 6-6
Placing calls through TeleVantage from a remote phone ................ 6-7
If your remote phone is “stuck” on a TeleVantage session .............. 6-7
Using redial and other quick call commands when logged in........... 6-8
Using TeleVantage ViewPoint remotely................................................6-8
Using ViewPoint remotely with a phone ........................................... 6-9
Associating Viewpoint with a remote number .......................................6-9
Imitating a station at a remote number ........................................... 6-10
Using an external station.....................................................................6-10
Placing TeleVantage calls from an external station........................ 6-11
Using ViewPoint with an external station........................................ 6-12
Configuring an external station ...........................................................6-12
Configuring a SIP phone ................................................................. 6-14
Changing your external station number with *17 ................................6-15
Chapter 7. Sharing Stations .............................................................7-1
About sharing stations...........................................................................7-2
Placing outbound calls from shared stations.........................................7-2
Finding out who is currently logged in at a station............................ 7-3
Distinguishing incoming calls to a shared station..................................7-3
Shared stations and personal status.....................................................7-3
CONTENTS
Using ViewPoint
Chapter 8. Using TeleVantage ViewPoint ....................................... 8-1
About TeleVantage ViewPoint .............................................................. 8-2
Using ViewPoint in Spanish, German, French Parisian or French
Canadian .................................................................................... 8-2
Using ViewPoint from any web browser ............................................... 8-2
Logging on to ViewPoint ....................................................................... 8-3
Using ViewPoint with a different phone or Server ............................ 8-4
Using ViewPoint with another station or a remote number............... 8-6
Logging on with new logon options................................................... 8-7
Changing your password .................................................................. 8-7
Logging on with command-line switches .......................................... 8-7
About the Welcome Wizard............................................................... 8-8
About the tip of the day ..................................................................... 8-8
Watching the ViewPoint Quick Tour ................................................. 8-8
Exiting ViewPoint .................................................................................. 8-8
Exiting and logging off ....................................................................... 8-8
Elements of the ViewPoint window....................................................... 8-9
The menu bar .................................................................................... 8-9
The toolbar ........................................................................................ 8-9
The navigation pane........................................................................ 8-10
The view bar .................................................................................... 8-11
The status bar.................................................................................. 8-12
Hiding and showing ViewPoint window elements........................... 8-12
Locking ViewPoint window elements .............................................. 8-13
Customizing the ViewPoint display ................................................. 8-13
ViewPoint folders ................................................................................ 8-13
Working in multiple folders .............................................................. 8-14
Adding the Calls Pane to any open folder....................................... 8-15
Adding the Phonebook Pane to the Call Monitor folder.................. 8-15
Using Index buttons to find items quickly........................................ 8-15
Locking the current folder in place .................................................. 8-16
Managing folders and items................................................................ 8-16
Using commands in folders............................................................. 8-16
Managing items in folders ............................................................... 8-16
Dragging and dropping voice messages to other applications....... 8-21
Printing items in folders ................................................................... 8-21
Organizing items in folders ................................................................. 8-21
Viewing folders in the Folder List .................................................... 8-21
Private and public folders ................................................................ 8-22
Managing folders............................................................................. 8-22
Viewing public folders...................................................................... 8-23
Managing the Deleted folder........................................................... 8-23
Sharing folders ....................................................................................8-24
Viewing shared folders.................................................................... 8-25
Deleting shared items ..................................................................... 8-25
Using the audio controls......................................................................8-26
Importing and exporting TeleVantage items .......................................8-27
Chapter 9. Using Personal Statuses................................................9-1
About personal statuses........................................................................9-2
The Personal Status button in the status bar.................................... 9-3
Using predefined personal statuses......................................................9-3
Selecting a personal status ...................................................................9-5
Modifying a personal status ..................................................................9-6
Creating a custom personal status........................................................9-6
The Personal Statuses folder................................................................9-9
Personal status and your active settings...............................................9-9
Changing your active settings......................................................... 9-10
Active settings hierarchy ................................................................. 9-12
Personal status defaults......................................................................9-12
Setting personal status defaults...................................................... 9-13
Changing the personal status of another user ....................................9-14
Chapter 10. Using the Extensions List ..........................................10-1
Viewing TeleVantage extensions ........................................................10-2
Extensions folder tabs..................................................................... 10-3
Extensions folder columns .............................................................. 10-3
Placing calls to an extension...............................................................10-5
Sending an instant message to an extension .....................................10-5
Using instant messaging ................................................................. 10-6
Configuring instant messaging options........................................... 10-6
Disabling instant messaging ........................................................... 10-6
Changing another user’s personal status............................................10-6
Exporting the Extensions list ...............................................................10-6
Chapter 11. Receiving and Handling Calls in ViewPoint .............11-1
Using the Call Monitor folder...............................................................11-2
Automatically sorting new calls ....................................................... 11-2
Call Monitor folder tabs ................................................................... 11-3
Call Monitor folder panes ................................................................ 11-5
Call Monitor folder columns............................................................. 11-5
Displaying the Call Monitor folder automatically .................................11-5
CONTENTS
Selecting and acting on a call in the Call Monitor folder ..................... 11-6
Call ownership ................................................................................. 11-6
Double-clicking calls ....................................................................... 11-7
Commands while a call is ringing ....................................................... 11-7
Taking the call ................................................................................ 11-7
Sending the call to voicemail........................................................... 11-7
Grabbing and holding the call ......................................................... 11-8
Transferring a call without talking to the caller first ......................... 11-8
Commands while you’re on a call ....................................................... 11-9
Putting a call on hold ....................................................................... 11-9
Transferring a call.......................................................................... 11-10
Recording a call............................................................................. 11-12
Playing recorded audio into a call ................................................. 11-13
Associating a call with a contact ................................................... 11-14
Parking a call ................................................................................. 11-15
Unparking a call............................................................................. 11-15
Sending a call to voicemail............................................................ 11-15
Muting a call .................................................................................. 11-16
Playing a caller's name.................................................................. 11-16
Disconnecting a call while staying on the phone .......................... 11-16
Entering an account code for a call............................................... 11-16
Viewing a call’s history .................................................................. 11-17
Adding notes to a call .................................................................... 11-17
Preventing certain calls from ringing your phone.............................. 11-17
Incoming call indicators .................................................................... 11-18
Sharing your Call Monitor folder ...................................................... 11-19
Viewing shared calls...................................................................... 11-19
Chapter 12. Placing Calls in ViewPoint .........................................12-1
Placing a call....................................................................................... 12-2
Placing calls using the Dial bar ....................................................... 12-2
Using the Place Call To dialog box ................................................. 12-3
Quick-dialing from ViewPoint folders .............................................. 12-6
Camping on a busy user’s extension .............................................. 12-7
Placing calls using drag-and-drop................................................... 12-7
Placing calls by using other contact managers............................... 12-7
Using dialing services ......................................................................... 12-8
Entering phone numbers using various types of dialing service..... 12-8
Checking a number ......................................................................... 12-9
Redialing numbers and returning calls ............................................. 12-10
Displaying the Call Monitor when you place a call............................ 12-10
Creating Windows shortcuts to speed-dial a number ....................... 12-10
Creating conference calls ................................................................. 12-12
Adding parties to a conference ..................................................... 12-12
Conferencing multiple active calls together .................................. 12-13
Muting individual conference parties............................................. 12-13
Transferring a conference call....................................................... 12-14
Ending a conference call............................................................... 12-14
Supervising other users’ calls ...........................................................12-14
Using the TeleVantage or eyeBeam softphones...............................12-15
Chapter 13. Managing Voice Messages in ViewPoint ..................13-1
About managing voice messages in ViewPoint ..................................13-2
The Voicemail folder........................................................................ 13-2
Archiving voice messages and call recordings............................... 13-3
Managing thousands of voice messages or call recordings........... 13-3
Listening to your voice messages and call recordings........................13-4
Listening to a voice message as it is being left............................... 13-4
Handling your voice messages ...........................................................13-4
Forwarding a voice message .......................................................... 13-4
Replying to a voice message .......................................................... 13-5
Calling back the person who left a voice message......................... 13-6
E-mailing a voice message ............................................................. 13-6
Playing a voice message into a call ................................................ 13-6
Opening the contact record from a voice message ........................ 13-6
Deleting voice messages ................................................................ 13-7
Associating a voice message from “Unknown” with a contact ....... 13-7
Marking a voice message Unheard ................................................ 13-7
Marking a voice message Urgent or Private................................... 13-8
Adding notes to a voice message ................................................... 13-8
Moving a voice message to another application............................. 13-8
Managing call recordings ....................................................................13-8
Sharing your voice messages .............................................................13-9
Managing your voicemail quota ..........................................................13-9
Setting a maximum length for your voice messages...................... 13-9
Sending a message directly to a user’s voicemail ............................13-10
Knowing when you have new messages ..........................................13-11
System tray button ........................................................................ 13-11
Number in navigation pane ........................................................... 13-11
Stutter dial tone ............................................................................. 13-12
Message waiting light.................................................................... 13-12
New message sound..................................................................... 13-12
E-mail, pager, and call notifications .............................................. 13-12
Scheduling notifications ................................................................ 13-15
Managing greetings...........................................................................13-18
CONTENTS
The Greetings folder...................................................................... 13-19
Greeting hierarchy......................................................................... 13-20
Recording a new greeting ............................................................. 13-20
E-mailing a greeting ...................................................................... 13-20
Playing a greeting into a call ......................................................... 13-21
Chapter 14. Using the Call Log Folder .......................................... 14-1
The Call Log folder ............................................................................. 14-2
Call Log folder filters........................................................................ 14-2
Call Log folder columns................................................................... 14-2
Viewing call details .......................................................................... 14-5
Searching for Call Log entries......................................................... 14-7
............................................................................................................ 14-8
Viewing a call’s history........................................................................ 14-8
Taking notes on a Call Log entry ........................................................ 14-8
Associating a call from “Unknown” with a contact .............................. 14-8
Returning a call in the Call Log folder................................................. 14-8
Entering an account code for a Call Log entry.................................... 14-9
Opening the contact record from a contact’s call................................ 14-9
Listening to a recorded call from the Call Log .................................... 14-9
Sharing the Call Log ......................................................................... 14-10
Reporting on the Call Log ................................................................. 14-10
Exporting the Call Log ...................................................................... 14-10
Advanced TeleVantage Features
Chapter 15. Call Forwarding and Routing Lists ...........................15-1
About call forwarding and routing lists ................................................ 15-2
Call forwarding and Where I Am ..................................................... 15-2
Forwarding calls.................................................................................. 15-3
Forwarding calls by using the telephone commands...................... 15-3
Forwarding calls in ViewPoint ......................................................... 15-3
Receiving forwarded ACD workgroup calls..................................... 15-6
Placing calls at another user’s extension........................................ 15-6
Call forwarding and voicemail ......................................................... 15-6
Forwarding calls over Centrex or PBX trunks................................. 15-6
Using routing lists ............................................................................... 15-7
The Routing Lists folder .................................................................. 15-8
Creating a new routing list............................................................. 15-10
Handling busy station calls differently than calls not answered.... 15-14
Routing calls to workgroups .......................................................... 15-14
Using greetings with routing list final actions ................................ 15-15
Chapter 16. Managing Contacts and Workgroups .......................16-1
About contact management and TeleVantage....................................16-2
The Contacts folder.............................................................................16-2
Using contacts folders..................................................................... 16-2
Private and public contacts ............................................................. 16-3
Changing double-click behavior...................................................... 16-3
Using the Index buttons for quick access ....................................... 16-3
Searching for contacts .................................................................... 16-3
Managing contacts ..............................................................................16-4
Entering a new contact.................................................................... 16-4
Placing calls to your contacts.......................................................... 16-7
Sharing your contacts ..................................................................... 16-7
Teaching TeleVantage to recognize your contacts .............................16-7
Identifying contacts by name........................................................... 16-8
Associating a call or Caller ID number with a contact .................... 16-9
Understanding name and number on Caller ID ............................ 16-11
Using contact PINs for guaranteed recognition ............................ 16-12
Opening contacts from within other folders.......................................16-12
Using contacts in another contact manager......................................16-13
Using the TeleVantage Contact Manager Assistant..................... 16-13
Importing contacts from other contact managers into TeleVantage......
16-13
Using workgroups .............................................................................16-14
Personal and public workgroups................................................... 16-15
The Workgroups folder.................................................................. 16-15
Creating a workgroup.................................................................... 16-15
Having a workgroup appear as an Extensions tab ....................... 16-16
Chapter 17. Using Call Rules..........................................................17-1
About call rules....................................................................................17-2
Call Rules overview......................................................................... 17-2
Examples of how you can use call rules......................................... 17-3
The Call Rules folder..........................................................................17-3
Creating a new call rule.......................................................................17-4
Combining caller and schedule conditions ..................................... 17-5
Setting caller conditions .................................................................. 17-5
Setting schedule conditions ............................................................ 17-6
Selecting how a call rule handles a call .......................................... 17-8
Enabling or disabling a call rule ..........................................................17-8
Choosing the priority of a call rule.......................................................17-9
CONTENTS
How TeleVantage resolves call rule setting conflicts...................... 17-9
Ignoring all call rules ......................................................................... 17-10
Chapter 18. Customizing ViewPoint ..............................................18-1
About customizing ViewPoint ............................................................. 18-2
Guide to the Options dialog box...................................................... 18-2
Customizing telephone behavior ........................................................ 18-5
Specifying your phone type............................................................. 18-5
Recording a voice title ..................................................................... 18-5
Changing the language of telephone command prompts............... 18-6
Customizing or turning off call announcing ..................................... 18-6
Customizing or turning off call waiting............................................. 18-8
Displaying Caller ID on a phone...................................................... 18-8
Turning ringback for calls on hold on and off .................................. 18-9
Changing your personal Operator................................................... 18-9
Customizing your listing in the dial-by-name directory ................... 18-9
Customizing how long your phone rings ....................................... 18-10
Changing ring patterns .................................................................. 18-11
Enabling and disabling hands-free answering .............................. 18-11
Enabling and disabling voice-first answering ................................ 18-12
Customizing your hold music ........................................................ 18-12
Configuring a digital feature phone................................................... 18-13
Customizing incoming call behavior ................................................. 18-16
Customizing ISDN outbound Caller ID ............................................. 18-17
Customizing SIP accounts................................................................ 18-19
Customizing voice message behavior .............................................. 18-20
Turning off stutter dial tone ........................................................... 18-20
Enabling a message waiting light.................................................. 18-20
Setting voice message playback order ......................................... 18-20
Playing a sound when a new message arrives............................. 18-20
Customizing ViewPoint for Operators............................................... 18-21
Customizing the ViewPoint display................................................... 18-22
Showing or hiding ViewPoint window elements............................ 18-22
Defining double-click behavior in the Contacts folder................... 18-22
Customizing columns .................................................................... 18-22
Changing the font of a ViewPoint folder........................................ 18-24
Changing how names are displayed............................................. 18-24
Hiding and showing toolbar buttons in a folder............................. 18-24
Enhancing ViewPoint with Add-ins ................................................... 18-25
Managing Add-ins ......................................................................... 18-25
Using the Reverse Phone Number Lookup sample Add-in.......... 18-26
Using the Desktop Alert Add-in ..................................................... 18-26
Using the TeleVantage Instant Messaging Add-in ....................... 18-28
Other customization options..............................................................18-29
Appendices
Appendix A. Telephone Commands Quick Reference.................. A-1
Call announcing commands................................................................. A-1
Call handling commands...................................................................... A-2
Quick call commands ........................................................................... A-3
Quick call commands for call center agents .....................................A-5
Voicemail/Account menu...................................................................... A-6
Logging on.........................................................................................A-6
Logging on from a remote location ...................................................A-6
Voicemail/Account menu commands................................................A-7
Appendix B. Working as an Agent in a Call Center Queue .......... B-1
Whether this chapter applies to you..................................................... B-2
Starting and ending your shift, and taking breaks ................................ B-2
Starting your shift ..............................................................................B-2
Ending your shift................................................................................B-3
Taking a break...................................................................................B-3
What call center agents need to know to get the job done .................. B-3
Working at different phones ................................................................. B-4
Signing in and out of a queue .............................................................. B-5
To sign in or out of a queue ..............................................................B-5
Seeing whether you are signed in or out of a queue ........................B-5
Receiving and handling queue calls..................................................... B-6
Viewing your position in the queue ...................................................B-6
Being monitored or coached by a supervisor ...................................B-6
Using the Call Monitor tabs ...............................................................B-7
Wrap-up time.....................................................................................B-8
Viewing queue activity.......................................................................B-8
Placing calls from a queue ................................................................... B-8
Determining whom you are calling as...............................................B-9
Popping up caller information............................................................... B-9
Working remotely ................................................................................. B-9
Appendix C. Supervising a Call Center Queue.............................. C-1
About supervising queues in ViewPoint ............................................... C-2
Exempting supervisors from receiving queue calls ..........................C-2
Viewing current queue calls ................................................................. C-2
CONTENTS
Monitoring queue statistics .................................................................. C-3
Viewing queue statistics in the Queue Monitor folder...................... C-3
When statistics are reset ................................................................ C-12
When statistics are refreshed......................................................... C-12
About agents’ personal status and state........................................ C-13
Monitoring the position of agents in the queue .............................. C-13
Monitoring queue statistics using the phone.................................. C-16
Supervising other agents’ calls .......................................................... C-16
Viewing when agents are being monitored .................................... C-17
Managing agents’ status.................................................................... C-18
Signing agents in or out of a queue ............................................... C-18
Changing an agent’s personal status............................................. C-19
Managing a queue’s voice mailbox.................................................... C-20
Managing queue voice messages on the telephone ..................... C-20
Appendix D. Working as an Agent in an ACD Workgroup ........... D-1
About participating in an ACD workgroup............................................ D-2
Use of the TeleVantage ViewPoint .................................................. D-2
Marking yourself ready and unavailable .............................................. D-2
Using the Call Monitor ......................................................................... D-3
Receiving a call.................................................................................... D-3
Placing ACD workgroup calls .............................................................. D-4
Taking a break ..................................................................................... D-4
Listening to the ACD workgroup’s voicemail ....................................... D-4
Viewing the ACD workgroup’s contacts and Call Log.......................... D-4
Appendix E. Using the TeleVantage Archived Recording Browser ..
E-1
Running the Archived Recording Browser............................................E-1
Searching for recordings.......................................................................E-2
Starting a new search........................................................................E-2
Saving your current search ...............................................................E-8
Loading a saved search ....................................................................E-8
Managing individual recordings ............................................................E-8
Acting on archived call recordings ........................................................E-9
Checking the archive for missing audio files.......................................E-11
Purging archived recordings ...............................................................E-11
Importing a recording archive from TeleVantage 6.x..........................E-12
Appendix F. Using the TeleVantage H.323 SoftPhone...................F-1
About the TeleVantage H.323 SoftPhone.............................................F-2
Recommended USB phones ............................................................F-2
SoftPhone requirements ................................................................... F-3
Defining the TeleVantage SoftPhone as your external station............. F-3
Using the TeleVantage SoftPhone....................................................... F-4
Starting the TeleVantage SoftPhone ................................................ F-4
Showing the SoftPhone keypad window........................................... F-5
Placing a call with the SoftPhone...................................................... F-5
Exiting the SoftPhone........................................................................ F-5
Configuring the TeleVantage SoftPhone.............................................. F-5
Adjusting microphone and speaker volume...................................... F-6
Setting preferences ........................................................................... F-6
Setting call restrictions ...................................................................... F-6
Keeping the keypad window always on top...................................... F-7
Using the stand-alone SoftPhone ........................................................ F-7
Configuring the stand-alone SoftPhone............................................ F-7
SoftPhone notes................................................................................... F-8
Appendix G. Using the CounterPath SIP softphones ................... G-1
About the CounterPath SIP softphones ............................................... G-2
About the eyebeam SIP softphone ......................................................G-2
Recommended USB phones ........................................................... G-3
Before installing the eyeBeam softphone............................................. G-3
Installing and configuring the eyeBeam SIP softphone........................ G-4
Launching the eyeBeam softphone......................................................G-6
Using CounterPath SIP softphones with TeleVantage......................... G-8
Appendix H. Logging On with Command-Line Switches ............. H-1
Using the /station command .............................................................H-2
Appendix I. Reporting Problems.......................................................I-1
Using the Problem Report Wizard..........................................................I-1
Reporting a problem that involves a specific call............................... I-2
Reporting other problems................................................................... I-2
Index ...................................................................................................I-1
CONTENTS
Getting Started
CHAPTER 1
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCING TELEVANTAGE
CHAPTER CONTENTS
About TeleVantage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Accessing TeleVantage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Feature comparison table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Getting technical support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
TeleVantage documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
About TeleVantage________________________________________
Vertical’s award-winning TeleVantage phone system integrates your telephone and computer to
make your telephone a much more powerful tool. You can manage your calls and voicemail by
using either your telephone or the TeleVantage ViewPoint program, which runs on your
computer. TeleVantage dramatically expands the ways in which you can place and receive
phone calls.
This manual describes how to use the TeleVantage telephone commands and ViewPoint
application. Most ViewPoint instructions also apply to using ViewPoint Web Access.
For instructions on installing TeleVantage ViewPoint, see Installing TeleVantage. For
instructions on performing administrative TeleVantage functions, see Administering
TeleVantage.
Accessing TeleVantage ____________________________________
You can access TeleVantage by:
Q
Using the telephone
Q
Using the TeleVantage ViewPoint application
Q
Using TeleVantage ViewPoint Web Access
Q
Using the TAPI Service Provider and the CMA (Contact Manager Assistant)
Using the telephone
TeleVantage provides a sophisticated system of voice-guided menus that enable you to access
most TeleVantage features by using the telephone commands on your telephone keypad. You
can press # at the dial tone, log on, and then follow the voice prompts to listen to your voicemail,
forward your calls, record greetings, and so on. When you are on a call, you can press Flash to
put the call on hold and then follow the prompts to transfer calls, set up conference calls, and
perform other call-handling tasks.
For details about how to use the telephone commands, see Chapter 3 through Chapter 6. For a
summary of the telephone commands, see Appendix A.
Using the Flash command
Flash is a command you select using your telephone. Most phones have a Flash button. If yours
does not, you can do a Flash command by pressing and releasing the hook briefly.
1-2
Using the TeleVantage ViewPoint application
TeleVantage ViewPoint gives you access to all of TeleVantage’s features in an easy-to-use
Windows interface. With ViewPoint you can point and click to play voice messages, place and
receive calls, manage multiple active calls, access contacts and users, and so on.
For details about how to use ViewPoint, see Chapter 8 through Chapter 18. For ViewPoint
requirements, see Installing TeleVantage.
Using TeleVantage ViewPoint Web Access
If your TeleVantage system administrator has installed TeleVantage Web Services, you can
access an HTML version of ViewPoint—called ViewPoint Web Access—by using your Web
browser. ViewPoint Web Access lets you use TeleVantage from any remote location that has
Internet access and from Macintosh and UNIX computers. Most features of TeleVantage
ViewPoint are available in ViewPoint Web Access. You can listen to your voicemail, manage
contacts, check your Call Log, customize your TeleVantage account, and so forth.
To use ViewPoint Web Access, ask your TeleVantage system administrator for the Web address
to enter in your browser. In most cases, the instructions in this manual also apply to ViewPoint
Web Access. You can also use ViewPoint Web Access’s context-sensitive online Help for
specific instructions about a ViewPoint Web Access folder.
See “Using ViewPoint from any web browser” on page 8-2.
Using the TAPI Service Provider and the CMA
If you make extensive use of contact management applications or customer relationship
management software such as Microsoft Outlook, GoldMine or GoldMine FrontOffice 2000, or
Interact Commerce Corporation’s Act!, you can install the TAPI Service Provider and place
TeleVantage calls to contacts from those applications. You do not need to have TeleVantage
ViewPoint installed on your computer to use the TAPI Service Provider.
The TAPI Service Provider links your contact management applications to your TeleVantage
phone, just as TeleVantage ViewPoint is linked to your phone. After the TAPI Service Provider
is installed, you can use your contact manager application’s Place Call feature to call its contacts
using your TeleVantage phone. Ask your TeleVantage system administrator to install the
TeleVantage TAPI Service Provider, and then follow the instructions in your contact manager
application for placing calls.
You can also install the TeleVantage CMA (Contact Manager Assistant) and receive
screen-pops for calls that show the name, the Caller ID, and the time of day of the call.
You do not need to have TeleVantage ViewPoint installed on your computer to use the CMA.
Note: With Act!, you can receive screen-pops without installing the CMA.
For instructions on how to use the TAPI Service Provider and the Contact Manager Assistant,
see their online Help.
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCING TELEVANTAGE
1-3
Feature comparison table __________________________________
The following table shows the major features that are available in TeleVantage. If your
TeleVantage system does not include some of these features, your TeleVantage system
administrator might have made them unavailable to you.
Phone
ViewPoint
ViewPoint
Web
Access
CMA
Managing voice messages
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Placing, receiving, and handling
calls
Yes
Yes
Yes
Some
Managing participants in
conference calls
No
Yes
No
No
Managing contacts
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Call announcing of contacts
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Screen-pops for incoming calls
N/A
Yes
No
Yes
Managing workgroups
No
Yes
Yes
No
Viewing the Extensions list
No
Yes
Yes
No
Viewing the Call Log
No
Yes
Yes
No
Recording greetings
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Forwarding calls
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Managing routing lists
No
Yes
Yes
No
Managing call rules
No
Yes
Yes
No
Changing active greeting
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Changing active routing list
No
Yes
Yes
No
Managing personal statuses
No
Yes
Yes
No
Changing personal status
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Some
Yes
Yes
No
Feature
Customizing options
Getting technical support __________________________________
Contact your TeleVantage system administrator for technical support. For information on how
to report problems, see Appendix I.
You can get help through TeleVantage documentation as described in the next section.
1-4
TeleVantage documentation________________________________
TeleVantage provides documentation in several easy-to-access online formats that provide the
benefits of instant hypertext navigation. This section describes the different TeleVantage
documents and how to access them in various formats.
Ordering printed documentation
You can order printed versions of some TeleVantage documents. To do so, contact your
TeleVantage provider.
The TeleVantage documentation set
The following table describes the TeleVantage documents and the formats in which each is
available. See the next section for instructions on using each format.
Audience
Available
in print
HTML
book
Acrobat
PDF
Installing TeleVantage
This manual covers the requirements and
installation process for upgrades and fresh
installations, and describes how to order
telephone company services, add licenses,
configure advanced settings, and
troubleshoot problems.
Administrators
and
TeleVantage
providers
Yes
Yes
Yes
Installing Dialogic Telephony
Components
This manual covers the requirements and
installation process for upgrades and fresh
installations, and describes how to change
hardware and troubleshoot problems.
Administrators
and
TeleVantage
providers
No
Yes
Yes
Administering TeleVantage
This manual describes setting up, managing
and monitoring your TeleVantage system,
including using the TeleVantage
Administrator to configure system settings,
trunks, stations, users, call routing, IP
telephony, and more.
Administrators
No
Yes*
Yes
Using TeleVantage
This manual covers how to use the
TeleVantage system, including the telephone
commands, TeleVantage ViewPoint,
ViewPoint Web Access, working from
remote locations, call center participation,
and more.
All audiences
No
Yes
Yes
Document
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCING TELEVANTAGE
1-5
Audience
Available
in print
HTML
book
Acrobat
PDF
TeleVantage QuickStart Guide
This small guide provides easy-to-read
instructions for first-time users and basic
TeleVantage use, including a complete
telephone command reference and
coverage of ViewPoint fundamentals.
All audiences
No
Yes
Yes
TeleVantage Call Center Administrator’s
Guide
This manual describes configuring,
maintaining, supervising, and participating in
a TeleVantage call center. Contains separate
sections for administrators and agents.
Includes instructions for running call center
queues, ACD workgroups, and TeleVantage
call center reports.
Administrators
No
Yes*
Yes
TeleVantage Developer’s Guide
This reference describes how to extend
TeleVantage's built-in features using the
Client API, the Add-in API, the IVR Plug-in
API, the Device Status API, and TAPI.
Programmers
No
No
Yes
TeleVantage Pocket Reference Card
This wallet-sized card is a convenient
reference for the most-used TeleVantage
telephone commands.
All audiences
No
No
Yes
Document
* Administering TeleVantage and the TeleVantage Call Center Administrator’s Guide are combined into a
single HTML book called Administering TeleVantage and Call Centers.
Accessing online documentation
You can access TeleVantage’s online documentation in the following formats.
Online Help
From any TeleVantage application window, you can press F1 or click Help to get
context-sensitive Help describing the window and its individual fields. For overviews of
features, see the HTML or PDF books, not the online Help.
HTML books
TeleVantage provides complete compiled HTML Help (.CHM) versions of four of its printed
manuals, enhanced with hypertext navigation panes and links. To access the HTML books from
within ViewPoint or the Administrator, choose Help > Online Books.
1-6
To access the HTML books without ViewPoint or the Administrator, open the following files,
located by default in C:\Program Files\Common Files\Vertical\TeleVantage:
Q
AdministeringTV.chm. Contains Administering TeleVantage and the TeleVantage Call
Center Administrator’s Guide.
Q
InstallingTV.chm. Contains Installing TeleVantage.
Q
InstallingIntel.chm. Contains Installing Dialogic Telephony Components.
Q
UsingTV.chm. Contains Using TeleVantage.
Adobe Acrobat PDF books
The PDF versions of TeleVantage manuals are the same files that Vertical sends to be
professionally printed, and can be used for your own printing or browsing. They are available
on the TeleVantage Master CD in the \Manuals directory. To view and print these files, use the
Adobe Acrobat Reader, available on the TeleVantage Master CD in the \Adobe directory.
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCING TELEVANTAGE
1-7
CHAPTER 2
CHAPTER 2
RECORDING YOUR VOICE TITLE AND
VOICEMAIL GREETING
CHAPTER CONTENTS
About creating your voice title and voicemail greeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Recording your voice title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Recording your voicemail greeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
About creating your voice title and voicemail greeting __________
This chapter explains how to create your voice title, create your voicemail greeting, and manage
your greetings using the phone.
When you first begin to use TeleVantage, create the following two recordings:
Q
Your voice title (your name)
Q
Your voicemail greeting (what callers hear when they reach your voicemail)
You can rerecord these recordings at any time.
Note: Your TeleVantage system administrator may have created these recordings for you
already, but you can create new ones in your own voice.
Recording your voice title __________________________________
Your voice title is a short recording of your name only. By default TeleVantage plays it when
the following events occur:
Q
Callers dial your extension or are transferred to you (callers hear “Transferring to” +
<voice title>).
Q
Callers look you up in a name search in the dial-by-name directory (callers hear “For” +
<voice title> + “press 1”).
Q
You call another TeleVantage user (the user that you are calling hears “Call from” +
<voice title>).
Q
You leave a voice message for another TeleVantage user (your voice title precedes the
message).
If you do not record a voice title, you might be prompted to say your name when you call another
TeleVantage user who has call announcing turned on (see “Call announcing” on page 4-2).
Important: Your voice title can contain other information, such as your company or title, but it
should not be a long recording. TeleVantage plays your voice title in the middle of recorded
sentences, so a long voice title can cause confusion.
To record a voice title on the phone
1.
Pick up your phone and press #. log on to your account by entering <your extension>
# <your password> #.
2.
Press 6 2 to manage your voice title.
3.
Press 1 to record a new voice title. Say your name and then press # immediately
afterwards to eliminate silence.
For instructions on how to record a voice title in ViewPoint, see “Recording a voice title” on
page 18-5.
2-2
Recording your voicemail greeting __________________________
Your voicemail greeting is a recording that callers hear when they reach your voicemail. For
example, your voicemail greeting might be similar to the following: “This is Miri Anatolia. I am
out of the office right now, but leave me a message and I will get back to you soon.” You can
also use your voicemail greeting to tell callers about the following options that are available to
them:
Q
Press # after leaving a message for more options. See “Voice Message Commands” on
page 5-4.
Q
Press 7 at any time to leave a callback number. (The caller can choose to leave the Caller
ID number, if available, or enter another number.)
Q
Press 0 at any time to transfer to the Operator. (By default, 0 transfers the caller to your
company’s operator, but you can specify another extension instead. See “Changing your
personal Operator” on page 18-9.)
Q
Press * during the greeting to skip the rest of the greeting and begin leaving a message.
Your TeleVantage account comes with an initial voicemail greeting that callers hear until you
record a new one. It says, “The person you have attempted to reach is unavailable. Please leave
a message after the tone. When finished, hang up or press the pound key for more options. To
leave a callback number, press 7. If you need immediate assistance, press 0.” To record your
own greeting, you can record over the initial greeting or record a second greeting.
To record a new greeting
1.
Pick up your phone and press #. log on to your account by entering <your extension>
# <your password> #.
2.
Press 4 to manage your greetings. Your initial greeting plays.
3.
Press 4 to rerecord that greeting or 6 to record a new greeting. Say your greeting, and
then press #. The greeting you just recorded is played back.
4.
Follow the prompts to accept, rerecord, or delete the greeting. If you recorded a new
greeting, you can make it the active greeting (the one that callers hear) by pressing 3.
For complete instructions on managing your greetings, see “Managing your greetings using the
phone” on page 5-7.
CHAPTER 2. RECORDING YOUR VOICE TITLE AND VOICEMAIL GREETING
2-3
Using the
Telephone
CHAPTER 3
CHAPTER 3
PLACING CALLS ON THE PHONE
CHAPTER CONTENTS
About placing calls on the phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Dialing internal and external numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Dialing by name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Dialing a user’s voicemail directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Placing calls while you are already on a call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Placing calls with * options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Placing calls to an IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Placing a page or intercom call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
About placing calls on the phone____________________________
You can pick up a TeleVantage phone and place a call in the same way that you place calls on
other phones. But you can also do much more. For example, you can dial other TeleVantage
users by name and use special key combinations to redial your last call or call back your last
caller. Depending on your TeleVantage system, you can also place calls over Centrex lines or
over the Internet.
This chapter explains the following aspects of placing TeleVantage calls on the phone:
Q
Dialing internal and external numbers
Q
Dialing by name
Q
Placing calls while you are already on a call
Q
Redialing the last number you called, returning the last call that arrived, and disabling
call waiting for a call
Q
Placing calls to an IP address
For information about placing calls visually by using TeleVantage ViewPoint, see Chapter 12.
Using a phone other than your own
If you use another user’s phone to place calls, you are subject to that user’s dialing restrictions,
outgoing Caller ID information, and other settings, and your calls are logged as being from that
user. To make sure that your calls are placed and logged as yourself, do the following:
1.
Log on to the station by picking up the phone and entering # <your extension> #
<your password> #. (Your office may use an initial log-on key other than #). Then
press 5 1 to forward your calls to that phone.
2.
When you are finished placing calls at the other user’s phone, log off from that phone
by pressing *0 0.
Note: If the phone is idle for too long, for example over an hour, you may be logged off
automatically.
Using an IP phone
If you have a voice-over-IP phone, you can place calls with it as if it was a normal phone.
If you have an H.323 IP phone and you hear silence instead of a dial tone when you pick it up
to place a call, it may be because there are not enough IP trunks configured in the system. If you
wait, a dial tone will begin when a trunk becomes available. If you encounter this or other
problems with the IP phone, see your system administrator, who can check its setup.
3-2
Dialing internal and external numbers _______________________
Internal calls are calls to other TeleVantage extensions. External calls are calls to outside
numbers, including calls to another phone system (PBX), a Centrex extension, another
TeleVantage system such as a branch office, and an Internet address.
Note: If you encounter a delay after dialing before your calls are connected, you can press #
after the extension or number, for example, 187#. This skips the delay.
To dial an internal number
1.
Pick up your phone.
2.
Do one of the following:
Q
Dial the extension number.
Q
Dial the extension number followed by * to go directly to voicemail, if you
administrator has enabled that feature (see below for details)
Q
Press 411 or *93 for the dial-by-name directory.
To dial an external number
You must dial an access code to start dialing an external number. Ask your TeleVantage system
administrator what types of external calls you can place and what access codes you must use.
1.
Pick up your phone.
2.
Enter <access code><phone number>.
Example: In the U.S. if you want to call the external phone number 555 1212, you must dial 9
(the usual access code) before you dial 555 1212.
Entering account codes when placing calls
Depending on your office’s configuration of TeleVantage, you may be prompted to enter an
account code when you place an external call. Even if you are not prompted for an account code
by the system, your office may require you to enter one. Your TeleVantage system administrator
can tell you what account codes, if any, you must use.
If you are prompted to enter an account code
If you are prompted to enter an account code when you place a call, you will hear one of the
following prompts:
Q
A beep.
Q
“Please enter account code.”
Q
A double beep. This indicates that you are dialing a TeleVantage contact who has an
associated account code, so that you do not need to enter one. See “Entering a contact's
name and basic information” on page 16-5.
CHAPTER 3. PLACING CALLS ON THE PHONE
3-3
If you hear one of the previous prompts, enter the account code followed by #. If you hear the
double beep, you can press # to use the contact’s associated account code, or you can enter a
different account code and press #.
Note: If you enter the wrong account code, press Flash before pressing # and the system will
let you re-enter it.
Depending on how your TeleVantage system administrator configured your system, the prompt
may occur either after you dial the access code or after you dial the phone number. If the prompt
occurs after you dial the access code, enter the account code followed by #, and then continue
entering the phone number. For example:
9 [prompt] 8812 # 212 123 4567
where 9 is the access code, 8812 is the account code, and the numbers after # are the area code
and phone number.
Entering an account code during or before a call
During a call you can enter an account code or revise an account code already entered.
To enter an account code
1.
Press Flash *11.
2.
Enter the account code followed by #. After pressing # you are returned to the call.
You can also enter an account code before dialing the call. Press *11 at a dial tone, and then enter
the account code followed by #. When you hear the dial tone, dial the phone number.
Dialing by name __________________________________________
You can dial another TeleVantage user by name if you do not know the user’s extension. To dial
by name, press 411 or *93.
Your system administrator can remove you from the dial-by-name directory, or you can remove
yourself using ViewPoint, so that only callers who know your extension can dial you. See
“Customizing your listing in the dial-by-name directory” on page 18-9.
Dialing a user’s voicemail directly ___________________________
If your system administrator enables this feature, you can leave a message in a user’s voice
mailbox directly without ringing the user’s phone. To do so, dial * after the extension, for
example 187*.
You can also dial extension-plus-* from an auto attendant, so it might be useful to tell your
frequent callers about this feature if it is enabled. You can also use it as a quick way to leave
yourself a voice message when calling in.
3-4
Placing calls while you are already on a call __________________
You can put calls on hold and place a new call, pick up another call on hold, and end a call
without losing other calls on hold.
Putting your current call on hold and placing a new call
1.
Press Flash #. Your current call is now on hold and you have a dial tone.
2.
Dial your call.
Switching between calls
To switch from your current call to a call that is on hold, press Flash 4. If you have multiple
calls on hold, you will hear a menu from which you can pick the call to which you want to
connect.
Ending a call without losing calls on hold
You can hang up the phone to end a call without losing your calls on hold.
1.
Hang up the phone or press Flash 3 to end the current call.
2.
If you hung up, pick up the phone.
3.
Press Flash 4. You are connected to the call on hold. If you have multiple calls on hold,
you will hear a menu from which you can pick the call to which you want to connect.
Placing calls with * options ________________________________
When you press * at a dial tone, the system offers you a menu of quick call commands. See
page A-3 for a table that lists all available commands.
Redialing the last call
To redial the last call you placed, press *66.
Returning the last call
To return a call to your last identified caller, press *69. (You cannot return unidentified calls.)
TeleVantage reads the number it will dial and prompts you to approve it before it dials the call.
CHAPTER 3. PLACING CALLS ON THE PHONE
3-5
Disabling call waiting for a call
Disabling call waiting is useful if you are using your extension to send faxes or to connect to the
Internet. In both cases, a call waiting tone disrupts the data flow.
To disable call waiting for a call, press *70 and dial the number. You do not hear the call waiting
tone during that call. Incoming calls while you are on that call are sent directly to your
voicemail. After the call ends, call waiting is enabled again.
Note: You can enter *70 as part of your fax dial string. For example, your fax dial string might
be *70 9 1 617 555 7744.
Placing calls to an IP address_______________________________
If your TeleVantage system supports placing calls over the Internet, you can dial an IP address
directly from your phone. In this way you can connect to an H.323 terminal such as NetMeeting.
To dial an IP address, first dial your office’s access code for Internet calls. If you do not know
the access code, ask your TeleVantage system administrator. Then dial the IP address, entering
stars (*) instead of periods. For example, if your office’s access code for dialing IP calls is 7, dial
the IP address 255.75.119.49 as 7 255*75*119*49.
Placing a page or intercom call _____________________________
You can use the *15 telephone command to page a group of users or place an intercom call to a
single user. When you create an intercom or page connection, you hear a beep, after which you
can speak over the receiving users’ speakerphone. The receiving user hears a beep before the
audio connection is made.
You can use this feature in two ways:
Q
Page multiple users. A page creates a one-way audio connection with all the users in a
workgroup. When you speak, your voice comes over each user’s speakerphone
simultaneously, but you cannot hear the other users. To make this type of connection,
dial *15 followed by a workgroup’s extension.
Q
Place an intercom call to a user. An intercom call creates a two-way audio connection
with a single user’s speakerphone, so you can both speak and hear. To place an intercom
call, dial *15 followed by a user’s extension.
Note: When you dial a workgroup’s extension, a one-way page always results, even if there is
only one user in the workgroup.
3-6
Requirements for receiving a page or intercom call
In order to receive a page or intercom call, the receiving user must have the following:
Q
A properly-configured ADSI digital or SIP phone that supports the feature. For a list of
supported phones, see Installing TeleVantage. Phones that do not support this feature
(like regular analog phones) will also receive intercom connections and pages if they are
in hands-free mode (see “Using hands-free answering” on page 4-4).
Q
No active call.
If one or more of these requirements are not met (for example, if the user is on a call), the page
or intercom connection is not made.
Note: If you have an ADSI phone, receiving an intercom or page causes the message waiting
light to blink for the duration of the call, even though you have no new voice messages.
Blocking pages and intercom with Do Not Disturb
Users who have the personal status Do Not Disturb selected do not receive pages or intercom
calls. See “Sending your calls straight to voicemail with Do Not Disturb” on page 5-10.
With shared stations, the personal status of the user currently logged in is the one used. With all
other personal statuses you can receive pages and intercom connections, even if the Taking
Calls field is set to No.
Paging and intercom considerations
Keep the following in mind when making a page or intercom call:
Q
Pages and intercom calls always connect to the receiving user’s default station, even if
the user has forwarded his or her calls elsewhere. Users with a station ID of 0 cannot
receive pages or intercom calls.
Q
Pages and intercom connections do not show up in TeleVantage ViewPoint’s Call
Monitor folder (see Chapter 11), or the Call Log (see Chapter 14).
Q
When you place a page, there can be a delay before you hear the connection beep and
can begin speaking. The bigger the workgroup being paged, the greater the potential
delay.
Q
When you place a page, you can speak for 30 seconds after the beep, and then the page
terminates automatically. Your system administrator can adjust this time limit.
Note: It is possible that a page will not connect to all paged phones. If you find that people who
should have received your page did not, speak to your system administrator about increasing the
PageRequestTimeout time.
CHAPTER 3. PLACING CALLS ON THE PHONE
3-7
CHAPTER 4
CHAPTER 4
ANSWERING AND HANDLING CALLS
ON THE PHONE
CHAPTER CONTENTS
About answering and handling calls on the phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Answering TeleVantage calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Handling calls with the phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Using digital feature phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
About answering and handling calls on the phone _____________
This chapter explains how to answer calls at your TeleVantage phone, including putting calls on
hold, transferring calls, sending calls to voicemail, and other actions. For the features you can
use when answering and handling TeleVantage calls at a remote phone, see Chapter 6.
Using the Flash button on your phone
When you use TeleVantage on the phone, you use your phone’s Flash button to access many
commands. If your phone does not have a Flash button, press and release the hook quickly once
to send a Flash command.
Note: On some phones, the Flash button is labelled Link or Call Wait.
If pressing Flash results in a transfer
If pressing Flash causes transfers the call rather than giving you access to the call-handling
commands described in this chapter, you are in direct transfer mode (see “Transferring a call”
on page 4-8). If you are in direct transfer mode and would rather have access to all the telephone
call-handling commands, talk to your system administrator.
Answering TeleVantage calls _______________________________
This section explains the following aspects of answering TeleVantage calls on the phone:
Q
Call announcing
Q
Call waiting
Q
Answering a call at another ringing phone
Call announcing
Call announcing enables you to screen incoming calls just by picking up the phone. With call
announcing, you are not connected immediately to the caller. Instead, you hear, “Call from”
followed by a recording of the caller’s name. You can then choose whether to accept the call,
send it to voicemail with or without message screening, or conference in the caller.
Note: You can also screen your calls visually by using the TeleVantage ViewPoint’s Call
Monitor, which displays the caller’s name when you receive a call (see Chapter 11). Another way
to screen your calls is by using a phone with a Caller ID display.
Answering a call using call announcing
After answering a call and hearing the caller’s name, you can do one of the following:
4-2
Q
Press 1 to accept the call. You are connected with the caller.
Q
Press 2 or hang up to send the call to voicemail. By default, either method sends the
call directly to your voicemail. However, if you have a custom routing list defined,
hanging up sends the call to the next action on your routing list, while pressing 2 sends
the call to the routing list’s final action. See “Using routing lists” on page 15-7.
Q
Press 3 to send the call to voicemail and monitor the message being left. The call
is sent to your voicemail, and you can listen to the message as it is recorded and pick up
the call at any time.
When you choose this option, you hear your voicemail greeting and the caller’s message
as it is being left. The caller cannot hear you.
To talk to the caller at any time during this process, press Flash 1. If you do not want to
continue to listen to the message while it is being left, hang up the phone.
Q
Press 4 to conference. This option is available only when call waiting is turned on and
you are on a call when the new call arrives. The new call is conferenced with you and
your current call or calls.
Note: For a description of how call announcing works if you share a station with another user,
including how to announce who the call is for, see “The “call for” announcing prompt” on page 7-3.
How TeleVantage gets the recording of the caller’s name
When you have call announcing turned on, callers who dial your extension hear a prompt that
says, “Please say your name.” TeleVantage records what the caller says and uses that recording
to announce the call.
Callers who have voice titles recorded do not hear this prompt, because TeleVantage uses their
voice titles to announce the call. This applies to both TeleVantage users and contacts. For more
information about TeleVantage contacts, see Chapter 16.
You can also turn this prompt off for all callers (see “Customizing or turning off call
announcing” on page 18-6).
Call waiting
When you are on a call and another call for you arrives, you hear the call waiting tone (two short
beeps). Press Flash to switch to the incoming call. The current call is put on hold.
If call announcing is turned off, you are connected to the incoming call immediately. If call
announcing is turned on, you hear the call announcing prompt. See “Answering a call using call
announcing” on page 4-2.
Call waiting options
The following options can be set in ViewPoint or by your system administrator:
Q
Turning call waiting off
Q
Disabling the call waiting beep when you are using ViewPoint
Q
Displaying Caller ID on your phone on call waiting
For more information, see “Customizing or turning off call waiting” on page 18-8.
CHAPTER 4. ANSWERING AND HANDLING CALLS ON THE PHONE
4-3
Multiple calls waiting
Depending on how your system is set up, you may have one or more calls waiting before the
next caller goes to voicemail. Normally you can have one call waiting, meaning that when you
are on a call you can accept one other call with call waiting. Subsequent incoming calls go
straight to voicemail without beeping.
Ask your system administrator how many calls you can have waiting.
Receiving a call waiting tone from your telephone company
If you receive a call waiting tone from your telephone company, as opposed to a tone from
TeleVantage, you must press Flash 8 to answer the call.
Answering a call at another ringing phone
With the proper permission, you can easily answer another ringing phone from your own phone.
To do so, pick up your phone and press *91 <ext> #, where <ext> is the extension of the phone
you want to answer.
You can skip the extension and enter just *91#. If only one phone is ringing, you are connected
to that phone. If multiple phones are ringing, you are connected to the one that started ringing
first.
To answer a ringing phone within your workgroup
To answer a ringing phone within your workgroup, press *99. This command only works within
public workgroups. If multiple phones are ringing in workgroups to which you belong, you are
connected to the one that started ringing first.
For more information about workgroups, see “Using workgroups” on page 16-14.
Using hands-free answering
Hands-free answering is an aid for headset and speakerphone users. Using hands-free
answering, you can receive or place calls while the phone is off-hook. Although the phone is
off-hook, the dial tone does not play, and the phone does not ring. When an incoming call
arrives, a zip tone (a beep) notifies you and TeleVantage connects you based on your settings
for call announcing.
Note: If you are using hands-free answering, call announcing is automatically used if you are
called as a member of a workgroup, or if you are sharing a station and the other user is currently
logged in to the station.
Enabling and disabling hands-free answering
To enable hands-free answering, press *10 at the dial tone. You hear, “Hands-free answering is
on.” The station is now off-hook and waiting for a call. With hands-free answering enabled, your
other telephone commands remain the same. For example, call forwarding and transferring
commands do not change.
4-4
To disable hands-free answering, press Flash to go to dial tone, then press *10. You hear
“Hands-free answering is off.”
Note: You can also control hands-free answering through ViewPoint. See “Enabling and
disabling hands-free answering” on page 18-11.
Placing, receiving and ending calls with hands-free answering
To place a call using hands-free answering, press Flash for a dial tone and then dial the number.
To receive a call, wait for a zip tone (a beep) to notify you of the incoming call. TeleVantage
connects you based on your call announcing settings (see “Call announcing” on page 4-2). If call
announcing is turned off, you are connected to the caller immediately after the zip tone.
To end a call while you are using hands-free answering, press Flash and then press 3 to hang
up. (If the other party hangs up, that will also end the call.) After the call ends, you may hear
dial tone for a brief period of time before you return to off-hook status.
You can cut short the dial tone and return to silent off-hook status by pressing Flash.
Hands-free answering and routing lists
In hands-free mode, your phone picks up whenever an incoming call arrives, so normally calls
will never proceed to subsequent actions on your routing list (such as voicemail). However,
callers can be sent to the next action on your routing list in either of the following ways:
Q
Manually by you with call announcing. If you are using call announcing, you can send
a call directly to voicemail by pressing 2 at the call announcing prompt, or to the next
action on your routing list by pressing Flash 3. See “Call announcing” on page 4-2.
Q
Manually by the caller without call announcing. If you are not using call announcing,
the caller has a 10-second window after the call is connected in which they can press #
to go to the next action on your routing list, which by default is voicemail.
For more information about routing lists, see “Using routing lists” on page 15-7.
Receiving internal intercom calls with voice-first answering
If you use a supported ADSI, digital or SIP phone as your TeleVantage station, you can use
voice-first answering, which turns your speakerphone into an intercom for internal callers.
When you receive an internal call with voice-first answering enabled, you hear a zip tone (a
beep) to alert you to the incoming call. The caller is then connected based on your settings for
call announcing (see “Call announcing” on page 4-2). If you have call announcing turned off,
the caller can begin speaking over your speakerphone immediately after the zip tone, and you
can answer without needing to touch your phone at all. If you are not at your desk, the caller can
press # to go to voicemail or the next action in your routing list to try you at a different location.
When the call ends, the phone speaker is automatically turned off and your phone is returned to
on-hook status.
Note: If you have an ADSI phone, receiving a call in voice-first mode causes the message
waiting light to blink for the duration of the call, even though you have no new voice messages.
CHAPTER 4. ANSWERING AND HANDLING CALLS ON THE PHONE
4-5
Unlike with hands-free answering (see the previous section), voice-first answering occurs only
for internal callers. All external calls ring your phone as normal, including external callers
transferred to you by other users.
You can place intercom calls to other users even if they don’t have voice-first answering turned
on, provided they have the correct type of phone. See “Placing a page or intercom call” on
page 3-6.
Note: If you are using voice-first answering, call announcing is automatically used if you are
called as a member of a workgroup, or if you are sharing a station and the other user is currently
logged in to the station.
Enabling voice-first answering
Note: To use voice-first answering, it must be enabled at the system level. Ask your system
administrator whether your system is using voice-first answering.
To turn voice-first answering on or off, press *12 at dial tone. You hear, “Voice-first answering
is on” or “voice-first answering is off.”
You can also turn voice-first answering on and off using ViewPoint. See “Enabling and
disabling voice-first answering” on page 18-12.
Handling calls with the phone ______________________________
The remaining sections in this chapter describe how to perform the following tasks using the
call-handling commands:
Q
Putting a call on hold
Q
Transferring a call
Q
Sending a call to voicemail
Q
Recording a call
Q
Creating a conference call
Q
Parking a call
Q
Unparking a call
Q
Putting a call on silent hold
Q
Getting an internal dial tone
Q
Entering an account code for a call
Important: If your phone is configured for direct transfer, pressing Flash while on a call lets you
transfer the call only. The other call-handling commands described in this section are not
available to you. To turn off direct transfer, talk to your system administrator.
For how to use ViewPoint’s Call Monitor to handle calls visually, see Chapter 11.
4-6
Call-handling commands
When you press Flash to put a call on hold, you hear a menu of call-handling commands (see
the next table). The caller does not hear this verbal menu.
Flash +
Call-handling Commands
1
Transfer the call.
2
Send the call to voicemail.
3
Disconnect from the call.
4
Reconnect to the call.
5
Create a conference call.
6
Park the call.
7
Use silent hold (mutes menu until next keypress).
8
Send a Flash command to an external Centrex or PBX
system rather than to TeleVantage.
#
Get an internal dial tone (dial a new call or use
telephone commands beginning with *).
*11
Enter an account code for the call or change the
account code already entered.
*16
Start recording the call. Press again to stop recording.
Flash
Reconnect to the call.
The remainder of this chapter explains these call-handling commands in detail.
Putting a call on hold
After you answer a call, you can put it on hold by pressing Flash. To return to the call, press
Flash again or press 4.
Important: You cannot put a call to a queue, auto attendant, or IVR Plug-in on hold. If you do,
the call is disconnected.
Notes
Q
If you hang up and have a call on hold, the ringback feature in TeleVantage rings your
phone after a period of time. To disable ringback or change the ringback time, see
“Turning ringback for calls on hold on and off” on page 18-9.
Q
Use the Flash button rather than the Hold button on your phone. With Flash, callers hear
music (if your system has music-on-hold set up). If you use your phone’s Hold button,
callers hear nothing.
CHAPTER 4. ANSWERING AND HANDLING CALLS ON THE PHONE
4-7
Transferring a call
You can transfer a call to another TeleVantage extension or an external phone number in one of
the following ways:
Q
Blind transfer. Transfer a call without talking to the recipient.
Q
Supervised transfer. Transfer a call after speaking to the recipient first.
Note: You can also transfer a call back to the auto attendant (your company’s main menu). Ask
your TeleVantage system administrator for the auto attendant’s extension or view it in ViewPoint’s
Extensions list.
To perform a blind transfer
1.
Press Flash 1.
2.
Enter the extension or external phone number to which you want to transfer the call.
If you do not know the extension, press 411 and select the recipient by name. When
dialing an external number, include the access code, for example, 9.
3.
Hang up. The call is transferred.
To perform a supervised transfer
1.
Press Flash 1.
2.
Enter the extension or external phone number to which you want to transfer the call.
If you do not know the extension, press 411 and select the recipient by name. When
dialing an external number, include the access code, for example, 9.
3.
Wait for an answer. If the recipient answers, introduce the call. The caller remains on
hold.
4.
Do one of the following:
Q
To complete the transfer when the recipient agrees to accept the call, hang up
or press Flash 2. The call is transferred to the recipient.
Q
To cancel the transfer, press Flash 1. You are disconnected from the recipient
and reconnected to the caller. Use this command if the recipient declines the call or
does not answer.
Using direct transfer
Your system administrator can put you into direct transfer mode, which disables all
call-handling commands other than transfer. To transfer a call in direct transfer mode, simply
press Flash and enter the extension or number. Complete blind or supervised transfers as
described in the previous sections.
When in direct transfer mode, you can transfer calls directly to a user’s voicemail by pressing *
after the extension. For example, in direct transfer mode Flash 115 * transfers the call to the
voice mailbox at extension 115.
4-8
About the transfer ring delay
When you transfer a call using the telephone commands and don’t hang up immediately,
TeleVantage provides a brief delay before ringing the recipient’s phone. This provides time for
you to hang up to do a blind transfer. System administrators can adjust the length of this delay
by adjusting the advanced system setting TUITransferRingDelay.
Transferring one of multiple calls
To transfer one of multiple calls on hold and then return to the other calls, do the following:
1.
Press Flash 1.
2.
The system prompts you to choose a call. Press the appropriate number.
3.
Enter the extension to which you want to transfer the call. If you do not know the
extension, press 411 and select the user by name.
4.
Complete the transfer in one of the following ways:
Q
Blind transfer. Hang up the phone to complete the transfer. To return to your calls
on hold, wait a few seconds, then pick up the phone again and press Flash 4.
Q
Supervised transfer. Speak to the recipient as necessary to announce the
transfer. To complete the transfer, press Flash 2, and then press 4 to return to any
calls on hold.
Sending a call to voicemail
You can send a call directly to your voicemail or the voicemail of any user.
1.
Press Flash 2.
2.
Enter the extension of the voice mailbox to which you want to send the call.
3.
Hang up.
Recording a call
If you have permission, you can record your phone calls. To start and stop recording a call, press
*16. You can use the record command in two ways:
Q
Before a call, press *16 at the dial tone to start recording, then dial the call. The recording
begins automatically when the call is connected.
Q
During a call, press Flash *16 at any time to start or stop recording.
Recording stops automatically when you are the only party in the call, or when the recording
exceeds the size of your mailbox. Call recordings are stored as new voice messages (see
“Listening to and managing your voicemail” on page 5-4). Note that if you start and stop
recording several times during a call, each recording is created as a separate voice message.
Note: If your voice mailbox is full, or you do not have a voice mailbox, you cannot record calls.
To record calls and manage call recordings using ViewPoint, see “Recording a call” on
page 11-12.
CHAPTER 4. ANSWERING AND HANDLING CALLS ON THE PHONE
4-9
Creating a conference call
You can create a conference call in the following ways:
Q
By adding parties
Q
By connecting separate calls
To create a conference call by adding parties
1.
Dial the first party and wait for an answer.
2.
Press Flash # for a dial tone to start another call.
3.
Dial the second party and wait for an answer.
4.
Press Flash 5. You and the two parties you called are now conferenced in a single call.
5.
Press Flash # for a dial tone to start another call. The conference is put on hold, and
the parties already in it can continue to talk to each other.
6.
Dial another party and wait for an answer.
7.
Press Flash 5 to add the new call to the existing conference call.
8.
Repeat steps 5-7 to add more parties to the conference call.
To create a conference call from separate calls
You can also create a conference call from separate, individual calls by pressing Flash 5.
When you hear the call waiting beep for an incoming call, you can conference that call with your
current call. After the call waiting beep, press Flash 4.
Notes
Q
Depending on how your administrator has configured your TeleVantage Server, up to 4,
7, 12, or 60 parties can participate in a conference call.
Q
You cannot conference two conference calls together.
Q
You can transfer a conference call, but not to the extension of an auto attendant, voice
mailbox, call center queue, or IVR Plug-in.
Q
When you hang up on an ongoing conference call, by default the conference continues
without you. The other participants can continue to talk, even if you started the conference
and your company is paying for the outgoing calls used to create it. To terminate the call,
each participant must hang up. Your administrator also can configure the system to
terminate conferences when you hang up.
To create conference calls in ViewPoint, see “Creating conference calls” on page 12-12.
Parking a call
Parking a call lets you put a call on hold and pick it up at any TeleVantage extension.
4-10
1.
Press Flash 6. TeleVantage tells you the call's orbit number. Make a note of it.
2.
Hang up.
Unparking a call
To retrieve a parked call:
1.
Pick up any TeleVantage extension and dial *92.
2.
Enter the orbit number. You are connected to the parked call.
Putting a call on silent hold
Press Flash 7 to put a caller on “silent hold.” With silent hold, you do not hear the cycling menu
prompts. The caller still hears hold music. Silent hold is useful for headset or speakerphone
users.
Press any key to resume the menu prompts. From there, you can return to the caller by pressing
4 or Flash.
Sending a Flash command to Centrex or another PBX
Press Flash 8 when you want to send a Flash command to your Centrex or other PBX system
instead of to TeleVantage.
Use this command if you are using TeleVantage with Centrex phone lines or with a remote PBX.
For example, on a Centrex system you must press Flash 8 before you can access Centrex
features such as transferring within the Centrex group.
You can also use the Flash 8 command to respond to a call waiting tone from your telephone
company. This tone is different than a call waiting tone sent by TeleVantage, to which you
respond by pressing Flash only.
Getting an internal dial tone
To put your current call on hold and get an internal dial tone, press Flash #. In this way you can
place new calls without disconnecting from your current call. From an internal dial tone you can
also choose telephone commands beginning with *, for example *66 to redial your last call.
Entering an account code for a call
While on a call, you can press Flash # *11 at any time to enter an account code for the call or
change the one already entered. See “Entering account codes when placing calls” on page 3-3
for more information, including what to do if the system prompts you to enter an account code
for an outgoing call.
Using digital feature phones _______________________________
This section contains instructions for using a supported digital feature phone with TeleVantage.
For a complete list of supported digital phones, see Installing TeleVantage. Digital feature
phones have several features that allow them to be used in conjunction with TeleVantage. For
configuration instructions for some of these features, see “Configuring a digital feature phone”
on page 18-13.
CHAPTER 4. ANSWERING AND HANDLING CALLS ON THE PHONE
4-11
With a digital feature phone you can do the following:
Q
Use line appearances to handle multiple calls simultaneously, and share lines between
phones. See the next section.
Q
Use the phone’s flexible buttons if TeleVantage features have been mapped to them. See
“Using custom-mapped TeleVantage commands” on page 4-13.
Using line appearances
Line appearances allow the digital feature phone to handle multiple simultaneous calls, with
each “line” mapped to a programmable button. For example, if you are on a call on a Line 1
button, an incoming call might ring Line 2, and you can press Line 2 to put the first call on hold
and answer the new call. You can have calls on hold on multiple lines and switch between them
simply by pressing the buttons.
You can have as many line appearances as there are programmable buttons on your phone.
There are two types of line appearances:
Q
Primary Directory Numbers (PDNs). These are lines assigned to you.
Q
Secondary Directory Numbers (SDNs). These are lines that are mapped to another
user’s PDNs, so that the line is shared between the two of you. When a call is ringing on
an SDN, either you or the other user can pick up. It is common to have several SDNs,
mapping to all of the PDNs on the other user's phone, so you can pick up any call the
other user may receive.
Using PDNs
A digital feature phone button configured as a PDN gives you an extra line with which to place
or receive calls. When an incoming call arrives while you are on the phone, the call rings the
next available PDN. To answer the incoming call, either press that PDN button, or press and
release the hook briefly. The previous call is put on hold.
Using TeleVantage call waiting in conjunction with PDNs gives you an unlimited number of
lines. Once all PDN lines are in use, a new incoming call causes the call waiting beep to sound,
and you can press Flash to take the call. You can continue to add new calls in this manner, and
can switch between them using the telephone commands or the ViewPoint Call Monitor.
Note: When the user places outbound calls, the highest-numbered available PDN is used.
When incoming calls arrive, the lowest-numbered available PDN is used. This provides a visual
cue when multiple calls are being handled.
Using SDNs
An SDN is a digital feature phone button configured as a extra line that refers to a PDN of
another user. When a call comes in to the primary user’s phone, both the primary user’s PDN
and your SDN ring, and either you or the other user can pick up. SDNs can be set and changed
by your system administrator only.
4-12
Example: An administrative assistant has an SDN mapped to her boss’s phone. When a call to
the boss comes in, it rings both the boss’s phone and the assistant’s SDN. The assistant can
answer and screen the call and put it on hold. The assistant can then let her boss know who is on
that particular line, and the boss can take the call simply by picking up the phone.
You can make outbound calls on an SDN line.
Using custom-mapped TeleVantage commands
You can map TeleVantage features to your digital phone’s programmable buttons. For
instructions, see “Configuring a digital feature phone” on page 18-13.
Once a feature has been mapped to a programmable button, you can simply press the button to
activate the feature. For example, pressing a button mapped to the Do Not Disturb feature turns
on the Do Not Disturb personal status.
Speed Dial with illuminated buttons
If your system has enabled the Busy Lamp Field (BLF) feature, and you map a programmable
button to Speed Dial a TeleVantage user, then that button’s LED lights up whenever the target
user is on a call. This lets you see whether users are available to take your calls.
The light illuminates only when the target user is on a call; it does not illuminate for other types
of TeleVantage unavailability such as Do Not Disturb. The Speed Dial target must be a
TeleVantage user. BLF does not work with Speed Dials aimed at other types of extensions such
as queues or auto attendants.
Note: With BLF enabled, do not confuse illuminated Speed Dial buttons with illuminated SDN
buttons. Unlike with SDN, a lit Speed Dial button does not indicate an incoming call and you
cannot press it to join the call. Pressing a lit Speed Dial button would place a Speed Dial call to
the (busy) user.
CHAPTER 4. ANSWERING AND HANDLING CALLS ON THE PHONE
4-13
CHAPTER 5
CHAPTER 5
MANAGING VOICEMAIL AND YOUR
ACCOUNT WITH THE PHONE
CHAPTER CONTENTS
About managing your account on the phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
About voicemail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Listening to and managing your voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Sending a message directly to a user’s voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Managing your greetings using the phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Forwarding your calls using the phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Sending your calls straight to voicemail with Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Selecting a personal status on the phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Changing your password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
About managing your account on the phone __________________
When you log on to your account, you hear the Voicemail / Account menu. From this menu you
can listen to and manage your voicemail, send new voice messages, and customize your
TeleVantage account in several ways.
For a comprehensive chart of the Voicemail/Account menu, see “Voicemail/Account menu
commands” on page A-7.
Logging on to your account
To log on to your account, pick up your phone or any TeleVantage phone and enter:
# <your extension> # <your password> #
At your own TeleVantage phone, you can skip your extension, as follows:
# # <your password> #
You can also log on from a phone outside the office. See “Logging on to TeleVantage from a
remote number” on page 6-6.
About voicemail __________________________________________
All new voice messages appear in your Inbox folder. For instructions on listening to them, see
“Listening to and managing your voicemail” on page 5-4.
Your TeleVantage account comes with two voicemail folders, the Inbox folder and the Saved
folder. When you use the Save command (6) on a voice message in the Inbox folder, the message
is moved to the Saved folder. You can add new voicemail folders using Viewpoint (see
“Organizing items in folders” on page 8-21), but the telephone commands can access messages
in the Inbox and Saved folders only.
Voicemail from the caller’s point of view
When callers reach your voicemail, they hear your active greeting followed by a beep that
signals the start of the recording. The following options are available to callers, but you must
tell callers about them in your greeting if you want callers to use them:
5-2
Q
Press # to skip the greeting and go directly to the beep.
Q
Press 0 to transfer to your office’s Operator.
Q
Press 7 to leave a callback number.
Q
Press # for more options after the greeting starts.
Knowing when you have new voice messages
TeleVantage can alert you in the following ways when you have new (unheard) voice messages:
Q
Stutter dial tone. When you pick up your phone, the dial tone begins with several short
tones, and then changes into a regular dial tone. The stutter dial tone indicates that you
have new voice messages.
Note: Stutter dial tone is not available on Toshiba Strata digital phones. Use the
message-waiting light.
You or your TeleVantage system administrator can turn stutter dial tone off using
ViewPoint. See “Turning off stutter dial tone” on page 18-20.
Q
Message-waiting light. If your phone has a CLASS message-waiting light, you can
have it flash to indicate new voice messages.
To use a message waiting light, you or your TeleVantage administrator must enable it
using the TeleVantage ViewPoint. See “Enabling a message waiting light” on
page 18-20.
Q
E-mail, pager, and call notification. TeleVantage can send you an e-mail message,
page you, or call you whenever you receive a new voice message. You can choose to be
notified only for Urgent messages, and you can schedule notification to occur only
during the times you want.
You can set up notification in ViewPoint. See “E-mail, pager, and call notifications” on
page 13-12. If you do not have ViewPoint, your TeleVantage system administrator can
set up e-mail and pager notification for you.
Note: If multiple users share a phone, the message-waiting light and stutter dial tone occur if
there are new messages for any of the users assigned to that phone.
If voice messages disappear from your folders
Depending on how your system administrator has configured the system, your voice messages
may be automatically archived from time to time. If an important voice message has disappeared
from your voicemail folders, talk to your system administrator about recovering the message.
Customizing voice message playback order
Using ViewPoint you can specify the order in which you hear new and old voice messages when
listening by phone. See “Setting voice message playback order” on page 18-20 for more
information. If you do not have ViewPoint, your TeleVantage system administrator can set this
option for you.
CHAPTER 5. MANAGING VOICEMAIL AND YOUR ACCOUNT WITH THE PHONE
5-3
Listening to and managing your voicemail ____________________
To listen to your voice messages, log on and press 1. This plays the messages in your Inbox
folder, including any new (unheard) messages.
To listen to voice messages in your Saved folder, log on and press 2.
Voice message telephone commands
You can use the telephone commands in the following table while you listen to a message or
after the message has played.
Voice Message Commands
Use while or after a message plays
1
Replay the message.
2
Skip to the next message.
3
Delete or undelete the message.
4
5-4
1
Reply to the message.
2
Forward the message.
3
Call back the person who left the message.
4
Call back the person who left the message and
delete the message.
5
Skip to the previous message.
6
Save this message to the Saved folder.
7
Skip back 4 seconds in the current message.
8
Undelete all deleted messages.
9
Skip ahead 4 seconds in the current message.
#
(During message-received preamble) Skip to the beginning
of the message.
#
(During message) Skip rest of the message.
Deleting and undeleting messages
To delete a message, press 3 during or after the message.
You can undelete messages as long as you remain in the current voice messages session. If you
hang up or back out of the voice messages menu, all messages that you have deleted are deleted
permanently.
Do one of the following to undelete messages while you are in a voice messages session:
Q
Press 3 to undelete the current message. To undelete a previous message, press
5 until you hear the message and then press 3 to undelete it.
Q
Press 8 to undelete all deleted messages. Doing this changes all deleted messages
to heard messages in your Inbox.
Replying to a voice message
When you reply to a voice message, you send a message of your own to the user who sent you
voicemail. Your reply message does not include the original message.
To reply to a message
1.
Press 4 1 while or after a message plays.
2.
If the message was sent to multiple recipients, you can reply to the sender only or to
the sender and all recipients. To reply to the sender only, press 1. To reply to the sender
and all recipients, press 2.
3.
At the tone, record your reply message. Press # when you are done.
4.
Press 1 to send your reply. See the table on page 5-4 for other options.
Forwarding a voice message
When you forward a voice message, you send a copy of the message to the voicemail of one or
more users, preceded by a new message that you record. Your message can introduce the
forwarded message to users, for example, it might say, “I just received this message about our
new product, and I thought the three of you ought to hear it.”
To forward a message
1.
Press 4 2 while or after a message plays.
2.
At the tone, record your message. Press # when you are done.
3.
Press 1 to accept your recorded message. See the table on page 5-7 for other options.
4.
Enter the extension to which you want to forward the message followed by #. If you
do not know a user’s extension, press 411 and select the user by name. Enter multiple
extensions in the following format:
ext1 # ext2 # ext3 # #
CHAPTER 5. MANAGING VOICEMAIL AND YOUR ACCOUNT WITH THE PHONE
5-5
Calling back a voice message
When you call back a voice message, TeleVantage places a call to the extension or external
phone number of the person who left you the message. In cases where multiple numbers are
available for the person—for example, a callback number and a Caller ID
number—TeleVantage prompts you to choose which one to dial.
Note: If the system cannot dial the callback number, see your TeleVantage system
administrator. The call dialing rules set up by your TeleVantage system administrator may need
to be changed.
To call back a voice message
1.
Press 4 3 or 4 4 while or after a message plays (4 4 deletes the message in addition to
calling the person back).
2.
If you are calling back a message that was forwarded to you, TeleVantage prompts you
to choose whom to call back—the person who forwarded the message or the original
caller.
3.
TeleVantage offers you a default number to call. To dial that number, press 1. To
choose from a list of other numbers associated with the caller, press 2. If the caller is
a TeleVantage contact, the list includes all the contact’s numbers. See “Managing
contacts” on page 16-4.
After talking to the caller, if you remain on the phone you will be returned to the voice message
menu so that you can delete the message or move on to the next message. To end a call and
remain on the phone, bypassing the voice message menu, press Flash 3 or wait for the other
party to hang up.
Sending a message directly to a user’s voicemail ______________
You can record a message and send it directly to the voicemail of one or more TeleVantage users
with the telephone commands.
1.
log on to your account and press 3.
2.
Record your message and press # when you are done.
3.
Press 1 to accept the recorded message. See the following table for other options.
4.
Enter the extension to which you want to send the message and then press #. Enter
multiple extensions in the following format:
ext1 # ext2 # ext3 # #
If you have permission, you can send the message to all users by entering 8888#.
5-6
After you record a message, you can use the commands shown in the next table.
Commands for Recorded Messages
Use after recording a message
1
Accept the recording.
2
Review the recording.
3
Rerecord the recording.
4
Append to the end of the recording.
5
Mark the message as Urgent.
6
Mark the message as Private.
7
Enter a callback number (external number only).
*
Cancel the message.
Note: If you mark a message as Private, the recipient cannot forward it and users who share the
recipient’s voice mailbox cannot play the message.
Managing your greetings using the phone____________________
A greeting is a message that callers hear when they reach your voicemail. TeleVantage lets you
record and store multiple greetings for use in different situations, and easily switch between
them. For example, you can have a standard workday greeting, an after-hours greeting, a
vacation greeting, and more. The greeting that currently plays to callers is called the active
greeting. You can designate a new active greeting at any time.
Note: You can record greetings for special situations, for example, greetings for when you’re on
the phone (see “Handling busy station calls differently than calls not answered” on page 15-14),
or when someone important calls (see Chapter 17, “Using Call Rules” ).
For instructions on recording a new greeting, or re-recording an existing one, see “Recording
your voicemail greeting” on page 2-3.
CHAPTER 5. MANAGING VOICEMAIL AND YOUR ACCOUNT WITH THE PHONE
5-7
Managing your greetings
To manage your greetings using the telephone commands, log on and press 4. TeleVantage
plays each of your greetings, beginning with the active greeting. You can use the commands
shown in the following table either while you listen to a greeting or after a greeting has played.
Greeting Commands
Use while or after a greeting plays
1
Replay the greeting.
2
Skip to the next greeting.
3
Make this greeting active.
4
Rerecord the greeting.
6
Record a new greeting.
7
Delete the greeting.
When you record a new greeting by using the telephone commands, the greeting appears in
ViewPoint’s Greetings folder with the name “Greeting.” You can give the greeting a name using
ViewPoint (see “Managing folders and items” on page 8-16).
Available space for greetings
Your TeleVantage system administrator has allocated a limited amount of disk space on the
TeleVantage Server for your greetings and all of your voicemail. If your existing greetings fill
the space allocated to you, you cannot record a new greeting.
5-8
Forwarding your calls using the phone ______________________
You can use the telephone commands to forward your calls, so that your incoming calls ring
another phone. You can forward your calls to another extension or an external number.
You can also forward your calls using ViewPoint. See Chapter 15.
Turning call forwarding on
1.
Log on to your account and press 5.
2.
Do one of the following:
Q
To forward calls to another extension, press 2 and enter the extension.
Q
To forward calls to an external number, press 3 and enter the number, including the
access code for the dialing service that you want to use and any prefixes that apply,
such as the “1” for long-distance numbers in North America. For example, to
forward your calls to a long-distance number by using a standard outside phone
number dialing service, you can enter 9 1 212 123 4567. (The spaces are shown for
clarity.)
Note:You can enter * to force a 2-second pause in dialing, for example, between the
number and an extension.
3.
Follow the prompts to confirm the number you entered.
Note: You can use a shortcut to forward your calls to the phone where you are. Log on to your
account from that phone, and then press 5 1.
Turning call forwarding off
To turn call forwarding off, log on to your account and press 5 4.
Checking your call forwarding number
When you log on to your account while your calls are forwarded, TeleVantage reminds you that
call forwarding is on and tells you the external number to which your calls are being forwarded.
After you log on, you can check the external number again at any time by pressing 5 5.
Ignoring your call rules
If you have created call rules (see Chapter 17) you can have TeleVantage ignore them, to make
sure that your calls are sent only to your forwarded location. Ignoring call rules suspends your
call rules and sends all your calls to your Standard routing list. For more information, see
“Ignoring all call rules” on page 17-10.
To ignore your call rules, log on and press 5 6.
CHAPTER 5. MANAGING VOICEMAIL AND YOUR ACCOUNT WITH THE PHONE
5-9
Sending your calls straight to voicemail with Do Not Disturb _____
You can use send all your incoming calls directly to voicemail without ringing your phone. To
do so, select the personal status Do Not Disturb as follows:
1.
Log on to your account by picking up your phone and entering # <your extension> #
<your password> #.
2.
Press 6 1 2.
To begin receiving calls again, log on to your account and press 6 1 1.
For more information about personal statuses, see the next section and Chapter 9.
Selecting a personal status on the phone _____________________
TeleVantage makes it easy to select a personal status using the telephone commands. Personal
status is a quick way of changing several settings at once, for example, forwarding your calls
and changing your greeting. It also appears visually in ViewPoint, letting your colleagues know
your current status. See Chapter 9 for detailed information about personal statuses.
To select a personal status on the telephone
1.
Press # and log on.
2.
Press 6 1, and then press:
Q
1 for Available
Q
2 for Do Not Disturb (see the previous section)
Q
3 for In a Meeting
Q
4 for Out of the Office
Q
5 for On Vacation
Q
6 for Available (Queue Only)
Q
7 for Available (Non-Queue)
Q
8 for On Break
Q
9 for custom personal statuses (followed by 1 to select the first custom status, 2 for
the second, and so forth).
Note: Call center agents can select a call center personal status using the *50, *51, *52, or *53
quick commands. See “Starting and ending your shift, and taking breaks” on page B-2.
Changing your password __________________________________
To change your password using the phone, log on and press 6 3. Enter your new password
followed by #.
5-10
CHAPTER 6
CHAPTER 6
USING TELEVANTAGE WITH A
REMOTE PHONE
CHAPTER CONTENTS
About using TeleVantage with a remote phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Tips for all remote phone use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Using TeleVantage from a remote number without ViewPoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Using TeleVantage ViewPoint remotely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Associating Viewpoint with a remote number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Using an external station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Configuring an external station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Changing your external station number with *17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
About using TeleVantage with a remote phone_________________
A remote phone is any phone that is not wired to a station port on the TeleVantage Server
computer, including all IP phones as well as mobile phones, home phones, and legacy PBX
phones. From any remote phone, TeleVantage offers complete access to your voicemail and
account settings, as well as the ability to receive, place, transfer, and manage TeleVantage calls.
In addition, depending on the setup of your remote phone and ViewPoint, you can use
ViewPoint with your phone to manage your voice messages, greetings and calls.
You can use TeleVantage from a remote phone in the following ways:
Q
From a remote number without ViewPoint. (See “Using TeleVantage from a remote
number without ViewPoint” on page 6-5.) You can forward your TeleVantage calls to
the remote phone’s number, specify verbal call screening options, and handle incoming
TeleVantage calls using the telephone commands, including transfer, conference and
call recording. By calling the office and logging on, you can check your voicemail,
change your account settings, and (providing you have permission) place new outbound
calls through TeleVantage.
Q
From a remote number with ViewPoint. (See “Associating Viewpoint with a remote
number” on page 6-9.) By specifying the remote number when logging onto ViewPoint,
you can use ViewPoint to play voice messages, make and play recordings, place
outbound calls, and take calls you see in the Call Monitor. When performing any of these
ViewPoint actions, TeleVantage rings your remote phone’s number to connect you to
the chosen procedure. Note that calls placed with ViewPoint are billed to your office, not
your remote phone's number, since TeleVantage calls you to connect you to the call.
If the “imitate a station” feature is turned on, you can also use ViewPoint to visually
manage calls that are forwarded or routed to your remote number.
Q
From an external station. (See “Using an external station” on page 6-10.) If your
system administrator has defined your remote phone as an external station, it behaves
exactly like a desk phone at the office, and is the most powerful way to use TeleVantage
remotely. Calls to your extension ring the remote phone without using call forwarding,
and all TeleVantage phone features work with the remote phone, such as call waiting.
When using ViewPoint, you log on using your external station ID (a number which your
system administrator will give you), after which all Viewpoint commands and call
control work with your remote phone.
The following tables show the features that are available remotely depending on your setup:
6-2
Feature
Remote Number
External Station
Internal Station
Cell phone, home
phone, legacy
PBX station
IP Phone, cell
phone, home
phone, legacy
PBX station
Analog phones,
digital feature
phones
Check voicemail
Yes
Yes
Yes
Manage account using
telephone commands
Yes
Yes
Yes
Screen calls
Yes
Yes
Yes
Manage calls (transfer,
conference, record, etc.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Must log on first
IP phones Yes,
others must
log on first
Yes
Via call forwarding
Yes
Yes
IP phones only
IP phones only
Yes
Only with "Imitate
a station" turned
on
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
SIP phones Yes,
others
with hands-free
answering on
Yes
Only with "Imitate
a station" turned
off
Only with "Imitate
a station" turned
off
Only with "Imitate
a station" turned
off
Via call forwarding
Via call forwarding
or changing
external station's
remote number
Via call forwarding
Phone Features
Place calls
Receive calls
TeleVantage dial tone
when you pick up the
phone
Call waiting
Hands-free answering
Receive pages,
intercom calls,
voice-first answering
Call screening
w/password prompting
Change where you
receive calls
CHAPTER 6. USING TELEVANTAGE WITH A REMOTE PHONE
6-3
Feature
Remote Number
External Station
Internal Station
Cell phone, home
phone, legacy
PBX station
IP Phone, cell
phone, home
phone, legacy
PBX station
Analog phones,
digital feature
phones
Specify remote
number
Specify station
number
Specify station
number
Check voicemail, change
all ViewPoint settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Place calls
Yes
Yes
Yes
Receive calls
Via call forwarding
Yes
Yes
Manage calls (transfer,
conference, record, etc.)
using your phone
Only with "Imitate
a station" turned
on
Yes
Yes
Manage calls (transfer,
conference, record, etc.)
you receive at any
number in your routing
list including call
forwarding
Only with "Imitate
a station" turned
on
Only with "Imitate
a station" turned
on
Only with "Imitate
a station" turned
on
ViewPoint Features
Log on to ViewPoint
6-4
Tips for all remote phone use ______________________________
The following sections apply to all remote phone use.
Using ** instead of Flash at a remote phone
When using the TeleVantage telephone commands with any remote phone, including external
stations, you must press ** instead of Flash, for example, to put calls on hold or use call-handling
commands such as transfer or conference.
If you’re using an external station and ** has no effect, check with your system administrator to
make sure that TeleVantage “voice resources” are enabled for your external station.
Placing TeleVantage calls with an IP phone external station
If you have an IP phone defined as an external station, you place TeleVantage calls exactly as
if you were using a desk phone in the office. There is no need to log in and press # to place calls,
as with other external stations. When you pick up the IP phone you connect to TeleVantage
internal dial tone, so you can dial extensions directly, use the telephone commands without
logging in, and so on. As with a desk phone, use access codes (such as 9) to dial external calls.
Receiving your voice messages at a remote phone
You can have TeleVantage automatically call you when you receive a new voice message, so
that you can hear the message as soon as it arrives. For instructions on setting up call notification
of new voice messages, see “Setting up call notifications” on page 13-14.
If you are using call notifications, you can log on and change the phone number to which
notification calls are sent, so that continue to you receive them wherever you go. To change the
call notification number, log on to your account and press 6 4.
Using TeleVantage from a remote number without ViewPoint ____
This section does not apply to you if you have an IP phone defined as an external station.
When working at remote number without ViewPoint, you can still receive your TeleVantage
calls using call forwarding, screen them using verbal call screening options, and handle them
using the telephone commands, including transfer, conference and call recording. For
instructions on verbal call screening, see “Call announcing” on page 4-2. For instructions on
using the call-handling telephone commands, see “Handling calls with the phone” on page 4-6.
By calling the office and logging on, you can check your voicemail, change your account
settings, and (providing you have permission) place new outbound calls through TeleVantage.
See the following sections for instructions.
CHAPTER 6. USING TELEVANTAGE WITH A REMOTE PHONE
6-5
Logging on to TeleVantage from a remote number
Logging on to TeleVantage connects you to the Voicemail / Account menu, from which you can
check your voicemail, change or record new greetings, forward your calls, change your personal
status, and more. For a full description of the telephone commands, see Chapter 2 through
Chapter 5 and Appendix A.
If you have permission, you can also place new outbound calls through TeleVantage.
To log onto TeleVantage from a remote phone
1.
Call your office.
2.
When the system prompts you to enter an extension, enter # <your extension> #
<your password> #.
Note: The initial key that you to use to log on might not be # on your TeleVantage system. Ask
your TeleVantage system administrator if your system uses a different key.
Logging out from a TeleVantage session
When you have logged into TeleVantage from a remote phone, and you are ready to end your
TeleVantage session, press *96 at a dial tone before you hang up your phone. Doing this logs
you completely off the system. If you do not log off completely, TeleVantage waits a short
period of time before ending the session. If you pick up your phone again before that period is
over, TeleVantage still controls the line and assumes that you are calling from within the system.
Therefore, any number you dial will be treated as if it were an extension within TeleVantage.
Logging on from a voicemail greeting
When you call a TeleVantage extension and get voicemail, you may be able to press 9 during
the voicemail greeting to log on to your account. Check with your system administrator to see
if this feature has been enabled for you.
Receiving TeleVantage calls at a remote number
This section does not apply to you if you have an external station. See “Using an external
station” on page 6-10.
To receive your TeleVantage calls at a remote number that is not an external station, forward
your calls to that phone. See “Forwarding your calls using the phone” on page 5-9. If you’re at
a remote phone and you want to forward your calls to that phone, log onto your account from it
and press 5 1. Your calls are forwarded to the phone you’re using.
When you receive a call from TeleVantage while you are at a remote phone, you can use the
TeleVantage telephone commands just as if the remote phone were a TeleVantage station. Be
sure to substitute ** for Flash when using the telephone commands at a remote phone.
6-6
Notes
Q
Using ViewPoint, you can password-protect your forwarded calls so that you
must enter your TeleVantage password to be connected to the call. This
ensures that only you receive your forwarded calls. See “Forwarding calls in
ViewPoint” on page 15-3.
Q
TeleVantage call waiting and hands-free answering are not available at
non-station remote phones unless you are imitating a station (see “Imitating a
station at a remote number” on page 6-10).
Placing calls through TeleVantage from a remote phone
If you have permission, you can place outbound calls through TeleVantage after
logging on. These calls are billed to TeleVantage, give you access to the call-handling
telephone commands, and are logged in your Call Log.
To place a call through TeleVantage from a remote phone
1.
Call your office and log on (see “Logging on to TeleVantage from a remote
number” on page 6-6).
2.
Press #.
3.
Dial the call (including access code).
Notes
Q
logging on and pressing # gives you an internal dial tone, the same as when you
pick up your desk phone. From an internal dial tone you can dial TeleVantage
extensions, and use the telephone commands beginning with * (see “Quick call
commands” on page A-3).
Q
When placing calls through TeleVantage, press **3 to end each call instead of
hanging up the phone. If you hang up, you must call your office and log on again
if you want to place more outgoing calls through TeleVantage. Pressing **3
eliminates the need to call your office again, because you remain connected to
TeleVantage.
If your remote phone is “stuck” on a TeleVantage session
If you are trying to make a non-TeleVantage call from your remote phone, and you
find your call treated as if it were an internal TeleVantage call (for example, you reach
a user at your office), the likely cause is that you did not log out from a TeleVantage
session immediately beforehand. When you simply hang up to end a session logout
does occurs automatically, but not until the phone company drops the call, which can
take up to 20 seconds. To place a call immediately after a TeleVantage session, end
the session by dialing *96. This logs you out from your TeleVantage session and
returns you to your telephone company’s dial tone, from which you can dial your call.
Alternatively, you can hang up and wait for a short period before trying your call
again, to give the phone company time to drop the connection.
CHAPTER 6. USING TELEVANTAGE WITH A REMOTE PHONE
6-7
Using redial and other quick call commands when logged in
After logging on from a remote phone, you can use any quick-call telephone command
beginning with *, for example *66 to redial a call or *15 to place a page or intercom
call. For a complete list, see “Quick call commands” on page A-3.
To use a quick call command, press # after logging on to get internal dial tone, then
dial the command.
Using the redial command after logging on
When you use the *66 redial command when logged in from a remote number, the
number dialed is that of the last call you placed while remote, either manually or by
using the voice message callback feature. It is not the number of the last call you placed
locally.
Example: On Monday, you call into your office from a remote location and place a
call to (617) 123-9876. For the rest of the week, you work in your office and place
many calls. On Saturday, you call into your office from a remote phone and use the
*66 command. The system dials (617) 123-9876 because that was the last call you
placed while remote.
Using TeleVantage ViewPoint remotely _______________________
There are two ways to use ViewPoint from a remote computer (a computer not on your
office network):
Q
ViewPoint Web Access. If your office has set up TeleVantage Web Services,
you can access a version of TeleVantage ViewPoint using a web browser, from
any computer with an Internet connection. Simply type the URL address of
ViewPoint Web Access into your browser window. Your TeleVantage system
administrator can tell you the URL for ViewPoint Web Access.
Once you are connected to ViewPoint Web Access, click Help for instructions.
You can also use the instructions for Viewpoint in this manual, as ViewPoint
Web Access is very similar in most respects.
Q
ViewPoint over VPN. If your office’s network is set up so you can log on
remotely via a VPN (Virtual Private Network) connection, you can use
TeleVantage ViewPoint as if you were on the network at your office. Contact
your network administrator to see if you have VPN support and how to start
VPN from your remote computer.
ViewPoint will not run without a network connection to your TeleVantage
Server. Be sure you have an active VPN connection to your office before
launching ViewPoint.
6-8
Using ViewPoint remotely with a phone
How you use ViewPoint with a remote phone depends on whether your remote phone
is defined as an external station.
Q
If your phone is not an external station, see the next section.
Q
If your phone is an external station, see “Using an external station” on
page 6-10.
Associating Viewpoint with a remote number _________________
This section does not apply to you if you have an external station. See “Using an
external station” on page 6-10.
By associating ViewPoint with your remote number, you can use ViewPoint
commands that require a phone, for example, playing voice messages over the phone
and making recordings. ViewPoint rings your remote phone to connect you to the
chosen procedure. You can also place and receive calls using ViewPoint as follows:
Q
Placing calls. Instead of dialing the call on your phone, use a ViewPoint
command to place the call (see Chapter 12, “Placing Calls in ViewPoint” ).
TeleVantage rings your phone to connect you to the call being placed. Because
TeleVantage is placing the call, your office is charged for it. The call is logged
in your Call Log.
Q
Receiving calls. You can use the Take Call command on any ringing call that
you see in the Call Monitor.
Because your remote phone is not an external station, you must still forward your calls
to it, though you can do that as part of the login process (see the procedure below). By
default you cannot use ViewPoint call control on your calls and many station features
do not work with the remote phone, such as call waiting, hands-free answering, and
ringback for calls left on hold or parked. However, you can enable most of those
features by imitating a station (see the next section).
To associate ViewPoint with a remote number
1.
Start ViewPoint.
2.
At the Vertical TeleVantage ViewPoint Logon dialog box, click Options to
expand the dialog box.
3.
Click Remote number, and enter the phone number of the remote phone at
which you are working.
4.
Click OK. The Select Your ViewPoint Phone dialog box opens.
5.
Leave Use the phone at number <number> to place and answer calls
using ViewPoint selected. Optionally, check Forward my calls to this
number to forward your calls to your remote phone.
6.
Click OK.
CHAPTER 6. USING TELEVANTAGE WITH A REMOTE PHONE
6-9
Imitating a station at a remote number
When you work from a remote number, you can have TeleVantage imitate a station on
calls routed to you, so you can use the ViewPoint Call Monitor and other station
features. Once you do so, your remote phone behaves like an external station, allowing
you to use the ViewPoint Call Monitor and all other ViewPoint features in conjunction
with it. However, unlike an external station, with an imitated station you cannot use
hands-free answering settings, and your IP phone's message waiting light will not
work.
To imitate a station on calls routed to your remote phone
1.
Turn on call forwarding or include the remote phone in your routing list. See
Chapter 15, “Call Forwarding and Routing Lists.”
2.
Choose Tools > Options to open the Options dialog box, and click the Phone
tab. Check Imitate a station when routing my incoming calls to external
numbers.
With this setup, whenever TeleVantage routes a call to your remote number(s), the call
appears in the Call Monitor and gives you full ViewPoint control.
Note: When using this setting, TeleVantage uses your station’s call screening options
as specified in Tools > Options on the Phone \ Call Announcing tab. Any call screening
options you specified for call forwarding or your routing list are ignored.
Using an external station___________________________________
If your system administrator has defined your IP phone, home phone, cell phone, or
other remote phone as an external station, TeleVantage treats it as if were an internal
station. Whenever the system would ring the internal station, it rings the external
station instead. For example:
Q
Calls to your extension ring your external station automatically. You do not
need to forward your calls to the remote phone.
Q
Ringback for TeleVantage calls you leave on hold or parked rings your
external station.
Q
All station features work with the external station. For example, when you’re
on a TeleVantage call, TeleVantage call waiting beeps at your external station.
You can also use hands-free mode at the external station.
Q
ViewPoint is fully integrated with the external station, including complete call
control capability.
Note: Custom ring patterns do not work with external stations. See “Changing ring
patterns” on page 18-11.
6-10
There are two types of external stations:
Q
An IP phone. IP phones configured as external stations behave like regular
TeleVantage stations. You can place calls as if from your desk phone (see
“Placing TeleVantage calls with an IP phone external station” on page 6-5).
You can move your IP phone to other locations whenever you want. Note that
after moving H.323 phones, you must pick up and replace the handset for
TeleVantage to will send your incoming calls to the phone's new location. This
is not required for SIP phones.
Q
A phone at an external phone number. These external stations behave just
like regular TeleVantage stations, except that in order to place TeleVantage
calls using the phone, you must first call your TeleVantage system and log on.
See the next section.
Placing TeleVantage calls from an external station
This section does not apply to IP phones. No special procedure is required to place
TeleVantage calls from an IP phone external station.
From a non-IP external station, use one of the following procedures to place outbound
TeleVantage calls:
Using ViewPoint
Use any ViewPoint command to place the call. Your external station rings to connect
you to the call.
Using the phone
1.
Call your office from the external station and log on to your account. See
“Logging on to TeleVantage from a remote number” on page 6-6.
2.
Press # to get an internal dial tone. Then do one of the following:
Q
To place the call without ViewPoint call control or TeleVantage call
waiting, simply dial the call (including access code).
Q
To enable ViewPoint call control and TeleVantage call waiting for the
call, press *17, then dial the call (including access code). As long as your
call to TeleVantage lasts, TeleVantage treats further calls you make as
coming from your external station, enabling Call Monitor control and full
ViewPoint integration on those calls.
Disconnecting from a call and remaining on the line
You can disconnect from a call and remain on the line, which is useful when placing
a series of calls through TeleVantage. By disconnecting from your current outgoing
call only, you do not have to repeatedly dial into TeleVantage. Your connection with
TeleVantage continues, and you can proceed to make more outgoing calls.
To disconnect from your current call, press ** 3.
CHAPTER 6. USING TELEVANTAGE WITH A REMOTE PHONE
6-11
Using ViewPoint with an external station
ViewPoint treats external stations just like regular internal stations. You can use
ViewPoint commands that require a phone, place and answer calls, and handle calls in
the Call Monitor using ViewPoint commands. There is no need to “imitate” a station
(as described in “Imitating a station at a remote number” on page 6-10).
Note: If you want to use ViewPoint call control when answering incoming calls at any
of your routing list's external numbers you still must turn on "imitate a station."
To use ViewPoint with an external station
1.
Start ViewPoint.
2.
At the Vertical TeleVantage ViewPoint Logon dialog box, click Options to
expand the dialog box.
3.
Click Station ID, and enter your external station ID. Your system
administrator can tell you what it is.
4.
Click OK.
Configuring an external station _____________________________
With the proper permission, you can use ViewPoint to change the configuration of
your external station. For example, you can specify a different phone number or IP
address, or change the type of remote phone you have from an IP phone to a regular
phone number.
If your external station is a SIP phone, see the next section, “Configuring a SIP phone.”
To configure an external station
6-12
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
Click the Phone \ Station Features tab.
3.
Under Destination, select one of the following types of external station:
Q
External Number. Choose for any external station with a phone number.
Q
Generic H.323 Device. Choose for any H.323-based IP phone not listed,
including Polycom IP phones.
Q
Intel PBX-IP Media Gateway. The Intel PBX-IP Media Gateway is not
supported in TeleVantage 8.
Q
Uniden IP Phone. Choose for H.323-based Uniden IP phones.
Q
TeleVantage Softphone. Choose for the TeleVantage H.323 Softphone.
See Appendix F, “Using the TeleVantage H.323 SoftPhone.”
Q
SIP Phone. Choose for any SIP-based IP phone, such as the Vertical
Aastra 480i or eyeBeam SIP softphone. See the next section for more
instructions.
Q
None. This selection is used by system administrators to create a null
station, which is a station without a physical phone.
4.
In Call using, select the dialing service used when the user places calls from
the phone. For more information, see “Using dialing services” on page 12-8.
5.
Enter the external station’s phone number in Number, or, for IP phones, the
phone’s IP address in Address.
6.
Check Stutter dial tone to have the phone alert you to new voice messages
by stuttering the dial tone when you first pick up.
7.
Check Disconnect when idle to disconnect calls immediately when you end
a call. If unchecked, TeleVantage provides a 10-15 second window of
internal dial tone after a call ends so that you can use the telephone
commands for other activities. However, when unchecked you may find that
you cannot place a new call from ViewPoint immediately after ending a call,
because TeleVantage still considers the station off-hook. Checking the
setting should solve that problem.
Note that if checked, the station will not return to dial tone after the other
party in a call hangs up.
CHAPTER 6. USING TELEVANTAGE WITH A REMOTE PHONE
6-13
Configuring a SIP phone
If you have a SIP phone external station, you can configure its behavior and customize your SIP
URI, as follows:
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
Click the Phone \ Station Features tab.
3.
In Call Using, your company’s SIP dialing service should be selected. If your
company has more than one SIP dialing service, you can choose a different one here.
4.
Under Phone’s SIP address, choose whether the phone is registered with
TeleVantage or not, as follows:
Q
Registered to SIP span. Choose this if your SIP phone is registered with
TeleVantage, so that you can pick up the phone and dial TeleVantage extensions
directly. Select the IP address of a TeleVantage SIP span from the drop-down list.
When you configure your SIP phone, you should set the phone’s SIP Server or
Domain field to that IP address.
In the Userinfo field, enter the userinfo portion of the user’s SIP URI (for example
“vwilliams” in “sip:vwilliams@www.vertical.com”). This field uniquely identifies
the phone on the TeleVantage SIP span, so whatever text is specified here must also
be entered in the SIP phone's Username field when you configure the phone.
Q
SIP URI. Choose this method if your SIP phone is registered with a
non-TeleVantage SIP service such as <www.broadvoice.com> or fwd.pulver.com,
and you want to receive calls from TeleVantage too. Enter the phone’s SIP URI, for
example, “sip:518589@fwd.pulver.com.” Note that when using this option, calls
from the phone will be placed over the phone’s SIP service, not TeleVantage, so
you cannot dial TeleVantage extensions without first dialing the TeleVantage
Server's SIP span address.
5.
6-14
Check Stutter dial tone to have the phone alert you to new voice messages by
stuttering the dial tone when you first pick up.
6.
Check Disconnect when idle to have TeleVantage hang up the trunk call
immediately whenever a call on the SIP phone ends.
For most SIP users, you should leave this field unchecked. In this state
TeleVantage provides 10-15 seconds of TeleVantage dial tone after a call
ends, making it easy to place new calls immediately after a call ends. If you
check the field, the SIP phone does not generate its own dial tone after the
other party in a call hangs up.
If checked, the connection to the SIP phone is dropped when the call is
completed, and the phone returns to Idle and will play its own dial tone, busy
tone or silence.
7.
Click OK.
Using a SIP phone
You should be aware of the following SIP phone behaviors:
Q
SIP phones do not show as off-hook in ViewPoint Extension lists until the
number is fully dialed.
Q
When you dial 9 (or another access code) for an outside line, the phone does
not provide an “external dial tone” until you have dialed the full number.
Q
After dialing the number, you should press Dial or Send, otherwise there will
be a 3 to 4 second delay before the call is placed.
Changing your external station number with *17_______________
If you have an external station, you can use the telephone commands to change its
location, for example, from your home to your cell phone. To do so:
1.
From the remote phone that you want to set as your external station, call your
office and log on to your account. (See “Logging on to TeleVantage from a
remote number” on page 6-6).
2.
Press # *17. You’re returned to a dial tone.
3.
Press # and log on again to the Voicemail/Account menu. You can skip your
extension and log on with # # <your password> #.
4.
Press 6 9. The location of your external station is changed to the phone from
which you are calling.
Note: You must have permission to use this telephone command.
CHAPTER 6. USING TELEVANTAGE WITH A REMOTE PHONE
6-15
CHAPTER 7
CHAPTER 7
SHARING STATIONS
CHAPTER CONTENTS
About sharing stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Placing outbound calls from shared stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Distinguishing incoming calls to a shared station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Shared stations and personal status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
About sharing stations ____________________________________
In TeleVantage you can share your internal or external station (telephone) with one or more
other users, and still use your individual settings such as personal status and dialing permissions.
You might share a station for a number of reasons, including the following:
Q
Your office uses shifts, and you and another person use the same desk at different times
of the day.
Q
Your office does not have assigned desks, and you might work at a different phone every
day. This is sometimes referred to as hot-desking or hotelling.
Q
You frequently move from phone to phone during the day, placing and receiving calls
wherever it’s most convenient.
Q
The station you’re using is a phone in a conference room, lab, or other shared location.
This chapter covers procedures you should use if you share a station for these or any other
reasons.
Placing outbound calls from shared stations __________________
How TeleVantage handles outbound calls from a station depends on which user is currently
logged in at that station. Only one user at a time can be logged in at a station. When someone
places an outbound call from the station, TeleVantage assumes it’s the user who is logged in,
and handles the call as follows:
Q
The call is subject to that user’s dialing permissions and restrictions.
Q
The call is logged in the Call Log as placed by that user.
If you are using a shared station, before placing calls you should make sure that you are logged
in to the station. To log on, do the following:
1.
Pick up the station and enter # <your extension> # <your password> #. (Your office
may use a logon key other than #). This logs you in to the station until you hang up.
2.
Optionally, press 5 1 to forward your calls to the station. This logs you in to the station
persistently, and you remain logged in until one of the following things happens:
Q
You log off from the station by picking up the phone and pressing *0 0. The station
reverts to its default user. (If you are one of the station’s default users, this
command has no effect.)
Q
You exit TeleVantage ViewPoint.
Q
An amount of time (by default 1 hour) passes with no activity on the station. The
station reverts to its default user. Your system administrator can tell how much time
must pass before the station reverts.
Q
Another user logs in at the station.
Note: You can also log on to a station by logging on to the TeleVantage ViewPoint at the
station’s computer. For instructions, see “Logging on to ViewPoint” on page 8-3.
7-2
Finding out who is currently logged in at a station
To find out who is currently logged in at a station, pick up the station and dial *0.
Note: You can also see who is currently logged in by looking at the status bar of the
TeleVantage ViewPoint. See “The status bar” on page 8-12.
Distinguishing incoming calls to a shared station______________
When you share a station with another user and the phone rings, you may want to know which
user the call is for. You can use the following methods to distinguish incoming calls to a station.
The “call for” announcing prompt
With “call for” announcing turned on, when you pick up the phone you hear a recorded message
that says “Call for,” followed by the name of the user whom the call is for. You can then accept
or decline the call using the standard call announcing commands (see “Answering a call using
call announcing” on page 4-2).
Note that pressing 2 or 3 sends the call to the voice mailbox of the user it is for.
To turn on “call for” announcing
1.
In TeleVantage ViewPoint, choose Tools > Options.
2.
In the Options dialog box, click the Call Announcing tab.
3.
Check Announce who the call is for.
4.
Click OK.
Distinct ring patterns
You and the user(s) who share your station can agree to set different ring patterns for your
incoming calls. For instructions, see “Changing ring patterns” on page 18-11.
Shared stations and personal status_________________________
Your personal status affects incoming calls to your extension only. It does not affect calls to
other users who share your station. For example, if you select the Do Not Disturb personal
status, calls to your extension will not ring the phone, but the phone will still ring for calls to
other users. This includes users who have forwarded their calls to your extension.
CHAPTER 7. SHARING STATIONS
7-3
Using
ViewPoint
CHAPTER 8
CHAPTER 8
USING TELEVANTAGE VIEWPOINT
CHAPTER CONTENTS
About TeleVantage ViewPoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Using ViewPoint from any web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Logging on to ViewPoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Exiting ViewPoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Elements of the ViewPoint window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
ViewPoint folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Managing folders and items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Organizing items in folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Sharing folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Using the audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Importing and exporting TeleVantage items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
About TeleVantage ViewPoint_______________________________
The TeleVantage ViewPoint application provides a central place to manage your calls,
voicemail, contacts and TeleVantage account in an easy-to-use, graphical Windows interface.
In ViewPoint you can quickly and easily drag and drop to transfer or conference calls, point and
click to hear voice messages or call people back, set up call rules and “follow me” call
forwarding to handle important callers, monitor call center queues, and more.
See your TeleVantage system administrator about installing ViewPoint on your computer.
Without ViewPoint, you can still access many TeleVantage functions by using the telephone
commands. For details, see Chapter 3 through Chapter 6 and the “Telephone Commands Quick
Reference” in Appendix A.
Using ViewPoint in Spanish, German, French Parisian or French
Canadian
You can have the TeleVantage ViewPoint interface display in Spanish, German, French Parisian
or French Canadian. To do so, use the Windows Control Panel to set your Windows Regional
Settings to the desired language. You will need to restart ViewPoint if it was open.
Using ViewPoint from any web browser ______________________
TeleVantage ViewPoint Web Access is a version of TeleVantage ViewPoint that you can access
through your Web browser. If your office has ViewPoint Web Access set up, you can use it to
access TeleVantage features from any location on the Internet.
To access ViewPoint Web Access, type its Internet address in your Web browser. See your
TeleVantage system administrator for the address.
In most cases, the instructions in this manual also apply to ViewPoint Web Access. You can also
use ViewPoint Web Access’s context-sensitive online Help for specific instructions about a
ViewPoint Web Access folder.
8-2
Logging on to ViewPoint __________________________________
To use ViewPoint, you must log on using a valid TeleVantage user account.
Important: Each ViewPoint program must be licensed. If you see a message stating that
ViewPoint is not licensed, you cannot log on. See your TeleVantage system administrator for help
if such a message appears.
To log on to ViewPoint
1.
Choose Start > Programs > Vertical TeleVantage > TeleVantage ViewPoint. The
ViewPoint Log On dialog box opens.
2.
Type your user name in the User Name field. If you do not know your user name, ask
your TeleVantage system administrator.
3.
Type your numeric password in the Password field. Use the same password that you
use to log on to TeleVantage on the phone.
4.
If you want to skip the process of logging on to the TeleVantage ViewPoint in future
sessions, check Automatically log on as this user.
Note: If you check Automatically log on as this user, anyone at your computer can
open your ViewPoint program and listen to your voice messages, because ViewPoint
will open without requiring a password.
5.
If you need to change login options, for example to use ViewPoint with a remote
phone, click Options. See the next section, “Using ViewPoint with a different phone
or Server.”
6.
Click OK. ViewPoint starts.
If you are a new user, when you log on to ViewPoint you will see the ViewPoint Welcome
Wizard (see page 8-8 for details, including how to turn the Welcome Wizard off). New and
current users will see ViewPoint tips of the day when they log on. To turn tips off, restore them,
or view them any time, choose Help > Tip of the Day.
Resetting ViewPoint so that login is required
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
On the ViewPoint tab, uncheck Log on automatically.
3.
Click OK.
CHAPTER 8. USING TELEVANTAGE VIEWPOINT
8-3
Using ViewPoint with a different phone or Server
By clicking Options in the ViewPoint Logon dialog box, you can change the following login
settings:
Q
The associated phone. ViewPoint works best in conjunction with a phone, when you
can use the Place Call commands, make recordings, and more. ViewPoint can be
associated with only one phone (internal or remote) at a time. You would change the
associated phone whenever you wish to use a different phone with ViewPoint (for
example, your desktop computer has been moved to a different office, or you move your
Notebook PC to a conference room phone or to home).
You can also change the associated phone after logging on by selecting File > Use a
different station.
Q
The TeleVantage Server. ViewPoint connects to a specific TeleVantage Server. If
multiple TeleVantage Servers are available on your network, you can change the Server
to which ViewPoint is connected. You must also change the Server if the network name
of its computer has changed.
To change ViewPoint login options
1.
Start the ViewPoint program as described in the previous section. If your system logs
you on automatically, choose File > Use a different station after you start ViewPoint.
The expanded ViewPoint Log On dialog box opens.
2.
Under Use this phone with ViewPoint, specify the phone with which ViewPoint is
associated. This phone will ring whenever you use a ViewPoint command that requires
ringing your phone, for example, playing a voice message over the phone, using the
Place Call command, or making a recording. Specify the associated phone in one of
the following ways:
Q
8-4
Station ID. To use ViewPoint with a TeleVantage station—either a station in the
office or an external station—select this field and enter the phone’s station ID. To
learn a TeleVantage phone’s station ID, pick up the phone and press *0.
If you forget your own station ID, you can enter 0 for the Station ID, click OK, then
in the next window select Use your default station.
Q
Remote number. To use ViewPoint in conjunction with a phone that is not a
TeleVantage station, select this field and enter the phone number or IP address of
the phone. As long as this ViewPoint session lasts, that phone will be the associated
phone.
Click
to choose advanced options for the number (see the next section,
“Specifying options for a remote number” ).
Q
eyeBeam SIP softphone. This is the preferred softphone option for the highest
audio quality. See Appendix G, “Using the CounterPath SIP softphones.”
Q
TeleVantage H.323 softphone. This option does not provide as high audio quality
as the SIP softphone. See Appendix F, “Using the TeleVantage H.323 SoftPhone.”
Q
None. Choose this option to use ViewPoint without an associated phone.
ViewPoint commands that require a phone—for example, placing a call—will be
unavailable.
3.
In Server, type the network name of a TeleVantage Server computer on your network,
or click
to select one.
4.
Click OK.
Specifying options for a remote number
If you selected Remote number, you can click
to open the Check Phone Number dialog
box, where you can specify how TeleVantage dials the number.
1.
Under Address type, make sure the correct type of number is selected.
2.
Under Call Using, either accept the default dialing service access code for the type of
number selected, or click This access code and enter a different access code. Your
system administrator can tell you what access codes are available.
3.
Under Country/Region, make sure that the correct country is selected.
CHAPTER 8. USING TELEVANTAGE VIEWPOINT
8-5
4.
Under Number, make sure that the number is correct. The display bar shows the
number as TeleVantage will dial it after applying dialing rules.
5.
To have TeleVantage dial the number without applying dialing rules, uncheck Use
country code and area code dialing rules. For example, you can have TeleVantage
dial a number that appears to be long-distance without adding the “1.”
6.
Click OK.
Using ViewPoint with another station or a remote number
Most TeleVantage users have a default station ID, which represents the phone your system
administrator assigned to you (if you roam between phones your station ID may be 0). When
you log on to ViewPoint specifying an associated phone other than your default station, the
Select Your ViewPoint Phone dialog box opens, enabling you to clarify which phone you want
to use with ViewPoint. The dialog box appears differently for a station and a remote number.
1.
Choose one of the following options:
Q
Use station n as a visitor. This option appears only if you specified another user’s
station as your associated phone—for example, you are logging on at another user’s
desk. The phone remains set for its normal user, but ViewPoint is set for you. Calls
you place and receive using the phone use the normal user’s account (for example,
the dialing permissions and call announcing settings) and appear in the normal
user’s Call Log. However, calls you place and receive using ViewPoint commands
use your account. Choose this option if you do not intend to use the phone
extensively during this ViewPoint session.
Q
Use <this phone > to place and answer calls ... . The phone (station or remote
number) is set for you. Calls you place and receive using the phone use your
account settings. Choose this option if you will be using the phone as your own
during this ViewPoint session.
For how to reset the station to its normal user, see “Placing outbound calls from
shared stations” on page 7-2.
8-6
If you choose this option, you can also select Forward my calls to this station /
number to receive calls to your own extension here. For more information about
call forwarding, see “Forwarding calls” on page 15-3.
Q
Use my default station. Your default station remains ViewPoint’s associated
phone. Whenever you use a ViewPoint command that requires the phone—for
example, to play a voice message—ViewPoint uses your default station. Choose
this option only if your default station is nearby.
Q
I am not near a TeleVantage phone. You log on with station ID 0, meaning that
ViewPoint is not associated with a phone. ViewPoint commands that require a
phone—for example, placing a call—are unavailable.
Note:When you run ViewPoint without an associated phone, the Call Monitor folder
title bar displays “No associated phone” as a reminder.
2.
Click OK. ViewPoint opens with the phone selection you made.
Logging on with new logon options
You can log on as a different user, or with a different associated phone, without exiting and
restarting the ViewPoint program. This feature makes it easy to log on to another user’s account
from your ViewPoint, or to move ViewPoint from one phone to another. To log on to another
user’s account, you must know the other user’s password.
To log on as a different user, choose File > Log on as a different user. The TeleVantage
ViewPoint Log On dialog box opens. See “Logging on to ViewPoint” on page 8-3.
To change ViewPoint’s associated phone, choose File > Use a different station. The
TeleVantage ViewPoint Log On dialog box opens with your name and password already entered
and the Options showing.
Changing your password
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
Click Change Password. The Change Password dialog box opens.
3.
Enter your current password under Old password, enter your new password under
New password, and then retype your new password in the Verify new password
field.
4.
Click OK to close the Change Password dialog box, and then click OK to close the
Options dialog box.
Logging on with command-line switches
You can add switches to the Windows shortcut command line that starts ViewPoint. The
command line switches enable you to run ViewPoint using two phones at your desk, log on
using a particular station or remote number, turn on debugging data, and perform other tasks.
See Appendix H for more information.
CHAPTER 8. USING TELEVANTAGE VIEWPOINT
8-7
About the Welcome Wizard
If you are a new user, the Welcome Wizard starts automatically when you log on to TeleVantage
ViewPoint. The Welcome Wizard helps you to quickly configure your TeleVantage account,
including your voice title, voice mail greeting, and phone numbers. You can also launch the
ViewPoint Quick Tour from the Welcome Wizard.
To turn the Welcome Wizard off, click Do not show this wizard the next time ViewPoint
starts in the last screen of the Welcome Wizard. To re-run the Welcome Wizard at any time,
choose Tools > Welcome Wizard.
About the tip of the day
When you start ViewPoint, the tip of the day appears, offering individual tips on ViewPoint
features. To prevent the tip of the day from appearing, uncheck Show tips at startup before
clicking Close. To view a tip of the day at any time or reset its startup status, choose Help > Tip
of the Day.
Watching the ViewPoint Quick Tour
To watch the ViewPoint Quick Tour, an animated introduction to ViewPoint, start ViewPoint
and choose Help > TeleVantage Quick Tour.
Exiting ViewPoint_________________________________________
To exit ViewPoint, choose File > Exit.
If you are at another user’s desk, exiting logs you off from the station associated with the PC,
returning the station to its default user. You can log off from the station without exiting
ViewPoint by picking up the phone and dialing *00.
Exiting and logging off
You can also exit ViewPoint by choosing File > Exit and Log off. This command closes all
ViewPoint folders that you have opened in a new window by right-clicking the navigation pane
and choosing Open in new window. Note that it does not close multiple instances of ViewPoint
opened by using the /allowmultiple command line argument (see Appendix H).
8-8
Elements of the ViewPoint window_________________________________________
ViewPoint window contains the following elements:
Q
The menu bar
Q
The toolbar
Q
The navigation pane or view bar
Q
The status bar
Q
ViewPoint folder that is currently displayed (see “ViewPoint folders” on page 8-13)
The menu bar
The menu bar, at the top of ViewPoint, provides access to TeleVantage commands. Click each
menu to see the commands that menu contains. Menu commands are referenced in this manual
in the format File > New > Contact. You can drag the menu bar from its left edge to detach it.
The toolbar
The toolbar, directly under the menu bar in each folder, provides single-click access to
frequently used TeleVantage commands. Some folders contain toolbar buttons that are not
found in other folders. The following illustration shows the toolbar for the Voicemail folder.
In any folder, clicking the left-most toolbar button creates a new item for that folder. For
example, in the Call Monitor, clicking the left-most button lets you place a new call:
You can also click the small arrow to the right of that button for a menu that lets you create any
new ViewPoint item. The arrow is available in every folder.
You can hide or show toolbar buttons. See “Hiding and showing toolbar buttons in a folder” on
page 18-24. You can also drag the toolbar from its left edge to detach it.
CHAPTER 8. USING TELEVANTAGE VIEWPOINT
8-9
The navigation pane
The navigation pane, on the left side of the ViewPoint window, gives you point-and-click access
to ViewPoint’s folders. Click a folder in the navigation pane to open that folder in the ViewPoint
main window.
The navigation pane is made up of the Favorite Folders list and, below it, the navigation bar.
You can expand the navigation bar or Favorite Folders list by dragging the separator bar
between them. As you shrink the navigation bar, its icons minimize and appear at the bottom.
8-10
Using the navigation bar
Click an entry in the navigation bar to go to that folder and gain access to other related folders
in the Favorite Folders list. The entries in the navigation bar are:
Q
Call Monitor. Displays the Call Monitor. Favorite Folders: Extensions and (if you are
a call center agent) Queue Monitor.
Q
Voicemail. Displays the Inbox folder of the Voicemail folder. Favorite Folders: All
other Voicemail folders, including local folders and any folders that other users have
shared with you.
Q
Contacts. Displays the Contacts folder. Favorite Folders: The Public Contacts folder
and any Contacts folders that other users have shared with you.
Q
Call Log. Displays the Call Log. Favorite Folders: Any Call Logs that other users have
shared with you.
Q
Configuration. Displays the Greetings folder. Favorite Folders: Call Rules, Greetings,
Personal Statuses, Routing Lists, Workgroups, Public Workgroups.
Using the Folder List
Choose All Folders in the navigation bar to display the Folder List, which gives you
point-and-click access to every available folder. Folders that contain other folders are marked
with an expansion symbol (a plus or minus sign). Click the symbol to open or close the folder.
Note: In the Folder List, the Extensions folder appears under Public Folders.
Customizing the navigation pane
To add or remove buttons from the navigation pane, click the small arrow icon in the lower right
corner of the pane, then choose Add or Remove Buttons from the menu that appears. Check or
uncheck button options on the submenu to include or hide them in the pane.
The view bar
The view bar is an alternative to the navigation pane that restores ViewPoint to the look of
TeleVantage 5.0 and earlier. Click an icon in the view bar to open that folder in ViewPoint’s
main window.
To use the view bar instead of the Navigation pane
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
Click the ViewPoint tab.
3.
Uncheck Use Navigation Pane.
4.
Click OK. You must restart ViewPoint to see the change.
By default, folders within folders—for example, the Saved folder in the Voice Mail folder—do
not appear in the view bar. You can add them by right-clicking the view bar. You can also
choose View > Folder List to display the Folder List.
CHAPTER 8. USING TELEVANTAGE VIEWPOINT
8-11
The status bar
The status bar is located at the bottom of ViewPoint window.
The status bar gives you quick access to the following information:
Q
Last caller. Lists the name (if available) and Caller ID of your last incoming call. You
can press F11 to place a call to that number.
Q
Number of items. Number of items in the current folder. For example, if you have 18
contacts, the Contacts folder status bar displays “18 Items.” In any Voicemail folder, the
status bar also indicates the number of unheard messages.
Q
Name and extension. The name and extension of the user logged on to ViewPoint on
this computer.
If you are a call center agent, clicking this spot on the status bar displays a dropdown list
so you can specify if you are making personal or queue calls. See “Placing calls from a
queue” on page B-8.
Q
Phone. If you see a Phone pane showing the name of another user, it indicates that user
is logged in to your station. While that user is logged in, calls you place using the phone
will be subject to that user’s dialing restrictions, and logged as coming from that user.
To restore the station to yourself, pick up the phone and dial *00.
Q
Personal Status. The current personal status of the user logged on to ViewPoint. Click
the personal status button to choose a different personal status. See Chapter 9 for
information on personal statuses.
Q
Audio output. You can click these buttons to switch ViewPoint's audio output between
your computer speakers and your phone. Audio output includes playing your voice
messages. Click the arrow to the right of the button to switch your audio output.
Q
Call forwarding. The FWD button appears as a reminder when you have forwarded
your calls. Double-click the button to open the Call Forwarding dialog box, in which you
can change or turn off call forwarding. See “Forwarding calls” on page 15-3.
Hiding and showing ViewPoint window elements
You can hide or show each of ViewPoint window elements except the menu bar. Use the View
menu commands to toggle an element between hidden and shown. For example, to hide or show
the status bar choose View > Status bar.
8-12
Locking ViewPoint window elements
You can lock the layout of your ViewPoint so that you don’t accidentally resize or close panes.
With the ViewPoint layout locked, you cannot drag borders to resize panes, and panes no longer
have a clickable X in the corner with which to close them. You can still resize the ViewPoint
window as a whole, and you can still hide and show panes using the commands on the View
menu.
To lock or unlock the ViewPoint display, choose View > Lock the Layout.
You can also lock the current folder in place, so that it cannot be switched to another folder. See
“Locking the current folder in place” on page 8-16.
Customizing the ViewPoint display
You can further customize the appearance and features of ViewPoint. See “Customizing the
ViewPoint display” on page 18-22 for more information.
ViewPoint folders _______________________________________________________________
The TeleVantage ViewPoint contains folders, which appear in the main part of ViewPoint
window and give you access to specific TeleVantage functions.
Important: Some folders may not be available to you. Your TeleVantage system administrator
controls which folders your ViewPoint program displays.
To open a folder, do one of the following:
Q
Click its icon in the Navigation pane. See “The navigation pane” on page 8-10.
Q
Choose View > Go To, then select the folder to display.
For an overview of each folder, see the following table.
Navigation
Pane
Folder
Description
Call Monitor
Place calls and handle incoming calls (transfer calls,
create conference calls, monitor voice mail).
Voice Mail \ Inbox
Hear and manage your voice messages. To call back
a message, right-click it and choose Place Call.
Contacts
Manage an online phone book of your telephone
contacts.
Call Log
View a record of all your phone calls. To return the
call, right-click it and choose Place Call.
CHAPTER 8. USING TELEVANTAGE VIEWPOINT
8-13
Navigation
Pane
Folder
Description
Call Monitor \ Extensions
View all TeleVantage extensions, their personal
statuses, and who is on the phone now.
Call Monitor \ Queue Monitor
Call Center agents only. View and manage agents,
and view real-time queue statistics.
Configuration \ Call Rules
Set up custom call handling for individual callers or for
specific dates or times.
Configuration \ Greetings
Record your voice-mail greetings and change the
active greeting.
Configuration \ Personal Statuses
Manage personal statuses that communicate your
location and availability to your coworkers and control
how your incoming calls are handled.
Configuration \ Routing Lists
Set up “follow me” call forwarding (calls ring a series
of numbers to find you), and direct calls to workgroups
or other extensions.
Configuration \ Workgroups
Define groups of users and contacts. You can then
send voice messages to the group, call all group
phones, share your ViewPoint folders with the group,
and more.
Working in multiple folders
You can have several folders open at once by opening each folder in its own window. To open
a folder in its own window, right-click a folder button in the Favorite Folders list and choose
Open in New Window on the shortcut menu.
When you want to shut down ViewPoint, you can close all ViewPoint windows at the same time
by choosing File > Exit and Log Off on the main menu.
8-14
Adding the Calls Pane to any open folder
The Calls Pane contains the same information that appears in the Call Monitor. You can display
the Calls Pane in any ViewPoint folder and see and act on your incoming calls.
To add the Calls Pane to a folder, do the following:
1.
Open the folder to which you want to add the Calls Pane.
2.
Choose View > Calls Pane.
3.
Select a location from the menu to place the Calls Pane.
To remove the Calls Pane from a folder, choose View > Calls Pane > None.
Adding the Phonebook Pane to the Call Monitor folder
The Phonebook pane includes the Extensions folder and the Contacts folder. Adding the
Phonebook Pane to the Call Monitor folder lets you perform drag-and-drop call handling
operations between the pane and the Call Monitor. See “Dragging and dropping items” on
page 8-19. With the Extensions folder, you can see whether a user is on the phone before placing
a call to him or her.
To add the Phonebook Pane to the Call Monitor folder, choose View > PhoneBook Pane, and
then select a location from the sub-menu.
With the Phonebook pane open, click the appropriate tab to display the Extensions folder or
Contacts folder.
To remove the Phonebook Pane from the Call Monitor folder, choose View > Phonebook Pane
> None.
Using Index buttons to find items quickly
In several folders you can choose View > Index Buttons to display lettered buttons along the
right side of ViewPoint. Click an Index button to jump to the items beginning with that letter.
CHAPTER 8. USING TELEVANTAGE VIEWPOINT
8-15
Locking the current folder in place
You can lock ViewPoint to the folder that is currently displayed, so that it cannot be switched
to another folder. To do so, choose View > Prevent Switching Folders. Choose the same
command to enable folder switching again.
With folder switching prevented, the Navigation pane (or view bar) is removed from ViewPoint
display, and the View > Go To menu commands are disabled. Any options to automatically
display the Call Monitor are overridden so that the folder will not switch to the Call Monitor.
Managing folders and items ________________________________
Items are individual greetings, contacts, routing lists, personal statuses, workgroups, and call
rules that you create in TeleVantage. One item appears on each row in a folder. For example,
one contact appears on each row in the Contacts folder.
This section explains the following:
Q
Using commands in folders
Q
Managing items in folders
Q
Printing items in folders
Using commands in folders
TeleVantage’s commands appear in each ViewPoint view as follows:
Q
Choose a command on the folder’s menu bar. For example, in the Inbox folder of the
Voicemail folder, choose the Actions menu and click a command.
Q
Click a toolbar button. Position the mouse pointer over a button to see its action.
Q
Right-click an item and choose a command on the shortcut menu.
Commands affect only the item or items selected. Right-clicking an item selects it and opens a
shortcut menu that contains commands, so it is often the fastest way to perform an action.
Managing items in folders
This section is a guide to managing individual items in a folder:
Q
Creating items
Q
Deleting voice messages and other items
Q
Renaming items
Q
Cutting and pasting items
Q
Copying and pasting items
Q
Dragging and dropping items
You may not be able to perform these actions if you do not have the required permission.
8-16
Creating items
You can create all types of TeleVantage items, such as greetings and call rules, in any folder.
You can create a completely new item, or you can copy an existing item and enter only the
information that is new for that item.
To create an item, choose File > New and choose the type of item that you want to create, such
as a contact or a greeting. Enter the information about the new item in the dialog box that opens.
Click OK to create the item. You cannot create extensions.
To create an item by copying an existing item
1.
Select the item on which you want to base a new item, such as a contact in the Contacts
folder.
2.
Choose Edit > Copy.
3.
Choose Edit > Paste. A Contact dialog box opens. Copy of <item that you copied>
appears in the title bar of the dialog box. The dialog box contains a duplicate of the
selected item’s information, such as name, phone number, and so forth. You can use
this information as a basis for creating a new item.
4.
Enter the information about the new item in the dialog box.
5.
Click OK to save the changes as a new item.
Deleting voice messages and other items
To delete a voice message from your Inbox, select it and then press DELETE. The voice
message moves to your Deleted folder.
To permanently delete a voice message from your Inbox
1.
Select the voice message. To select more than one voice message, press CTRL and
select them.
2.
Press SHIFT+DEL. A confirmation dialog box opens.
3.
Do one of the following:
Q
Click Yes if you want the selected voice message to be permanently removed from
your computer.
Q
Click No to keep the voice message in your Inbox.
To delete other items
1.
In the folder in which the item appears, select the item. To select more than one item,
press CTRL and click each item that you want to delete.
2.
Right-click the selected item and choose Delete on the shortcut menu. A confirmation
dialog box opens.
Note: When you delete an item that is not a voice message, such as a greeting or a
CHAPTER 8. USING TELEVANTAGE VIEWPOINT
8-17
call rule, the item is permanently and irretrievably removed from your computer. You
cannot recover it after you delete it.
3.
Click OK to permanently delete the item.
Renaming items
You can easily rename items in TeleVantage, but you cannot rename some types of items, such
as default personal statuses or the Standard routing list. Use the following procedure to rename
an item.
To rename an item
1.
Double-click the item. The item’s dialog box opens.
2.
In the Name field, type a new name for the item.
3.
Click OK.
Cutting and pasting items
Cutting a row in the Contacts, Greetings, Routing Lists, Personal Statuses, Call Rules, and
Workgroups folders deletes the item on that row and places it on the clipboard.
To create a new item based on an existing item and delete the existing item
1.
Select the item that you want to delete and on which you want to base a new item, such
as a contact in the Contacts folder.
2.
Choose Edit > Cut.
3.
In the Navigation pane, select the folder into which you want to paste the copy of the
item. See “The navigation pane” on page 8-10.
4.
Choose Edit > Paste. A new dialog box opens, containing a duplicate of the selected
item’s information, such as name, phone number, and so forth. You can use this
information as a basis for creating a new item.
5.
Enter the information about the new item in the dialog box.
6.
Click OK to save the changes as a new item.
Copying and pasting items
Copying a row in the Contacts, Greetings, Routing Lists, Personal Statuses, Call Rules, and
Workgroups folders places a copy of the item in that row on the clipboard as text. This
information can be pasted into other applications, such as a text program.
Choose Edit > Copy to place a copy of selected items on your clipboard. Choose Edit > Paste
to paste the items. Use this method to paste Call Log entries and voice message information into
the Problem Report Wizard (See “Using the Problem Report Wizard” on page I-1).
For information about creating a new item by copying an existing item, see page 8-17.
8-18
Dragging and dropping items
You can drag and drop one item onto another item to perform actions such as making a call,
transferring a call, and adding a call to a conference. You can also move an item to a folder.
For example, if you drag an active call in your Call Monitor onto a user in the Extensions tab of
the Phonebook pane, the call transfers to that user. Conversely, you can drag a user from the
Phonebook pane to the Call Monitor to call that user.
The following table lists the drag-and-drop actions you can perform within TeleVantage
ViewPoint. The From column shows the items you can click and drag. The To column shows
the destination items. The remaining columns show the actions that result when you drag and
drop an item or use the SHIFT and CTRL keys in conjunction with dragging and dropping.
Notes
Q
Q
Whenever you can drag an item to the Call Monitor to place a call, you can also drag it to
the Dial toolbar field.
ViewPoint Web Access does not support drag-and-drop actions.
From
Call
To
Drag
SHIFT +
Drag
CTRL +
Drag
Call
No action
Opens the
Conference
dialog box
Conferences
the calls
Extension,
Contact,
Call Log,
Voice
Message
Performs a
blind transfer
Opens the
Transfer
dialog box
Performs a
supervised
transfer
Note: ALT+Drag of a call to an extension
transfers the call directly to that extension’s
voicemail.
Call Log
Call
Conferences
the Call Log
party with the
call
Opens the
Conference
dialog box
Empty Call
Monitor
Places a call
to the Call
Log party
Opens the
Place Call To
dialog box
CHAPTER 8. USING TELEVANTAGE VIEWPOINT
8-19
From
Contact
Folder
Voice
Message
8-20
To
Drag
SHIFT +
Drag
Call
Conferences
the contact’s
default
number with
the call
Opens the
Conference
dialog box
Empty Call
Monitor
Places a call
to the default
phone
number
Opens the
Place Call To
dialog box
Folder
Moves the
contact to the
folder
Opens the
Move Item
dialog box
Folder
Moves the
folder to
another
folder
Opens the
Move Folder
dialog box
Contact
Moves the
folder to the
Contacts
folder
Opens the
Move Folder
dialog box
Voice
Messages
Moves the
folder to the
voice
Message
folder
Opens the
Move Folder
dialog box
Call
Conferences
the message
sender with
the call
Opens the
Conference
dialog box
Empty Call
Monitor
Places a call
to the
message
Caller ID
Opens the
Place Call To
dialog box
Folder
Moves the
message to a
folder
Opens the
Move Item
dialog box
CTRL +
Drag
Copies the
folder
Copies the
message
From
To
Drag
SHIFT +
Drag
Extension
(User,
Auto
Attendant,
Queue, or
IVR Plug-in)
Call
Conferences
the call
Opens the
Conference
dialog box
Empty Call
Monitor
Places the
call
Opens the
Place Call To
dialog box
Text (in
ViewPoint or
another
application)
Call
Monitor
Places a call
to the
number
dropped
Opens the
Place Call To
dialog box
CTRL +
Drag
Dragging and dropping voice messages to other applications
You can drag-and-drop a voice message from ViewPoint into another Windows application that
supports file-dropping, for example, the message window of Microsoft Outlook. Hold down
CTRL while dragging-and-dropping to another application. The voice message appears in the
other application with a filename specifying the contact name or Caller ID of the caller who left
it, where available.
Printing items in folders
To print the contents of a folder, choose File > Print. When you print a folder that contains
several columns, you may need to change the orientation of the page to “landscape” so that all
columns that appear in the folder are printed.
Organizing items in folders ________________________________
Folders can have subfolders A folder is a subdivision that let you organize the contents of that
folder. For example, in the Contacts folder you can create a Business folder and a Personal
folder, and then organize your contacts in these folders. You can then click the Personal folder
to view only your personal contacts in the Contacts folder.
You can create folders within the Voicemail and Contacts folders. You can create as many
folders as you want, and you can nest folders within other folders.
The Voicemail folder contains one folder already created, the Saved folder. When you listen to
a voice message on the telephone and save it, the message is moved into the Saved folder.
Viewing folders in the Folder List
The best way to view folders is to choose All Folders in the Navigation pane. The Folder List
opens, displaying all the folders that you can access. See “The navigation pane” on page 8-10.
CHAPTER 8. USING TELEVANTAGE VIEWPOINT
8-21
Private and public folders
ViewPoint displays the following types of folders in the Folder List section of the Navigation
pane:
Q
Private folders. Folders that you create and that appear in your ViewPoint only, unless
you share them with other users. See “Sharing folders” on page 8-24.
Q
Public folders. Folders that are visible to all TeleVantage users. See “Viewing public
folders” on page 8-23.
Managing folders
This section is a guide to basic actions you can perform on folders. The folders that support
subfolders are the Voicemail folder and the Contacts folder.
Creating folders
1.
Choose File > Folder > New Folder. The Create New Folder dialog box opens.
2.
Under Name, type a name for the new folder.
3.
Under Select where to place the folder, click the folder within which you want to
place the new folder. The folders that support subfolders are the Voicemail folder and
the Contacts folder.
4.
Click OK. The folder appears in the Folder List.
Deleting folders
1.
In the Folder List, click the folder that you want to delete.
2.
Choose File > Folder > Delete. The folder and its contents is moved to the Deleted
folder. To delete a folder permanently, you must delete it from the Deleted folder or
empty the Deleted folder by choosing Tools > Empty Deleted Folder.
Renaming folders
1.
In the Folder List, click the folder that you want to rename.
2.
Type a new name for the folder.
3.
Press ENTER to complete the name change.
Moving items between folders
8-22
1.
In the Folder List, select the folder that contains the items you want to move to another
folder. The contents of the folder appears in ViewPoint window.
2.
Select one or more items that you want to move.
3.
Drag the selected items to the target folder in the Folder List.
Viewing public folders
Public folders contain items that all TeleVantage users can view and use. For example, any user
can view a public contact’s information or place a call to that contact.
Example: Your company defines its departments as public workgroups. All users in the
company can view the members of those workgroups.
To view public folders, click Public Folders in the Folder List.
Note: Items in public folders are not generally available for editing or deleting. You must have
special permission to edit a public item.
Managing the Deleted folder
The Deleted folder contains voice messages that you have deleted from the Voicemail folder.
Items in the Deleted folder continue to be stored in the limited space that has been allocated to
you for your voice files. To regain space for more voice messages or other voice files, empty
your Deleted folder.
To view the contents of the Deleted folder, click it in the Folder List.
Emptying the Deleted folder
You can delete an item from the Deleted folder just as you would from any folder. When items
are deleted from the Deleted folder, they are deleted permanently.
To empty the Deleted folder, choose Tools > Empty Deleted Folder.
To empty the Deleted folder automatically
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
Click the Voice Messages \ Usage tab.
3.
Choose one of the following options:
Q
To delete all messages in the Deleted folder now, click Remove all items now. The
messages are deleted when you click OK to close the Options dialog box.
Q
To empty the Deleted folder automatically whenever you exit ViewPoint, check
Remove all items when exiting.
Q
To remove old items automatically from the Deleted folder, check Periodically
remove old items, and then enter the age in days at which an item is automatically
removed.
4.
Click OK.
CHAPTER 8. USING TELEVANTAGE VIEWPOINT
8-23
Sharing folders___________________________________________
You can share folders, and any folders within them, with other TeleVantage users that you
specify:
Q
The Call Monitor folder
Q
The Voicemail folder
Q
The Contacts folder
Q
The Call Log folder
Those users can access the folders that you share with them from their ViewPoint programs
according to access levels that you specify. You can grant individual users specific levels of
access to your shared folders.
Example: If you and two coworkers are working on the Gould project, you can create a
Contacts folder called “Gould” in which you keep important contacts at the Gould office. You
can share the Gould folder with your two coworkers, so that all three of you have access to
Gould contacts’ phone numbers.
Notes
Q
Voice messages marked Private do not appear in a shared folder.
Q
Calls from a call center queue do not appear in a shared Call Monitor.
To share a folder
8-24
1.
In the Favorite Folders list, click the folder that you want to share.
2.
Choose File > Folder > Share Folder. The folder’s Properties dialog box opens at the
Sharing tab.
3.
Select the users in the Available Users list with whom you want to share the folder.
To select multiple users, press CTRL as you select users.
4.
Click Add. The selected users are moved to the Share with these users list.
5.
To change the access level for a user, select the user in the Share with these users
list, and then select one of the following from the Permission dropdown list:
Q
View only. The user can view or listen to items in this folder, but cannot edit or
delete them.
Q
View and Edit. The user can view, listen to, edit, delete, and move items in this
folder.
6.
Click Apply to save your changes and continue to work on the Sharing tab. When you
are done, click OK. The folder is now shared with the users in the Share with these
users list at the specified permission level.
Viewing shared folders
To view folders that another user has shared with you, choose All Folders in the navigation
pane, open Shared Folders at the bottom of the Folder List, and select the folder of the other
user.
Deleting shared items
If you have permission to do so, you can delete voice messages from folders that other users
have shared with you. If those users also shared their Deleted folders with you, the message
moves to their Deleted folders. If not, the message is permanently removed.
CHAPTER 8. USING TELEVANTAGE VIEWPOINT
8-25
Using the audio controls___________________________________
TeleVantage’s audio controls make it easy to create recordings and listen to recordings and
voice messages.
These audio controls appear throughout ViewPoint in dialog boxes in which you can create
recordings and listen to voice messages.
Creating recordings and playing voice messages
You create recordings by speaking into your phone.
Record
When you are ready to record, pick up your phone, and
then click the button. A beep signals that recording has
begun.
Stop
When you are finished recording, you can either hang up
or click the button.
Play
Click the button to listen to the recording or voice
message. Click it again to pause playback.
To move forward and backward within the recording or voice message, drag
the slider bar:
You can play audio either over your computer speakers or your telephone. Choose Tools >
Audio Output to switch audio output from one to the other. You can also use the button in the
status bar. When playing audio over the phone, if your phone is on hook, it will ring to connect
you to the audio being played.
Note: When sending audio to your phone, ViewPoint displays a message identifying the station
ID being rung. Station IDs over 16,000 correspond to external stations created with the Imitate a
station routing list option. See “Imitating a station at a remote number” on page 6-10.
Using voice message bookmarks
You can set bookmarks in voice messages by dragging the arrows that appear under the slider
bar. When you play a message you have bookmarked, only the portion of the file between the
bookmarks plays. This capability can be useful when you want to mark the location of an
important phone number in a voice message.
8-26
Importing and exporting voice files
To import or export a voice file, use the buttons on the recording control:
Import
You can import a voice file in WAV or .VOX format to
use for any ViewPoint recording (greetings, voice titles,
and so on).
TeleVantage can import WAV files with a frequency of
8Khz, 11.025 Khz, 22.05 Khz, or 44.1 Khz. You can also
import an 8 kHz PCM VOX file (MULaw format for
North America and Japan, ALaw format for other
countries).
Export
You can export any of your ViewPoint recordings,
including voice messages and recorded conversations, to
a WAV file on your hard disk.
Importing and exporting TeleVantage items___________________
You can import contacts into TeleVantage from a CSV (comma-separated value) file, and you
can export contacts to a CSV file. You can also export extensions and the Call Log to CSV files.
Click File > Import and Export to open the Import and Export Wizard.
Importing and exporting contacts
You can import contacts into TeleVantage:
Q
From a CSV file generated from TeleVantage
Q
From a CSV file generated from another contact manager such as Microsoft Outlook
You can export contacts from TeleVantage to a CSV file that you can import into another
TeleVantage ViewPoint, Outlook, GoldMine, FrontOffice 2000, Act!, or other contact
management software.
CHAPTER 8. USING TELEVANTAGE VIEWPOINT
8-27
To import contacts from a CSV file
1.
Choose File > Import and Export. The Import and Export Wizard opens.
2.
Select Import Contacts, and then click Next.
3.
In File to Import, click Browse and select the CSV file that you want to import.
4.
In Destination folder, select the TeleVantage Contact folder into which you want to
import the contacts in the CSV file.
5.
Under Options, select one of the following:
6.
8-28
Q
Replace duplicates with items imported. If TeleVantage finds a duplicate
contact in the CSV file, the contact from the file will replace the existing
TeleVantage contact.
Q
Allow duplicates to be created. If TeleVantage finds a duplicate contact in the
CSV file, it will import all contacts, even those that are duplicates of TeleVantage
contacts.
Q
Do not import duplicate items. If TeleVantage finds duplicate contacts in the
CSV file, it will not import them.
Select Use phone numbers as caller identification for these contacts to add the
imported contacts’ phone numbers to TeleVantage’s list of Caller ID numbers so that
contacts can be identified when they call. For more information, see “Teaching
TeleVantage to recognize your contacts” on page 16-7.
7.
If you are importing a CSV file that was created by TeleVantage, go to step 10.
8.
If you are importing contacts from another application and have not previously
mapped the fields, click Map Custom Fields. The Map Custom Fields dialog box
opens using the default map, showing the first contact record to be imported, and how
the existing fields will be mapped to TeleVantage fields.
9.
If you have saved a different map and want to use it, click Load Map and select it.
Otherwise, map the fields manually as follows:
Q
Check First record contains field names at the bottom of the dialog box if the
CSV file’s first record consists of the names of fields. Then drag fields or values
from the left pane (the CSV file) to the fields in the right pane (TeleVantage
contacts) in which you want the values to appear. Drag unwanted field mapping
from the right pane to the left pane to clear them.
Q
Click Previous or Next to view other records in the CSV file to see how they will
map.
Q
Click Clear Map to remove all mapping from the right pane.
Q
Click Default Map to restore the default mapping.
Q
Click Save Map to save the current mapping to a new file (this can be useful if you
regularly import contacts from several different sources). If you do not click Save
Map, the default map is saved when you click OK.
When you are finished mapping fields, click OK. Any changes to the default or custom
map are saved for future importing.
10. Click Next in the Import and Export Wizard, and then click Finish. The contacts in the
CSV file are imported.
CHAPTER 8. USING TELEVANTAGE VIEWPOINT
8-29
Note: When text is imported from a CSV file, a comma in the text breaks the text between fields
unless the text is within quotation marks.
To export contacts to a CSV file
8-30
1.
Choose File > Import and Export. The Import and Export Wizard opens.
2.
Under Choose an action to perform, select Export Contacts, and then click Next.
3.
In Save exported file as, browse to the folder in which you want to save the CSV file.
4.
In Source folder, choose the Contacts file that you want to export, and then click Next.
5.
Click Finish. The CSV file is exported.
Exporting the Extensions list
You can export the Extensions list to a CSV file for use in other applications.
1.
Click File > Import and Export. The Import and Export Wizard opens.
2.
Under Choose an action to perform, select Export Extensions and click Next.
3.
Under Save exported file as, browse to the folder in which you want to save the CSV
file.
4.
Under Filter, choose the extensions or workgroups that you want to export, and then
click Next.
5.
Click Finish to complete the export or Cancel to close the Wizard without performing
any action.
CHAPTER 8. USING TELEVANTAGE VIEWPOINT
8-31
Exporting the Call Log
You can export your Call Log to a CSV file that can be read and analyzed in a spreadsheet
program such as Microsoft Excel.
8-32
1.
Choose File > Import and Export. The Import and Export Wizard opens.
2.
Click Export Call Log, and then click Next.
3.
Click Browse and then specify a file name and destination for the Call Log file.
4.
Enter the Start Date and the End Date for the portion of the Call Log that you want to
export.
5.
Click Next and then click Finish. The portion of the Call Log that you specified is
saved to the CSV file.
Result codes when exporting the Call Log
When the Call Log is exported, the Result field appears as a code. Use the following table to
interpret the result codes:
Code
Result
1
Connected, user hung up
2
Connected, user was hung up upon
3
Abandoned
4
Left message
5
Blind transfer
6
Supervised transfer
8
Login to user account
9
Call was sent directly to voicemail
10
No answer
12
Login failed the maximum number of times
CHAPTER 8. USING TELEVANTAGE VIEWPOINT
8-33
CHAPTER 9
CHAPTER 9
USING PERSONAL STATUSES
CHAPTER CONTENTS
About personal statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Using predefined personal statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Selecting a personal status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Modifying a personal status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Creating a custom personal status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
The Personal Statuses folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Personal status and your active settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Personal status defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Changing the personal status of another user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
About personal statuses ___________________________________
Your personal status lets your colleagues know where you are and what you are doing. It also
specifies how your calls are handled under specific circumstances.
A personal status consists of the following:
Q
A personal status icon and a name, such as Available. These appear next to your name
in the Extensions list, so that other TeleVantage users can see at a glance whether you
are in the office and available. Likewise, by looking at the Extensions list you can see
the personal status of other users. For example, if the Extension list shows Helen Shire
in the personal status On Vacation, you would know not to call her.
Q
A collection of preferences that determines how your incoming calls are handled. For
example, the Do Not Disturb status sends your incoming calls directly to voicemail
without ringing your phone.
Each personal status consists of the following call handling preferences:
Q
Where I Am specifies the phone at which your incoming calls ring. Changing this setting
is equivalent to forwarding your calls. See “Forwarding calls” on page 15-3.
Q
Taking calls determines whether your phone rings when calls arrive.
Q
Queue calls is a setting for call center agents that determines whether or not the queue
sends them calls. See Appendix B.
Q
Routing List specifies the routing list that TeleVantage uses to process calls. For more
information about routing lists, see “Using routing lists” on page 15-7.
Q
Greeting specifies the recording that TeleVantage plays to callers when they reach your
voicemail (or any other final action of your routing list). For more information about
greetings, see “Managing greetings” on page 13-18.
Example: When you leave the office for an off-site event, you can select the personal status
Out of the Office. This TeleVantage personal status can change your Where I Am setting to
forward your calls to the number that you specify. It can also change your Greeting, so that
callers who reach your voicemail hear a special greeting that you recorded (“I am out of the
office this morning. Please leave a message, or you can try me again later, as my calls are
forwarded to where I can be reached”).
Note: To change your personal status, you must have permission to do so. If you cannot change
your personal status, see your system administrator.
9-2
The Personal Status button in the status bar
The status bar contains a button that shows your current personal status. Click that button to
select a different personal status.
Using predefined personal statuses _________________________
Five predefined personal statuses are available to all users. Three additional predefined personal
statuses are available only to call center agents.
You can also create custom personal statuses for your own use, for example, Working From
Home, At ViewPoint XYZ, and so forth. See “Creating a custom personal status” on page 9-6.
Predefined personal statuses (for all users)
The following table lists the predefined personal statuses that are available to all users.
Icon
Status
Available
Description
Lets people know that you are available to
take calls. All calls ring your phone. You can
turn call forwarding on if you want to take
calls at a different location, for example, if you
are working from home.
Call center agents can use this status to
make themselves available. For more call
center agent personal statuses, see the next
table.
Do Not Disturb
Lets people know that you are not taking
calls. No calls ring your phone. You can
record a greeting that tells callers you will get
back to them later, and you can send your
calls directly to voicemail.
Note: You can create a call rule that overrides the
Do Not Disturb personal status by allowing calls
from specific people to ring your phone. For more
information, see Chapter 17.
CHAPTER 9. USING PERSONAL STATUSES
9-3
Icon
Status
In a Meeting
Out of the
Office
On Vacation
Description
These personal statuses let people know
where you are when you are away from your
desk. Like Do Not Disturb, by default these
personal statuses send your calls directly to
voicemail without ringing your phone, though
you can change that behavior with these
statuses. You can customize each of these
statuses individually by recording a greeting
that tells callers where you are, if you are
forwarding your calls, and so on.
Predefined personal statuses (for call center queue agents)
In addition to the predefined personal statuses shown in the previous table, the
predefined personal statuses shown in the following table are available to agents
in a call center queue. For information about working as an agent in a call center
queue, see Appendix B. For information about working as an agent in an ACD
workgroup call center, see Appendix D.
Icon
Status
Available
(Queue Only)
Description
This status or the Available status makes you
available. When you select this status, the
queue begins sending calls to you.
With this status, only queue calls ring your
phone. Non-queue calls are sent directly to
your voicemail. To have all your calls ring
your phone, make yourself available by
selecting the Available status (see the
previous table).
You can also select this status by picking up
the phone and pressing *51.
Available
(Non-Queue)
This status makes you unavailable at the end
of your shift. When you select this status, the
queue stops sending calls to you.
With this status, non-queue calls still ring your
phone. To prevent all calls from ringing your
phone, make yourself unavailable by
selecting Do Not Disturb.
You can also select this status by picking up
the phone and pressing *52.
9-4
Icon
Status
On Break
Description
This status puts you on a break during your
shift. While this status is selected, the queue
does not send calls to you. When you take a
break, be sure to use the On Break status
rather than Available (Non-Queue), which
ends your shift. Using On Break when you
take a break will ensure the integrity of call
center statistics.
You can also select this status by picking up
the phone and pressing *53.
Notes for call center agents:
Q
You can make yourself available by selecting either Available or
Available (Queue Only).
Q
You can make yourself unavailable by selecting any status other than Available,
Available (Queue Only), or On Break.
Selecting a personal status ________________________________
This section explains how to select a personal status using ViewPoint or the phone.
Selecting a personal status in ViewPoint
Use any of the following methods to select a personal status in ViewPoint:
Q
Click the Personal Status button on the status bar, and then choose a personal status.
Q
Choose Tools > Personal Status and then choose a personal status.
Q
In the Personal Statuses folder, select a personal status and then choose Actions > Set
as Active.
You can configure a personal status so that it prompts you to change its settings whenever you
select it. Doing this makes it easier for you to change your call forwarding or greeting each time
that you select that personal status. For example, you may want to specify a different forwarding
number every time you select the “Out of the Office” personal status. For more information, see
“Personal status and your active settings” on page 9-9.
CHAPTER 9. USING PERSONAL STATUSES
9-5
Selecting a personal status on the phone
You can select a personal status on the phone in the following ways:
Q
Log on and press 6 1. See “Selecting a personal status on the phone” on page 5-10. You
can select the Available personal status quickly by picking up the phone and pressing
*50.
Q
For call center agent statuses, pick up your phone and press *51 through *53. Use these
quick commands to begin and end your shift and to go on break. See “Starting and
ending your shift, and taking breaks” on page B-2.
Modifying a personal status ________________________________
You can modify predefined and custom personal statuses to reflect your changing availability
and location. For example, if you are often away from your desk attending meetings, you can
modify the In a Meeting personal status to send your callers directly to voicemail and play a
special “in a meeting” greeting that you record.
The following predefined personal statuses have preferences that you cannot modify.
Q
Do Not Disturb. The Taking calls preference is fixed at No—the status always sends
you calls directly to the final action of your routing list (usually your voicemail) without
ringing your phone.
Q
Available. The Taking calls preference is fixed at Yes—this status always implies that
you are ready to take calls.
Q
Available and Available (Queue Only) for call center agents. The Queue calls
preference is always set to Yes. For more information, see Appendix B.
You cannot delete or rename predefined personal statuses.
To modify a personal status
1.
In the Personal Statuses folder, double-click the personal status. The Personal Status
dialog box opens.
2.
Follow the steps described in the next section, “Creating a custom personal status.”
Creating a custom personal status __________________________
You can create custom personal statuses for your own use for any of the following reasons:
9-6
Q
To provide more information to your colleagues about where you are and what you are
doing, for example, Working From Home, At ViewPoint XYZ, and so forth.
Q
To facilitate frequent changes to several call-handling settings at once. For example,
whenever you work at the East Side office you might want to forward your calls and
change your voicemail greeting. By creating a custom personal status called East Side
Office, you can automatically make both those changes just by selecting the status.
Custom personal statuses are identified in the Extensions list by
.
To create a custom personal status
1.
Choose File > New > Personal Status. The Personal Status dialog box opens.
2.
Enter a name for the personal status.
3.
Use the audio controls under Recorded name to record the name, so that you can
select the status by using the telephone commands (see “Selecting a personal status on
the phone” on page 5-10).
4.
Specify how you want your calls handled while this personal status is selected. For
most call handling preferences, you can select either a specific item or Default.
Selecting Default uses the item that is your current personal status default, which is
shown in parentheses. See “Personal status defaults” on page 9-12 for more
information.
Note: If you change your personal status default, all call handling preferences set to
Default are updated.
Q
Under Where I Am, use the dropdown list to specify the phone to which your
incoming calls are sent. (For more information about Where I Am, see “Call
forwarding and Where I Am” on page 15-2.) You can select one of the following
options:
Q
Default location. The phone specified by your current Where I Am setting. For
example, if you changed Where I Am by forwarding your calls, this personal
status would reflect the change.
Q
My default station. Your regular TeleVantage phone (the station ID is
displayed in parentheses).
CHAPTER 9. USING PERSONAL STATUSES
9-7
Q
Another location. Any other phone. Click
. The Call Me at Another
Location dialog box opens, where you can specify the number. For instructions
on using this dialog box, see “Placing a call” on page 12-2.
If you select an external number, you can use the external call forwarding
options under the Where I Am field. For instructions, see “Forwarding calls in
ViewPoint” on page 15-3.
Q
For Taking calls, specify whether you want your phone to ring when a call arrives.
If set to Yes, incoming calls follow your active routing list, which usually includes
ringing your phone. If set to No, incoming calls are sent directly to the final action
on your active routing list, which by default is your voicemail.
Q
The Queue calls field appears only if you are an agent in a call center queue.
Specify whether you want to receive queue calls when this personal status is
selected. If you specify Yes, this personal status marks you as available, and while
it is in effect you receive calls from all queues for which you are signed in. See
Appendix B for complete instructions on working as an agent in a call center queue.
You can modify this field only for custom personal statuses or the predefined
statuses In a Meeting and Out of the Office.
Q
Select the Routing List that your calls use when you select this personal status.
Q
To create a new routing list, click
.
Q
To edit a routing list in the list, select it, and then press ALT while clicking
.
For more information about routing lists, see “Using routing lists” on page 15-7.
Q
Select the Greeting played to callers when they reach your voice mailbox.
Q
To record a new greeting, click
.
Q
To rerecord a greeting in the list, select it and then press ALT while clicking
.
For more information about greetings, see “Managing greetings” on page 13-18.
Q
Check Ignore Call Rules if you want to disable your call rules when this personal
status is in effect. With your call rules disabled, all your incoming calls follow your
Standard routing list. See Chapter 17 for more about call rules.
Note:Checking this box is equivalent to choosing Tools > Ignore Call Rules
whenever this personal status is in effect.
With the box unchecked, your call rules might cause some callers to hear greetings
or follow routing lists other than the ones specified by this personal status.
5.
Check When I select this personal status, prompt me to change these settings to
have a dialog box open automatically whenever you select this personal status. Doing
this lets you quickly change preferences that you frequently modify.
Checking this box is helpful to you for those personal statuses whose greetings or
forwarding locations you customize on a regular basis. For example, whenever you
9-8
select the Out of the Office personal status, the dialog box opens and you can specify
a different call forwarding location.
6.
Click OK to save the new personal status.
The Personal Statuses folder_______________________________
The Personal Statuses folder displays all your personal statuses. Open the Personal Statuses
folder by clicking Configuration in the navigation bar, then clicking Personal Statuses in the
Favorite Folders list. Double-click a personal status in the folder to edit or view its properties.
You can see the personal statuses of other users in the Extensions list.
Personal status and your active settings _____________________
When you select a personal status, its preferences are copied to your active settings. Your active
settings are all the settings that, taken together, determine how TeleVantage handles your
incoming calls. They are:
Q
The currently active personal status
Q
Where I Am (the phone that rings for your incoming calls)
Q
Active greeting (the greeting played to callers who reach your voicemail)
Q
Active routing list (the routing list that incoming calls follow)
Q
Taking calls setting (whether your phone does or does not ring)
Q
Ignore call rules (whether your calls rules are enabled or disabled)
In addition, call center agents have the queue calls setting, which determines whether they are
currently available to receive queue calls. See Appendix B.
CHAPTER 9. USING PERSONAL STATUSES
9-9
Changing your active settings
You can change your active settings in the following ways:
Q
Change each active setting individually by going to the appropriate folder or dialog box.
For example, you can set your active greeting in the Greetings folder, your active routing
list in the Routing Lists folder, your Where I Am setting by forwarding your calls, and
so forth.
Q
Change several active settings at once by selecting a personal status. For example, if
your On Vacation personal status uses the “I’m on vacation” greeting and specifies that
your phone does not ring, whenever you select the On Vacation status, “I’m on vacation”
becomes the active greeting and your Taking calls setting is set to No.
Q
Change active settings directly by using the Active Settings dialog box (see the next
section).
Each change you make to an active setting overrides the previous one.
Example: You select the personal status On Vacation, which makes the “I’m on vacation”
greeting active. Then you open the Greetings folder and make the “Standard” greeting active.
The “Standard” greeting is now the active one, even though the On Vacation personal status is
still in effect.
Changing your active settings directly
The Active Settings dialog box gives you quick access to all your active settings in one place.
Changes you make in this dialog box become your new active settings, and remain active until
something else changes them, for example, until you select a new personal status or change the
active greeting in the Greetings folder.
You can use the Active Settings dialog box in the following ways:
Q
See at a glance all your current active settings, so that you know how your incoming calls
are being handled.
Q
Set an aspect of a personal status differently whenever you select that status. For
example, whenever you select the status Out of the Office, you might want to specify a
different call forwarding location. You would select the status, and then specify your call
forwarding location in the Active Settings dialog box.
You can set a personal status to open the Active Settings dialog box whenever you select
that personal status so that you can make this kind of change. To do so, edit the personal
status as shown in “Modifying a personal status” on page 9-6, and check When I select
this Personal Status, prompt me to change these settings.
Note:If you find that you override a personal status preference frequently in the same
way, consider changing the preference in the personal status permanently. For example,
if you want the Out of the Office personal status to always use your custom routing list that
includes your cell phone, specify that routing list in the personal status itself.
9-10
To change your active settings in the Active Settings dialog box
1.
Choose Tools > Active Settings. The Active Settings dialog box opens.
2.
Change any of the following:
Q
Q
3.
To change your current personal status, select a personal status in the dropdown list.
Q
To create a new custom personal status, click
.
Q
To edit the selected personal status in the list, press ALT while clicking
.
To change the active Where I Am phone, Taking calls, Routing List, or Greeting
settings, use the instructions in step 4, (“To create a custom personal status” on page
9-7).
To make sure that all incoming callers hear the greeting specified here when they reach
your voicemail, check Ignore Call Rules. Doing this disables your call rules and
causes all incoming calls to follow your Standard routing list. The Routing List setting
in this dialog box changes to reflect this choice.
Note: Checking this box is equivalent to choosing Tools > Ignore Call Rules
whenever this personal status is selected.
With the box unchecked, your call rules might cause some callers to hear greetings
other than the one specified here.
4.
When you are done, click OK. If the active settings are different than the current
personal status, you are prompted to apply these settings as edits to the personal status.
Choose one of the following:
Q
Yes. The active settings go into effect and also are copied to the personal status’
preferences. Choose this option if you want to apply these active settings every time
you select this personal status.
Q
No. The active settings go into effect as overrides to the personal status. The
personal status remains unchanged. Choose this option to make a one-time change
that will not be repeated the next time you select personal status.
CHAPTER 9. USING PERSONAL STATUSES
9-11
Active settings hierarchy
Several different TeleVantage features allow you to specify an active setting. For example, you
can specify a routing list in the Routing Lists folder, in a call rule, and in a personal status. This
section describes which setting is used in cases of conflict.
The hierarchy for active settings is as follows:
1.
Call rule. When a call is handled by a call rule, its settings are used if specified.
2.
Active Settings dialog box/Personal status. Settings that are not specified by a call
rule use the current setting in your Active Settings dialog box. These are set by your
current personal status, but you can also set them manually by choosing Tools >
Active Settings.
Important: The exception to this rule concerns greetings, which take their highest priority from
the routing list followed. If a routing list specifies a greeting that is not the active greeting, that
greeting is always the one played for calls using that routing list.
Personal status defaults ___________________________________
When you select a personal status with a greeting or routing list preference, it makes that
greeting or routing list active. When you are done using that personal status, you might want
your active greeting and routing list to revert to what they were before. Personal status defaults
are a way of accomplishing this. Personal status defaults specify the greeting and the routing list
that become active when you select a personal status that has no greeting or routing list
preference.
Only one greeting and one routing list can be your personal status defaults at a time. When you
select a personal status with no greeting preference, the personal status default greeting becomes
active. When you select a personal status with no routing list preference, the personal status
default preference becomes active.
Example: You set your “Everyday” greeting to be your personal status default, because this is
the greeting you normally use. Several times during the day you change your active greeting by
selecting the personal status In a Meeting, which applies your custom “Be Back Soon” greeting.
When you return from the meeting and select the personal status Available (or any other
personal status) your personal status defaults are restored, so your “Everyday” greeting becomes
active again.
You can change the greeting and the routing list that are your personal status defaults at any
time. See “Setting personal status defaults” on page 9-13.
9-12
Using the Where I Am default
Where I Am specifies the phone that rings when you receive a call. The Where I Am default is
your station, unless you are forwarding your calls. In that case, it is your call forwarding number.
This setting enables you to temporarily override your call forwarding with a personal status, and
then restore it.
Example: You forward your calls to your home phone. You then select the custom personal
status Lunch Hour, which changes Where I Am to your cell phone. When you come back from
lunch you select the personal status Available (or any other personal status), which restores your
Where I Am default. Where I Am returns to being your home phone, retaining your call
forwarding.
Setting personal status defaults
There can be only one personal status default of each type (greeting and routing list) at any one
time. Use the following procedures to:
Q
Set a personal status default greeting and routing list
Q
Set a personal status to use your default greeting and routing list
To designate a greeting or routing list as the personal status default
1.
Open the Greetings folder or the Routing Lists folder and double-click the item that
you want to be the personal status default.
2.
In the dialog box for that item, check Default Personal Status Greeting/Routing List.
3.
Click OK.
When you make a greeting active using the telephone commands, that greeting also becomes
your personal status default greeting.
To set a personal status to use your defaults
1.
Edit the personal status. See “Modifying a personal status” on page 9-6.
2.
Under Greeting, Routing List, or Where I Am, select Default. The dropdown list
displays the item that is currently the personal status default in parentheses.
When you create a new custom personal status, these preferences are already set to
Default. The only reason you would need to change them to Default is if you had
previously changed them to use specific items.
3.
Click OK.
CHAPTER 9. USING PERSONAL STATUSES
9-13
Changing the personal status of another user _________________
You can change the personal status of another TeleVantage user if you have permission and
know that user’s password. This feature is useful when users want to change their personal status
but do not want to log on to TeleVantage themselves. For example, a secretary can change the
personal status for the boss, or the user who is acting as the Operator user can change the
Operator’s personal status without logging on as the Operator user.
To change another user’s personal status
1.
In the Extensions list, right-click the user.
2.
Choose Apply Personal Status and click a personal status. The Enter Password dialog
box opens.
Enter the password of the user and click OK.
9-14
CHAPTER 10
CHAPTER 10
USING THE EXTENSIONS LIST
CHAPTER CONTENTS
Viewing TeleVantage extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Placing calls to an extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Sending an instant message to an extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Changing another user’s personal status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Exporting the Extensions list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Viewing TeleVantage extensions ____________________________
You can see all TeleVantage extensions, along with information about the current status of each
extension, in the Extensions list. You can use the Extensions list to quickly place calls to other
TeleVantage extensions or to change another user’s personal status if you have permission to do
so.
Note: You can display the Extensions list in the Call Monitor for quick access, including
drag-and-drop calling. See “Adding the Phonebook Pane to the Call Monitor folder” on page 8-15.
A glance at the Extensions list can tell you:
Q
A user’s extension number
Q
Whether a user is currently on a call
Q
A user’s current personal status
Q
Whether a user has call forwarding turned on, and the location to which the calls are
forwarded
Q
The extensions of your office’s auto attendants and queues
The Extensions list updates automatically in real time.
10-2
Extensions folder tabs
The Extensions folder contains tabs that display related groups of extensions. Click each tab to
view its contents.
Q
All tab. This tab displays all TeleVantage extensions. Your system may be configured
to not show this tab.
Q
Workgroup tabs. The Extensions folder contains a tab for each public workgroup of
which you are a member, and a tab for each personal workgroup that you created and
decided to show as a tab. Click a workgroup tab to see the extensions within that
workgroup. See “Using workgroups” on page 16-14.
Q
Queue tabs. If you are an agent in call center queues, the Extensions folder contains a
tab for each queue. Click the tab to see the agents who are members of that queue.
Extensions folder columns
The following table shows the columns that are available in the Extensions folder. To show or
hide columns, see “Showing and hiding columns” on page 18-22.
Column
Description
Type of extension or user phone state. The
extension types are:
User whose phone is on hook
User whose phone is off hook
Call center agent in wrap-up state
Auto attendant
Call center queue
Workgroup
IVR Plug-in
IP Gateway user (phone status not available)
Icon for the user’s current personal status.
Name
Extension’s name.
Ext
Extension.
CHAPTER 10. USING THE EXTENSIONS LIST
10-3
Column
Personal Status
Name
Description
Name of the user’s current personal status.
For call center queues, this column displays the
queue’s current status. Queue statuses are:
Open. The queue is distributing to its calls to
available agents as normal.
Closed. You have set the queue to send its
calls directly to voicemail.
No agents. All agents in the queue are
currently signed out or unavailable, so the
queue is automatically sending its calls directly
to voicemail.
10-4
Title
User’s title, if available.
DID
User’s Direct Inward Dial (DID) number, if one
exists. This is the number used to dial the user
directly from an outside line.
Forwarding
If the user has turned on call forwarding, this is the
extension to which calls are forwarded. If the user’s
calls are being forwarded to an outside phone
number, “External number” is displayed.
Location
Shows the name of the TeleVantage Server with
which the user is associated.
Organization
Shows the user’s Organization, if any.
Queue Calls
Specifies whether the user is currently available to
receive calls from call center queues.
ACD Calls
If checked, the user is available to receive ACD
workgroup calls.
Comments
Any notes associated with the extension.
Station
The default station for the extension.
Mailbox
If checked, the extension has a voice mailbox.
Placing calls to an extension _______________________________
To place a call to an extension, double-click the extension. If your phone is on hook, it rings to
connect you to the call being placed.
If you want to speak to another user as soon as they are off the phone, you can have ViewPoint
camp on their busy extension (as shown in the Extensions list). The system waits until both you
and the other user are free, then automatically places the call. To do so, select the busy user and
choose Actions > Camp on Busy.
Automatically switching to the Call Monitor
You can have TeleVantage automatically switch to the Call Monitor folder when you place a
call from the Extensions list.
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
Click the View tab.
3.
Under Display Call Monitor in the following situations, check Placing new calls
from Contacts or Extensions.
4.
Click OK.
Sending an instant message to an extension__________________
ViewPoint supports simple, secure, user-to-user instant messaging. With instant messaging you
can initiate a real-time typed conversation between yourself and another user who is running
ViewPoint and has instant messaging enabled.
ViewPoint instant messaging is secure because it requires a valid LAN (or VPN) account and
ViewPoint login, and has no ability to transfer files with potential viruses.
Instant messaging limitations
Limitations of ViewPoint instant messaging include no notification of presence (whether the
other user is running ViewPoint or the Instant Message Add-in), no logging of instant messages,
no coaching/monitoring or recording of instant messages, no HIPPA compliance, no emoticon
support, and no “I am typing” indicator.
CHAPTER 10. USING THE EXTENSIONS LIST
10-5
Using instant messaging
To initiate instant messaging with a user, right-click the user’s name in the Extensions list and
choose Send an instant message.
To send, type your message in the bottom pane, then click Send.
For instant messaging to work, the receiving user must be running ViewPoint and have the
Instant Message Add-in installed and enabled. If this is the case, when you click Send the
message window pops open for the receiving user, allowing him or her to respond.
Configuring instant messaging options
You can configure some instant messaging options by choosing Tools > Add-in Manager,
selecting “TeleVantage Instant Messaging,” and clicking Options.
Disabling instant messaging
Instant messaging is a ViewPoint Add-in that is installed and enabled by default. To disable
instant messaging, so that you cannot send or receive instant messages, do the following:
1.
Choose Tools > Add-in Manager.
2.
Select the “TeleVantage Instant Messaging” Add-in.
3.
Uncheck Enabled.
4.
Click OK.
For more information about Add-ins, see “Enhancing ViewPoint with Add-ins” on page 18-25.
Changing another user’s personal status _____________________
From the Extensions folder you can change another user’s personal status if you know that
user’s password. For instructions, see “Changing the personal status of another user” on
page 9-14.
Exporting the Extensions list _______________________________
You can export the Extensions list to a CSV file. See “Importing and exporting TeleVantage
items” on page 8-27.
10-6
CHAPTER 11
CHAPTER 11
RECEIVING AND HANDLING CALLS IN
VIEWPOINT
Using the Call Monitor folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Displaying the Call Monitor folder automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Selecting and acting on a call in the Call Monitor folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Commands while a call is ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Commands while you’re on a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Preventing certain calls from ringing your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Incoming call indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
Sharing your Call Monitor folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
Using the Call Monitor folder _______________________________
In the TeleVantage ViewPoint, the Call Monitor folder is the visual counterpart to your
telephone. The Call Monitor lets you see all your incoming calls and any outgoing calls at once,
often with the callers identified by name.
In the Call Monitor folder you can:
Q
See who is calling you and take the call or send it to voicemail
Q
Click calls to transfer them, put them on hold, send them to voicemail, or perform other
actions
Q
Move among multiple calls on hold with a click of the mouse
Q
Record calls
Q
Conference calls (including creating or starting a conference)
Each row in the Call Monitor folder is an item that contains information about one call, or one
party in a call. Conference calls appear as a grouped item with each party to the conference call
as a separate indented row.
For an explanation of Call Monitor folder columns, press F1 for online Help. For information
about changing the Call Monitor folder columns that are displayed, see “Customizing columns”
on page 18-22.
Automatically sorting new calls
By default, new calls appear below existing calls when they arrive. Instead, you can have the
Call Monitor automatically sort the folder according to your sort criteria whenever new calls
arrive, for example, by listing them in alphabetical order by caller name. You determine your
sort criteria by clicking the appropriate column header.
11-2
To sort the Call Monitor automatically
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
Choose the ViewPoint \ Call Monitor tab.
3.
Check Actively sorted.
4.
Click OK.
Note: Actively sorting the Call Monitor can make Call Monitor performance slower. You can
always manually sort the Call Monitor by clicking a column header.
Call Monitor folder tabs
For most people, the Call Monitor folder contains one tab, called My Phone. However, the Call
Monitor can display other tabs that group related calls. Click each tab to view the related call
activity at your phone.
Q
My Phone tab. This tab always appears in your Call Monitor folder and displays all calls
to or from your telephone. This includes calls that are forwarded to your extension (in
this case, the called party who forwarded the call is identified in the Owner column), and
calls to your DID number if you have one.
Q
All tab. The All tab appears if any other tabs in addition to the My Phone tab appear in
your Call Monitor. The All tab allows you to see all calls for all tabs in one place.
Q
Parked tab. The Parked tab shows all current parked calls.
Q
Queue tab. If you are an agent in a call center queue, all the current calls for the queue
appear on a separate tab labeled with the queue name. An asterisk (*) on the queue tab
indicates that you are signed out for that queue. For details about participating in a
queue, see Appendix B.
Q
<call owner> tab. Calls for users who have shared their Call Monitor folders with you
appear on separate tabs labeled with the call owner’s name. For more information, see
“Sharing your Call Monitor folder” on page 11-19.
Q
Workgroup tab. If you belong to a workgroup, all current calls for the workgroup
appear on a separate tab labeled with the workgroup’s name. For more information about
workgroups, see “Using workgroups” on page 16-14.
CHAPTER 11. RECEIVING AND HANDLING CALLS IN VIEWPOINT
11-3
Showing, hiding, and reordering Call Monitor tabs
To show or hide individual Call Monitor tabs, as well as choose their order, do the following:
1.
Choose View > Current View > Show Tabs.
2.
Select a tab name and click Add or Remove to show or hide it. Use the up and down
arrow buttons to arrange the order of tabs.
3.
Check Show all parked calls if you want your Call Monitor to display calls parked by
any TeleVantage user. If checked, A “Parked Calls” tab becomes available that
displays all parked calls. If unchecked, your Call Monitor shows only parked calls that
you parked yourself. For an explanation of parking calls, see “Parking a call” on
page 11-15.
4.
Click OK.
Using the My Phone tab to handle calls
After you answer a call, the Call Monitor automatically switches to the My Phone tab. The My
Phone tab is the only tab from which you can perform call-handling commands on a call. If you
select an active call in another tab, the call-handling commands are unavailable.
Displaying calls on the All tab
By default, the All tab groups your current calls under headers corresponding to your other tabs.
In this display format a call can appear multiple times, for example, in the My Phone group and
the Parked group. You can select any appearance of the call to perform commands on it.
You can also have the All tab display your current calls without grouping them. In this display
format each of your calls appears only once.
11-4
To change the All tab display format
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box appears.
2.
Click the ViewPoint \ Call Monitor tab.
3.
Check or uncheck Grouped by owner on All tab.
4.
Click OK.
Call Monitor folder panes
The Call Monitor folder contains the following two panes that you can hide or show:
Q
The Phonebook Pane, which shows the Extensions folder and the Contacts folder and
enables drag-and-drop call handling. See “Adding the Phonebook Pane to the Call
Monitor folder” on page 8-15 and “Dragging and dropping items” on page 8-19.
Q
The History Pane, which shows the history of the call from the moment it entered the
TeleVantage system, including where it might have been before being routed to you. See
“Viewing a call’s history” on page 11-17.
Q
The Notes Pane, which enables you to type and save call notes. See “Adding notes to a
call” on page 11-17.
Call Monitor folder columns
The Call Monitor folder contains several columns that show detailed information about a call,
such as Trunk Name and Target Station. Some of the columns are hidden by default. For an
explanation of the columns, press F1 in the Call Monitor folder for its online Help. For
instructions on hiding and showing columns, see “Customizing columns” on page 18-22.
Viewing a custom data column in the Call Monitor
If your TeleVantage system is configured to display custom data in the Call Monitor, the custom
data appears in one or more columns. You can view the available columns in the Show Columns
dialog box. You can hide and show custom data columns the same way you can hide and show
normal columns (see “Customizing columns” on page 18-22). Contact your TeleVantage
system administrator to see if any custom data columns are available in your Call Monitor
folder.
Displaying the Call Monitor folder automatically _______________
TeleVantage can open the Call Monitor folder automatically in the following situations:
Q
When you receive an incoming call
Q
When you place or return calls from other ViewPoint folders
When the Call Monitor folder opens automatically, it appears in front of all other open windows
on your computer.
CHAPTER 11. RECEIVING AND HANDLING CALLS IN VIEWPOINT
11-5
To display the Call Monitor folder automatically
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
Click the ViewPoint \ Call Monitor tab.
3.
Under Display Call Monitor in the following situations, check one or both of the
following options:
Q
Placing new calls from Contacts or Extensions
Q
Returning calls from Voice Messages or Call Log
4.
To display the Call Monitor folder automatically on incoming calls, click the
ViewPoint \ Call Alerts tab and check Display the Call Monitor.
5.
Click OK.
Selecting and acting on a call in the Call Monitor folder _________
Click a call in the Call Monitor folder to select it. After it is selected, you can choose commands
to apply to that call.
To use a command on a call in the Call Monitor folder, do one of the following actions:
Q
Right-click the call and choose a command on the shortcut menu. This option is often
the fastest way of choosing a command, but it may be difficult to do so during times
when phone traffic is heavy. This is due to the fact that calls change position in the Call
Monitor folder as new calls arrive and transferred calls leave the Call Monitor folder.
Q
Click a button on the toolbar.
Q
Choose a command from the Actions menu.
Q
Press Enter. This puts the selected call on hold, or retrieves it if it is already on hold.
Call ownership
In the Call Monitor you can perform call-handling commands only on calls that you own. You
own a call if you are the one who answered it. If you select a call that you do not own, the
call-handling commands are unavailable.
Examples of calls that you can see, but that you do not own, include calls in a Queue tab that are
being handled by another agent, or calls in a shared Call Monitor tab that are being handled by
the sharing user.
To determine who owns a call, look at the name in the Owner column.
11-6
Double-clicking calls
Double-clicking in the Call Monitor folder has the following effects:
Q
Double-clicking an active call puts it on hold.
Q
Double-clicking any other type of call takes the call (connects you to the caller). This
includes incoming calls, calls on hold, parked calls, and calls for which you are
screening a message.
Commands while a call is ringing ___________________________
While calls are ringing at your phone, the Call Monitor folder displays “Incoming Call.” If
TeleVantage can identify the caller, the item in the Call Monitor folder also displays the caller’s
phone number and name, which enables you to screen your calls. (See “Teaching TeleVantage
to recognize your contacts” on page 16-7.) While calls are ringing, you can perform the
following actions:
Q
Take the call
Q
Send the call to voicemail
Q
“Grab and hold” the call—put it on hold without talking to the caller first
Q
Transfer the call without talking to the caller first
Taking the call
If you are already on another call, select the incoming call and choose Actions > Take Call.
Your current call is put on hold. You can easily move among multiple calls by choosing Take
Call again.
When you use Take Call in the Call Monitor folder, call announcing is not used. However, you
can play the caller’s name over your speakers by choosing Actions > Announce Caller. To have
incoming callers’ names played over your speakers automatically, see “Other options for
incoming calls” on page 11-18.
Sending the call to voicemail
Select the call, and then choose Actions > Take Message. The call is sent to your voicemail.
Note: Call center agents cannot perform this command on an incoming queue call.
Screening a voice message as it is being left
You can listen to a voice message as the caller is leaving it and pick up the call if needed. To do
so:
1.
Select the call while it is ringing or while the caller is leaving a message.
2.
Choose Actions > Screen Message.
CHAPTER 11. RECEIVING AND HANDLING CALLS IN VIEWPOINT
11-7
3.
Pick up your phone and listen to the message as it is being left. This is a one-way
connection. The caller cannot hear you.
4.
To interrupt the message and take the call, choose Actions > Take Call. You are
connected to the caller.
You can also listen to a voice message as it is being left via the phone. See “Call announcing”
on page 4-2.
Grabbing and holding the call
Choose Actions > Hold when you are momentarily unable to take an incoming call but intend
to speak to the caller soon. This command puts callers on hold without your talking to them first
and plays a special grab-and-hold greeting that you have recorded. (See “To record a
grab-and-hold greeting” in this section.) Callers can wait on hold or leave a voice message. The
Status column in the Call Monitor folder shows their choices.
TeleVantage supplies you with an initial grab-and-hold greeting that says, “The person you are
trying to reach is on another call. To hold for your party, remain on the line. Otherwise, to leave
a message, press 1. To end this call, press 2".
You can rerecord this greeting to say, for example, “This is Angela. I am on another call right
now, but if you hold for a moment I will be right with you.” The options that callers hear with
this greeting are contained in a separate prompt that only your TeleVantage system
administrator can change.
To grab and hold a call
Select the incoming call and choose Actions > Hold.
To record a grab-and-hold greeting
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
Click the ViewPoint \ Call Monitor tab.
3.
Use the audio controls under Play this greeting when an incoming call is placed on
hold to record a grab-and-hold greeting. See “Using the audio controls” on page 8-26.
4.
When you have recorded your grab-and-hold greeting, click OK.
Transferring a call without talking to the caller first
You can transfer the call to another extension while it is still ringing. The procedure is the same
as transferring a call normally. See “Transferring a call” on page 11-10.
11-8
Commands while you’re on a call ___________________________
Once you are on an active call, you can perform actions on that call, including the following:
Q
Putting a call on hold
Q
Transferring a call
Q
Recording a call
Q
Playing recorded audio into a call
Q
Associating a call with a contact
Q
Parking a call
Q
Unparking a call
Q
Sending a call to voicemail
Q
Muting a call
Q
Playing a caller's name
Q
Disconnecting a call while staying on the phone
Q
Entering an account code for a call
Q
Viewing a call’s history
Q
Adding notes to a call
Instructions for each of these commands appear in the following sections.
You can also include the call as part of a conference call. See “Creating conference calls” on
page 12-12.
Important: To perform a Call Monitor command on a call, you must select the call in the My
Phone tab. The commands are unavailable from other tabs. See “Call Monitor folder tabs” on
page 11-3.
Putting a call on hold
To put a call on hold, select the call, and then choose Actions > Hold. Alternatively,
double-click the call or select the call and press Enter.
To retrieve the call from hold, select the call and either choose Actions > Take Call,
double-click the call, or press Enter.
You can put as many calls on hold at one time as you want. The Duration column in the Call
Monitor folder shows how long each call has been waiting on hold.
CHAPTER 11. RECEIVING AND HANDLING CALLS IN VIEWPOINT
11-9
Notes
Q
Use Actions > Hold instead of the Hold button on your phone. When on hold, callers hear
music (if your system has music on hold), but they hear only silence if you use your
phone’s Hold button.
Q
You cannot put a call to a queue, auto attendant, or IVR Plug-in on hold. If you attempt to
do so, the call is disconnected.
Q
If you’re using a digital feature phone with multiple line appearances, you do not hear dial
tone after putting a call on hold. To get dial tone, select an unoccupied line.
Ringback for calls on hold
By default, if you hang up with one or more calls on hold, TeleVantage’s ringback feature rings
your phone to remind you. If you do not pick up your phone, any calls on hold are sent to
voicemail.
You can choose how long TeleVantage waits when you have calls on hold before ringing your
phone. You can also turn ringback entirely off. See “Turning ringback for calls on hold on and
off” on page 18-9.
Notes
Q
If you are a call center agent, the ringback time for your queue calls is defined separately
by your queue administrator.
Q
Ringback is available at external stations, but not other remote phones.
Transferring a call
The Call Monitor folder allows you to easily transfer a call to any party, either another
TeleVantage user or someone at an external phone number. You can look up users and contacts
by name, and you can see in advance if an extension is busy. You can also transfer a call to an
auto attendant or to a user’s voicemail.
Drag-and-drop transferring
With the Phonebook pane showing in the Call Monitor folder, you can drag a call from the Call
Monitor to an extension to transfer the call to that extension, or to a contact’s name to transfer
the call to the contact’s default number. For more information about drag-and-drop commands,
see “Dragging and dropping items” on page 8-19. To show the Phonebook pane, see “Adding
the Phonebook Pane to the Call Monitor folder” on page 8-15.
11-10
Blind, supervised, and direct-to-voicemail transfers
You can transfer a call in one of the following ways:
Q
Blind transfer, sometimes called an unattended transfer. You transfer the call without
first speaking to the recipient. When the recipient answers the phone, the call is
connected.
Note: Blind transfers occur automatically when transferring a ringing call, and when
transferring to voicemail, an auto attendant, a queue, or an IVR Plug-in.
Q
Supervised transfer, sometimes called an attended transfer. You speak to the transfer
recipient first, while the caller is placed on hold. You can then complete the transfer, or
conference the three of you together, or cancel the transfer and return to the caller.
Q
Direct to voicemail. You transfer the call directly to an extension’s voicemail.
To transfer a call
1.
Select the call that you want to transfer.
2.
Choose Actions > Transfer. The Transfer To dialog box opens.
3.
Select the person or enter the number to which to you want to transfer the call. See
“Placing a call” on page 12-2 for instructions.
Note: You may be prohibited from transferring an external caller to an external
number. See your TeleVantage system administrator for more information.
4.
If you are transferring the call to an external number, select the dialing service to use
from the Call Using dropdown list. See “Using dialing services” on page 12-8.
5.
In the Transfer field at the bottom of the dialog box, click either Blind, Supervised,
or to Voicemail. See the beginning of this section for more information.
6.
Click OK. If you selected Blind or to Voicemail, the transfer is completed and the call
disappears from your Call Monitor.
If you selected Supervised, you are connected to the recipient’s extension, and the
caller is put on hold. The incomplete transfer displays as a linked three-party call in
the Call Monitor.
7.
Speak to the recipient and announce the caller. A dialog box opens and asks you if you
want to complete the transfer or cancel it.
8.
Choose one of the following options:
CHAPTER 11. RECEIVING AND HANDLING CALLS IN VIEWPOINT
11-11
Q
Complete. The transfer is completed and the call disappears from your Call
Monitor. You can also complete the transfer by hanging up the phone.
Q
Conference. The caller, the recipient, and you are all connected in a conference
call.
Q
Cancel. The transfer process ends and you are reconnected to the caller, so you
can transfer him or her to voicemail or another destination.
Transfer tips for Operator users
By using workgroups and showing the Extensions tab of the Phonebook pane in the Call
Monitor folder, you can easily find and choose the recipient of a call that you want to transfer.
Define workgroups to represent the departments of your office. When transferring a call you can
then view only the members of a workgroup, for example, the Marketing workgroup. You can
see at a glance the names of members of the Marketing department and who is available to take
a call. See “Using workgroups” on page 16-14 and “Adding the Phonebook Pane to the Call
Monitor folder” on page 8-15.
You can also transfer calls more easily by resizing the Transfer To dialog box, by showing and
hiding columns, and by sorting calls by column. See “Customizing ViewPoint for Operators”
on page 18-21.
Recording a call
If your TeleVantage system administrator has given you the required permission, you can record
your TeleVantage conversations, including conference calls. By default, recordings appear in
your Voicemail Inbox folder, although the system may be configured to send them to another
extension’s Inbox.
The maximum length of a single recording is equal to the total number of minutes available in
your voice mailbox. By default this is 20 minutes, but your TeleVantage administrator may have
set a different limit.
Important: You cannot receive more voice messages when your voice mailbox is full. You
should check your available mailbox space after recording any conversation to be sure that you
have space for new voice messages. See “Managing your voicemail quota” on page 13-9 for
more information.
To record a call
11-12
1.
During an active call, choose Actions > Start Recording. TeleVantage starts to record
the call. You may hear a regular beep while recording, depending on your system
configuration.
2.
To stop recording before the call is finished, choose Actions > Stop Recording.
To play a call you just recorded
1.
Go to your Voicemail \ Inbox folder, or open another mailbox if your system is set up
differently.
2.
Select the recording.
3.
Choose Actions > Play.
Note: You can also play call recordings from the Call Log. See “Listening to a recorded call from
the Call Log” on page 14-9.
Using the telephone commands
You can start and stop recording your calls using the *16 telephone command. See “Recording
a call” on page 4-9. You can also use the telephone commands to listen to recordings in your
Inbox. See “Listening to and managing your voicemail” on page 5-4.
Privacy
It is the responsibility of you and your administrator to comply with any federal or other
applicable statutes regarding the recording of phone calls. Vertical, Inc. disclaims any
responsibility for failing to comply with such regulations.
Playing recorded audio into a call
You can play greetings or voice messages into a call. Both parties hear the audio recording. You
can use this feature to store and play pre-recorded information such as long “Hello” greetings
when you answer the phone, or later in the call for such things as driving directions. You can
also play your voice messages to a caller to discuss the contents of a message while on the
phone.
While the audio is playing, you and the other parties in the call can talk and be heard, although
you will be talking over the audio.
Notes
Q
You can play audio into any calls you control, for example, calls you put on hold or parked.
When you leave a call, any recorded audio you started playing stops.
Q
While audio is playing, some transfer commands are disabled, for example, transferring
the call directly to voicemail. This is because TeleVantage creates a conference call
behind the scenes when playing audio, and there are restrictions on handling conference
calls (see “Transferring a conference call” on page 12-14). A “(Playing)” indicator appears
in the Call Monitor as a reminder.
CHAPTER 11. RECEIVING AND HANDLING CALLS IN VIEWPOINT
11-13
To play audio into a call from the Call Monitor
1.
Select the call and choose Actions > Insert Audio > Play Audio into Call. The Play
Audio Into Call dialog box opens.
2.
Select the recorded audio to play. You can choose any of your greetings or voice
messages, or click Import to select a WAV or VOX audio file. When you import a file,
it is saved as a new greeting, so you can use it again next time without importing.
3.
Click OK. The audio is played into the call.
To play audio into a call from other folders
1.
Select a greeting in the Greetings folder or a voice message in any Voicemail folder.
2.
Choose Actions > Play into call. From the submenu, select one of the following:
Q
Current call. Plays the audio into your current call.
Other call. Lets you choose the call into which the audio plays. Select the call in the
Play audio into call dialog box and click OK.
To stop playing audio into a call
In the Call Monitor, choose Actions > Insert Audio > Stop Audio.
Associating a call with a contact
Unidentified calls appear in the Call Monitor folder as being from “Unknown.” You can
associate a particular unidentified call with one of your contacts, so that the Call Monitor and
Call Log folders display a name with the call. You can also permanently associate the call’s
Caller ID phone number or text with the contact, so that TeleVantage automatically identifies
the contact on all subsequent calls from that phone.
To associate a call with a contact, choose Actions > Associate. See “Associating a call or Caller
ID number with a contact” on page 16-9.
11-14
Parking a call
Parking a call puts a call on hold and lets any TeleVantage user retrieve it from any TeleVantage
telephone or ViewPoint program in your office.
To park a call
1.
In the Call Monitor, select the call you want to park.
2.
Choose Actions > Park. The Status column in the Call Monitor folder displays
“Parked on <orbit number>.
Unparking a call
You can retrieve a parked call from any TeleVantage telephone or ViewPoint program in your
office.
To answer a parked call from any ViewPoint program
1.
Click Tools > Unpark. The Unpark dialog box opens.
2.
Select the call that you want to unpark and answer and click OK.
As an alternative to using the Unpark window, you can display a “Parked” tab in the Call
Monitor that shows all parked calls. See “Showing, hiding, and reordering Call Monitor tabs”
on page 11-4.
You can also answer a parked call by picking up a TeleVantage phone, pressing *92, and then
entering the orbit number.
If no one answers the parked call
By default, if no one answers a call that you parked, TeleVantage rings your phone to connect
you to the caller. If you do not answer, the ringback is repeated periodically until either you
answer or someone else answers the call.
Note: TeleVantage never sends a parked call to voicemail. If you do not answer the ringback, it
tries to reach you indefinitely.
You can choose how long TeleVantage waits before ringing your phone for callback of parked
calls. You can also turn ringback off. See “Turning ringback for calls on hold on and off” on
page 18-9.
Ringback is available at external stations, but not other remote phones.
Sending a call to voicemail
To send an active call to voicemail, choose Actions > Take Message.
CHAPTER 11. RECEIVING AND HANDLING CALLS IN VIEWPOINT
11-15
Muting a call
With TeleVantage you can mute a call even if your phone does not have a mute button. When
muted, you can hear the caller, but the caller cannot hear you.
To mute a call, choose Actions > Mute. Choose Actions > Mute again to turn muting off.
Playing a caller's name
You can play a recording of a caller’s name over your speakers at any time during a call by
choosing Actions > Announce Caller.
The recording that plays is either the caller’s voice title, if one has been recorded, or the caller’s
answer to the call announcing prompt, “Please say your name.” If you choose Actions >
Announce Caller and hear nothing, then either the caller has no voice title recorded, you have
the call announcing prompt turned off, or the caller did not answer the prompt.
See “Customizing or turning off call announcing” on page 18-6 for more about call announcing.
See “Recording your voice title” on page 2-2 for more about voice titles.
You can also have the caller’s name play automatically when an incoming call arrives. See
“Other options for incoming calls” on page 11-18.
Disconnecting a call while staying on the phone
You can disconnect a call without hanging up the phone. Select the call, and then choose
Actions > Disconnect. This command disconnects the caller and provides you with a dial tone.
This command is useful if:
Q
You want to disconnect a single party in a conference call. Hanging up your phone
would disconnect you from the whole conference.
Q
You are going to immediately dial another call. If you hang up and pick up your phone
too quickly, TeleVantage can read that as a Flash command, which would put the call
on hold instead of disconnecting it.
Entering an account code for a call
While on a call, you can enter an account code for the call or change the one already entered.
11-16
1.
Select the call, and then choose Actions > Enter Account Code.
2.
Enter an account code. You can enter numbers, letters, or other characters.
3.
Click OK.
You can also enter a (numeric-only) account code using the telephone commands. See “Entering
an account code for a call” on page 4-11. In addition, you can enter an account code from the
Call Log after the call is complete. See “Entering an account code for a Call Log entry” on
page 14-9.
Viewing a call’s history
While a call is visible in your Call Monitor folder, you can view its history in the Notes Pane. If
the History Pane is not showing, click History in the bottom pane.
The History Pane shows the complete history of the call from the moment it entered the
TeleVantage system. You can see how the call was routed to you, and where it might have been
before you received it.
Adding notes to a call
While a call is visible in your Call Monitor folder, you can type notes about the call in the Notes
Pane. If the Notes Pane is not showing, click Notes in the bottom pane.
If the call is transferred to someone else, notes that you created about the call are sent with the
call (for example, you can add a note such as “Customer wants to track invoice #123987” before
transferring the call to your shipping department). When the call is complete, you can view or
edit the notes for the call in the Call Log folder (see Chapter 14, “Using the Call Log Folder” ).
Preventing certain calls from ringing your phone ______________
You can prevent certain types of calls from ringing your phone, as follows:
Q
All calls. Select the Do Not Disturb personal status, which sends all your incoming calls
directly to voicemail without ringing your phone. See “Sending your calls straight to
voicemail with Do Not Disturb” on page 5-10 and Chapter 9. Note that agents in ACD
workgroups continue to receive ACD workgroup calls even with Do Not Disturb
selected.
Q
Calls from call center queues. For agents in call center queues only. Select any
personal status whose Queue calls preference is set to No, such as Available
(Non-Queue) or Do Not Disturb. These statuses mark you as unavailable and you do not
receive queue calls. See Appendix B.
Q
Calls from ACD workgroups. For agents in ACD workgroups only. Choose Tools >
Options, click the Personal tab of the Options dialog box, uncheck Accept ACD
workgroup calls, and then click OK. Doing this marks you as unavailable and you do
not receive calls from ACD workgroups.
CHAPTER 11. RECEIVING AND HANDLING CALLS IN VIEWPOINT
11-17
Incoming call indicators ___________________________________
When you receive a call, the “ringing bell” button appears in the system tray on your Windows
taskbar (see the next figure). Hold the mouse pointer over the button to see who is calling by
phone number and name, if available.
Right-click the button for a shortcut menu of call-handling commands such as Take Call and
Take Message. Double-click the button to bring ViewPoint to the front of your desktop.
TeleVantage can also give you information about an incoming call on the phone, in the
following ways:
Q
Call announcing. TeleVantage announces the caller’s name and gives you the choice of
accepting the call or sending it to voicemail. See “Call announcing” on page 4-2 and
“Customizing or turning off call announcing” on page 18-6 for more information.
Q
Call waiting. When you are on a call, TeleVantage alerts you of an incoming call by
playing the call waiting tone (two beeps). See “Call waiting” on page 4-3 for more
information.
Q
Caller ID display. If you have a telephone with a Caller ID display, you can use it to see
the Caller ID of the incoming call. See “Displaying Caller ID on a phone” on page 18-8
for more information.
Q
Customized ring patterns. See the next section.
Customized ring patterns
You can set ring patterns for incoming calls of a particular category or type. The type of ring
then allows you to quickly identify the type of incoming call. For example, you can use one ring
for internal callers and two rings for external callers. For instructions, see “Changing ring
patterns” on page 18-11.
Other options for incoming calls
The ViewPoint \ Call Alerts tab of the Options dialog box offers you other ways TeleVantage
can signal an incoming call. See “Customizing incoming call behavior” on page 18-16 for more
information.
11-18
Sharing your Call Monitor folder ____________________________
You can share your Call Monitor folder with other TeleVantage users. Those users see your calls
when they click on a tab with your name on it in their Call Monitors. If you give them the View
and Edit permission level, they can answer your calls using that tab and perform all
call-handling commands on them. If you give them the View Only permission level, they can
see your calls but cannot answer them or perform any commands on them.
When you share calls with another user, your calls also appear in your own Call Monitor, but if
the other user accepts one of your shared calls, you cannot manage it or take it.
Note: Calls that you share with another user do not ring at the other user’s telephone. If you want
your calls to ring there, forward your calls to the user instead of sharing them. For more
information about call forwarding, see Chapter 15.
You can use call sharing in the following ways:
Q
A coworker can cover your calls when you step away from your desk.
Q
Your assistant can screen all your calls and pick up routine calls while letting important
calls go through to you directly.
Example: A manager shares calls with an assistant so that the assistant can see the manager’s
calls. Based on the caller’s name or number, the assistant lets some calls go through, answers
other calls, and sends some calls directly to the manager’s voicemail. If another call arrives
while the manager is already on a call, the assistant can see with whom the manager is talking,
determine if the current call is too sensitive to be interrupted, and handle the call appropriately.
Note: Calls you receive from a call center queue can be seen only by fellow agents in your
queue, even if you are sharing your Call Monitor folder with other users.
For instructions on sharing your Call Monitor folder, see “Sharing folders” on page 8-24.
Viewing shared calls
When users share their Call Monitor folders with you, the following tabs appear in your Call
Monitor folder:
Q
A <call owner name> tab for each user who has shared calls with you. This tab displays
only the calls for that user.
Q
The All tab, which displays all calls including shared calls. The calls are organized by
call owner name.
See “Call Monitor folder tabs” on page 11-3 for information about how tabs are used in the Call
Monitor to display calls.
CHAPTER 11. RECEIVING AND HANDLING CALLS IN VIEWPOINT
11-19
CHAPTER 12
CHAPTER 12P
PLACING CALLS IN VIEWPOINT
CHAPTER CONTENTS
Placing a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Using dialing services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Redialing numbers and returning calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Displaying the Call Monitor when you place a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Creating Windows shortcuts to speed-dial a number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Creating conference calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Supervising other users’ calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Using the TeleVantage or eyeBeam softphones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Placing a call ____________________________________________
TeleVantage provides the following ways for you to place calls from ViewPoint:
Q
Placing calls using the Dial bar
Q
Using the Place Call To dialog box
Q
Quick-dialing from ViewPoint folders
Q
Camping on a busy user’s extension
Q
Placing calls using drag-and-drop
Q
Placing calls by using other contact managers
Placing calls with the phone on or off hook
When placing calls from ViewPoint you can choose the command with the phone either on-hook
or off-hook. If the phone is on-hook when you place a call, your phone rings immediately after
you finish dialing the number. If the phone is off-hook when you place a call, you hear
TeleVantage dialing the number.
Dialing Internet addresses and SIP URI addresses
If your system is set up to handle H.323 and SIP Internet calls, you can enter an IP address (for
example, 11.22.33.44) or a SIP URI (for example sip:vwilliams@abccorp.com) anywhere you
could enter a phone number. In cases where you must select a dialing service, you must select
an H.323 service for H.323 calls or a SIP service for SIP calls.
Placing calls using the Dial bar
ViewPoint has a Dial bar on the menu bar that you can use to place calls.
To place a call using the Dial bar
1.
Type either of the following in the Dial bar:
Q
The number to dial. If it is an external number, type the full number including area
code (10 digits in North America, for example 6173540600). Do not enter a
TeleVantage access code (such as 9). To dial international numbers enter +
followed by the country code and the number, for example +44 020 7323 8299. Do
not add the international access code (for example, 011 in North America).
Hyphens, spaces, periods and parentheses are allowed.
Q
12-2
The name or partial name of a user, contact, or contact company name. TeleVantage
searches all of the Contacts, Extensions, and Workgroups for a match. If only one
match is found, the system places the call immediately. If there is more than one
match, a dialog box opens and you can select a name on the list and click Dial to
place the call.
2.
To specify an account code for the call, add a vertical bar character (|) after the number,
followed by the account code.
3.
Press ENTER to place the call.
You can also drag-and-drop items into the Dial bar, including a text phone number from another
application. See “Placing calls using drag-and-drop” on page 12-7.
To redial a call using the Dial bar
Click the arrow on the right of the Dial bar for a list of recently dialed names and numbers. Click
a number to redial it.
Using the Place Call To dialog box
The Place Call To dialog box visually guides you to place a call. It is not as efficient as using
the Dial bar (if you know the person's name or number) or the Call Monitor's Phonebook pane.
1.
Choose File > New > Call. The Place Call To dialog box opens.
2.
Enter or select the number to dial in one of the following ways:
Q
Enter the number to dial in the Name/Number or Name/Extension field. You can
also type the name of a contact or user. When specifying an external number make
sure the correct dialing service is selected under Call Using (see “Using dialing
services” on page 12-8).
Q
Click Contacts and select a contact on the list.
The contact’s default phone number appears in the dropdown list below the main
list. If the contact has more than one phone number associated with it, you can select
a different number to call on the dropdown list.
CHAPTER 12. PLACING CALLS IN VIEWPOINT
12-3
To create a new contact, click
to open a new Contact dialog box. To edit the
currently selected contact, press ALT and click
. See “Entering a new contact”
on page 16-4 for more information.
Q
Click Extensions and select an extension in the list. The list is identical to other
Extensions lists in ViewPoint (see “Viewing TeleVantage extensions” on
page 10-2).
If the extension is a user with public numbers, you can choose one of those numbers
from the dropdown list below the main list.
Q
Click Workgroups and select a workgroup in the list.
When you call a workgroup, all users’ phones within that workgroup ring
simultaneously. The first member of the workgroup to pick up the phone connects
to the call. Contacts in the workgroup are ignored.
Q
Click My Numbers. To place a call to one of your own phone numbers, such as your
home or mobile phone, select it on the list. To place a call to another number, enter
the number in the Number field.
For instructions on entering numbers in your My Numbers list, see the next section,
“Entering My Numbers.” .
Note: To verify that the phone number is entered in a correct format, click
.
3.
To enter an account code for the call, type a vertical bar character (|) after the number,
followed by the account code.
4.
If you are placing a call to an external number, make sure that the appropriate dialing
service is selected on the Call Using dropdown list (see the section “Using dialing
services” on page 12-8).
5.
Click OK to place the call.
Another way to place a call to a user is to double-click the user in the Extensions list.
Entering My Numbers
You can store your own phone numbers in your TeleVantage account, such as your home
number or your mobile phone number. When placing, forwarding, or transferring a call, you can
click My Numbers and select one of your numbers.
To enter a number or address in the My Numbers list
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
Click the Personal \ My Numbers tab.
3.
Click the type of number you want to enter or modify, for example Home or Mobile,
then click Edit.
To delete a number, click it, then click Clear.
12-4
4.
If the Call Using field is present, select the dialing service to use when placing calls to
this number. See “Using dialing services” on page 12-8.
5.
In the Number, Address, Email, or IM address field, enter the phone number, IP
address, email address or instant messaging address.
6.
Check Public to make the number publicly available. This has the following effects:
Q
Other users can quick-dial your public numbers (or make speed-dial shortcuts to
them) by right-clicking your name in their ViewPoint Extensions list. If unchecked,
the number is kept private and does not appear on this right-click menu.
Q
When a call comes into TeleVantage from one of your public numbers, your name
appears in the From column, and can be used to identify you, for example by other
users’ call rules. If unchecked, calls from the number display as from “Unknown.”
Note: In cases where the same number is defined in different places, TeleVantage
chooses the name to display by prioritizing as follows: (1) a user’s public number, (2)
a public contact, (3) a private contact.
Q
Other programs can access to the number, for example, an ViewPoint Add-in that
automatically dials certain numbers (see “Enhancing ViewPoint with Add-ins” on
page 18-25). If unchecked, other programs cannot read or access the number,
though your system administrator can still view it.
7.
Click OK to return to the Options dialog box.
8.
Click OK to close the Options dialog box.
CHAPTER 12. PLACING CALLS IN VIEWPOINT
12-5
Quick-dialing from ViewPoint folders
In certain ViewPoint folders you can quickly place calls by either right-clicking an item or
selecting it and using the Actions menu. You can choose the following commands:
Q
Speed Dial. Immediately places a call to the default number of the selected item. For a
user, it is his or her extension. For a contact, it is the contact’s default phone number.
Q
Place Call. Opens a sub-menu that lets you choose from all the available numbers for
the selected item (for example, all of a contact’s numbers). You can also choose Other
to open the Place Call To dialog box with that item selected (see “Using the Place Call
To dialog box” on page 12-3).
You can quick-dial the following types of call from ViewPoint folders:
To quick-dial...
A user or other
extension
A caller (call back)
Use this folder
Notes
Extensions
(or Extensions list in the
Call Monitor’s
Phonebook pane)
Call Log
Places a call to the Caller ID
or callback number of the
call.
A voice message (call
back)
Voice Messages
(Inbox or other folders)
Places a call to the Caller ID
or callback number of the
voice message.
A contact
Contacts
(or Contacts list in the
Call Monitor's
Phonebook pane)
A workgroup
Workgroups
(or Extensions with a
workgroup selected)
Calls all users in the
workgroup simultaneously.
The first user to answer
receives the call.
Speed-dialing by double-clicking
In the Extensions list, double-clicking an extension speed-dials that extension.
In the Contacts folder, double-clicking a contact may speed-dial the contact’s default number,
depending on how you have configured your Contacts folder (see “Defining double-click
behavior in the Contacts folder” on page 18-22).
12-6
Camping on a busy user’s extension
If you want to speak to another user as soon as they are off the phone, you can have ViewPoint
camp on their busy extension (as shown in the Extensions list). The system waits until both you
and the other user are free, then automatically places the call.
To camp on a busy extension
1.
Select the user you want to call in the Extensions list.
2.
Choose Actions > Camp on busy.
The system waits a maximum of 30 minutes for the extension to become free. If in that time
there was never a moment when both you and the other user were free, the camp-on call expires.
The camp-on also expires if you exit ViewPoint.
To cancel a camp-on call after you have placed it, select the user and choose Actions > Cancel
Camp-on.
Placing calls using drag-and-drop
You can place a call to an extension, contact, or workgroup by dragging and dropping it either
into the Call Monitor or the Dial bar. When dropped, TeleVantage places the call using the
default phone number or Internet dialing service.
You can also drag and drop any phone number or IP address that appears in text, either in the
Notes pane of a ViewPoint folder or in another Windows application, for example an Outlook
e-mail or an web page in Internet Explorer. To do so, simply select the phone number and drag
it into the ViewPoint Call Monitor or the Dial bar. (To drag a number from another application,
that application must support drag-and-drop of selected text.)
Note: When dragging between maximized Windows applications (that take up the full screen),
you can drag briefly over the taskbar item for ViewPoint, which brings ViewPoint to the front, then
continue dragging into ViewPoint and drop.
For a complete list of ViewPoint drag-and-drop operations, see “Dragging and dropping items”
on page 8-19.
Placing calls by using other contact managers
You can place calls by using other contact managers such as Microsoft Outlook, GoldMine or
FrontOffice 2000, or Interact Commerce Corporation’s Act!. For more information, see “Using
the TAPI Service Provider and the CMA” on page 1-3.
CHAPTER 12. PLACING CALLS IN VIEWPOINT
12-7
Using dialing services _____________________________________
Dialing services let you place external calls using different phone lines or telecommunication
services. Your TeleVantage system administrator may have set up one or more dialing services
with names like “Phone number” or “Chicago Centrex” with access codes of 9 or 8 so that you
can identify it by name in ViewPoint and also easily dial it with your phone.
The dialing services available to you depend on how your system is set up (many systems only
have one dialing service for all phone numbers). Your TeleVantage system administrator can
tell you how to choose the appropriate dialing service for the following types of calls:
Q
Local or long-distance calls
Q
Calls to a PBX or Centrex extension
Q
Calls to a user on another TeleVantage system through an Internet connection
Q
Calls to an IP (Internet) address, such as a Microsoft NetMeeting terminal
Entering phone numbers using various types of dialing service
Whenever ViewPoint prompts you to enter a number, you can select a dialing service in the Call
Using field.
Entering a phone number
If you selected a phone number dialing service in the Call Using field, enter a phone number in
the Number field. Use the following guidelines:
Q
For local calls, you can enter the number with or without the city or area code.
TeleVantage will automatically dial the number correctly based on the dialing service
settings configured by your administrator. You do not need to enter the long-distance
prefix as part of a long-distance number.
Q
To enter a phone number for international dialing, enter the country code followed by
the phone number, for example, 44 020 7323 8299. You do not need to enter the
international dialing prefix (011 in North America) with an international number.
Entering a Centrex or a PBX extension
If you selected a Centrex or PBX dialing service in the Call Using field, including to call a
remote TeleVantage Server, enter the Centrex or PBX extension number you want to dial in the
Extension field.
12-8
Entering an IP address
If you selected an H.323 or SIP Internet dialing service in the Call Using field, use the Address
field to enter one of the following:
Q
For an H.323 Internet address, enter the IP address of the remote H.323 device or
TeleVantage Server to which you want to connect. For example, 123.45.67.89 or
abccorp.com.
Q
For a SIP Internet address, enter the SIP URI of the party you want to call. For example,
sip:vwilliams@abccorp.com.
If the IP address connects you to an external H.323 Gateway, you can dial a phone number
through it by appending the phone number to the IP address. Separate the address from the
phone number with a slash character, for example, 123.45.67.89/6173540600.
If the IP address connects you to a remote TeleVantage Server, you can append a user’s Direct
Inward Dial (DID) number in the same manner, for example, 123.45.67.89/2717. You cannot
append a user’s extension.
Checking a number
To confirm that TeleVantage has correctly interpreted a number or address that you have
entered—for example, that it has recognized the correct country on an international call—click
next to the Number or Address field. The Check Phone Number dialog box opens. You can
correct any dialing errors here before you place the call.
Note: The dialog will open automatically if the number you entered was unclear.
To check a phone number
1.
Under Country/Region, make sure the correct country is selected.
2.
Under City/Area code and Local number, confirm that TeleVantage has interpreted
the number correctly.
CHAPTER 12. PLACING CALLS IN VIEWPOINT
12-9
3.
Select Use country code and area code dialing rules if you want TeleVantage to
apply dialing rules that determine if a number is a local or long-distance call. Clear it
to have TeleVantage dial the number exactly as entered, as if you had dialed it on the
phone.
4.
Click OK to close the Check Phone Number dialog box.
Note: When you click
to check an Internet address, the dialog box lets you check the
Internet address and any Remote number that you have appended to it.
Redialing numbers and returning calls _______________________
You can quickly perform the following dialing actions in ViewPoint:
Q
Redial the last number you dialed. Press F12 on your keyboard.
Q
Return the last call you received. Press F11 on your keyboard. The name of the last
caller and the phone number appear in the status bar at the bottom of ViewPoint window.
You can also redial and return calls using the Dial bar (see “Placing calls using the Dial bar” on
page 12-2) or the telephone commands (see “Placing calls with * options” on page 3-5).
Displaying the Call Monitor when you place a call ______________
TeleVantage can display the Call Monitor automatically when you place a call from the
Contacts folder or the Extensions list. It can also automatically switch to the Call Monitor when
you return a call from the Call Log folder or any Voicemail folder. See “Displaying the Call
Monitor folder automatically” on page 11-5 for details.
Creating Windows shortcuts to speed-dial a number ___________
Speed dial shortcuts are Windows shortcuts for phone numbers that you dial frequently. Speed
dial shortcuts appear as icons on your Windows desktop. You can drag them to your Microsoft
shortcut toolbar or to any directory. Double-clicking them will call the phone number and launch
ViewPoint if it is not already running.
To create a speed dial shortcut on your desktop, right-click a call, an extension, or a contact and
choose Create Speed Dial Shortcut . You can also use the next procedure to create a speed dial
shortcut.
12-10
To create a speed dial shortcut
1.
Choose Tools > Speed Dial Shortcuts. The Speed Dial Shortcuts dialog box opens.
2.
Enter or select a number for the shortcut to dial. For instructions using this dialog box,
see “Using the Place Call To dialog box” on page 12-3.
Note: You cannot make a shortcut for a workgroup unless your TeleVantage system
administrator has given it an extension.
3.
Click Create. A dialog box opens and confirms that the shortcut has been added to
your desktop.
4.
Repeat steps 2 through 3 to create other speed dial shortcuts or click Close.
CHAPTER 12. PLACING CALLS IN VIEWPOINT
12-11
Creating conference calls __________________________________
TeleVantage lets you easily conference multiple calls together. The Call Monitor folder treats a
conference call as a single call. You can put a conference on hold or park it exactly as you would
a single call.
The maximum number of parties that can be in a single conference can be between 4 and 60,
depending on your system's configuration. Ask your system administrator for details.
Conference calls appear in a tree structure in the Call Monitor folder. Participants appear on
indented rows under the conference call. Click the top row to perform an action on the
conference.
You can create a conference call by:
Q
Adding parties one at a time to a call
Q
Combining separate active calls into one
Adding parties to a conference
Use this procedure to start and build a conference call. The call is placed on hold while you are
adding new parties, but the parties already conferenced can continue to talk to each other.
1.
Dial the first party and wait for an answer.
2.
Click the call in the Call Monitor folder.
3.
Choose Actions > Conference. The Conference dialog box opens.
4.
Select the second party for the conference call or enter a phone number to dial, and
then click OK. See “Placing a call” on page 12-2 for more information.
Note: If you have more than one active call when you choose the Conference
command, click the New Call tab in the Conference dialog box to place the call.
When the call is answered, you are connected to the new party in a separate call. The
Conferencing dialog box opens giving you the option of adding the party to the
conference or not.
12-12
5.
6.
Determine whether you want to add the new party to the conference. Then click one
of the following:
Q
Complete. The new party joins the conference call.
Q
Cancel. The new party’s call is disconnected, and you return to the conference call.
Repeat steps 2-5 to add more parties to the conference.
Adding parties to a conference by dragging and dropping
To drag and drop parties into a conference, you must have the Calls pane open in the Extensions
or Contacts folder, or the Phonebook pane open in the Call Monitor folder. For more
information, see “Adding the Calls Pane to any open folder” on page 8-15 and “Adding the
Phonebook Pane to the Call Monitor folder” on page 8-15 for instructions.
Drag and drop parties to the conference as follows:
Q
Using the Calls Pane in the Extensions or Contacts folder, you can drag users or contacts
onto the active call in the Calls Pane to automatically add them as parties to the
conference. If you press SHIFT while you drag a user from the Extensions list, the
Conference dialog box opens and provides further options.
Q
Using the Phonebook Pane in the Call Monitor folder, you can create a conference call
by pressing SHIFT and dragging and dropping a call, contact, or extension onto another
call.
For other drag-and-drop operations you can perform in ViewPoint, see “Dragging and dropping
items” on page 8-19.
Conferencing multiple active calls together
Use the following procedure when you have two or more separate existing calls that you want
to conference together with yourself. Note that you cannot conference two conference calls
together.
To conference separate existing calls together
1.
Select all the calls that you want to conference together. Press CTRL on your computer
keyboard as you select multiple calls.
2.
Choose Actions > Conference. The selected calls are now conferenced with you.
Muting individual conference parties
You can select individual parties in a conference call and apply the mute command (Actions >
Mute). The muted parties can then only listen to the call, not be heard. You can use this feature
to manage “classroom-style” conference calls, where callers listen to a meeting or lecture.
Hold down the CTRL key as you click to select or deselect individual parties, or hold down the
SHIFT key as you click to select a range.
CHAPTER 12. PLACING CALLS IN VIEWPOINT
12-13
Transferring a conference call
You can transfer a conference call, but not to the following destinations:
Q
An auto attendant
Q
Directly to a voice mailbox
Q
A call center queue
Q
An IVR Plug-in
You also cannot transfer individual parties out of a conference.
Ending a conference call
A conference call normally ends when all parties hang up at roughly the same time. If you leave
the conference call early, by default the conference call continues without you. The other
participants can continue to talk, even if you started the conference and your company is paying
for the outgoing calls used to create it. To terminate the call, each participant must hang up, or
you must disconnect all parties.
Your system may be configured to disconnect the conference when you leave.
Supervising other users’ calls ______________________________
With the proper permissions, you can enter another user’s call as a third party without being
invited. This is usually done by a manager to supervise the other user, or by an operator to briefly
join someone's call to announce something that needs immediate attention.
Note: You cannot use this feature to supervise ACD workgroup calls.
You can supervise calls in the following ways:
Q
Monitor. You can listen to the other user’s call without being heard by the other parties
in the call.
Q
Coach. You can speak to the other user without being heard by other parties in the call.
The other user is the only party to hear you. You hear all parties.
Q
Join. You join the call as a full participant, able to hear and be heard by all parties in the
call. Essentially, you create a conference call by inviting yourself in.
Each supervise command is available only if you have permission to use that command and the
user is configured to allow being supervised with that command. Talk to your system
administrator about whether you can monitor, coach, and join other users’ calls, and which users
you can supervise, if any.
Important: When supervising a call with multiple users, all other users in the call must be
configured to allow being supervised with that mode. If even one user already in the call does not
permit being supervised, you cannot supervise the call.
Depending on your system setup, if the person you are supervising leaves the call—for example,
transfers it to someone else—you are disconnected.
12-14
To supervise another user’s call using ViewPoint
1.
2.
Select one of the following:
Q
A call in the Call Monitor, if the other user has shared his or her Call Monitor with
you.
Q
A user in the Extensions list who is currently on a call.
Q
A call center queue agent in the Agents pane of the Queue Monitor (see Appendix
C).
Choose Actions > Supervise, and select the supervisor mode you want to use. The
option is available only if both you and the other users in the call permit that supervisor
mode.
To supervise another user’s call using the telephone
1.
Pick up the phone and enter one of the following commands at the dial tone:
Q
*57. Join.
Q
*58. Coach.
Q
*59. Monitor.
2.
Enter the extension of the user whose call you want to monitor, coach, or join,
followed by #.
3.
Press 1 to confirm the extension, or press * to enter a different extension.
Note: You can enter the complete digit string rapidly without waiting for the prompts.
For example, *58 102# 1 to coach extension 102.
4.
Once connected to the call, you can use the following telephone command options:
Q
To change the supervising mode—for example, from monitoring to
coaching—press Flash, then enter the code for the new mode.
Q
To supervise a different user, press Flash # to return to the dial tone, then begin
again.
Using the TeleVantage or eyeBeam softphones________________
For instructions on using the TeleVantage H.323 SoftPhone, see Appendix F.
For instructions on using the eyeBeam SIP softphone, included with TeleVantage, see Appendix
G.
CHAPTER 12. PLACING CALLS IN VIEWPOINT
12-15
CHAPTER 13
CHAPTER 13
MANAGING VOICE MESSAGES IN
VIEWPOINT
CHAPTER CONTENTS
About managing voice messages in ViewPoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Listening to your voice messages and call recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Handling your voice messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Managing call recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Sharing your voice messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Managing your voicemail quota . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Sending a message directly to a user’s voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Knowing when you have new messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Managing greetings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
About managing voice messages in ViewPoint ________________
You can manage your voice messages and call recordings in the TeleVantage ViewPoint in the
same way that you manage e-mail messages in your e-mail program. Your new voice messages
or recordings appear in a list in your Inbox folder according to the time and the caller. You can
listen to them in any order you want, and you can easily forward them, reply to them, or save
them in other folders that you create.
For instructions on how to listen to voice messages or recordings using the telephone
commands, see Chapter 5.
The Voicemail folder
The Voicemail folder is your complete voice mailbox. It contains your Inbox and other
voicemail folders, which hold your voice messages as well as any call recordings sent to your
mailbox. New messages appear in the Inbox folder. Use the audio controls above the status bar
to play your voice messages. When you play a message, the audio bar shows elapsed message
playback time in minutes and seconds.
Voice messages have the following display attributes:
Q
Bold text indicates a new (unheard) message.
Q
FW: in the From column indicates a message that was forwarded to you.
Note: You can view the date on which a forwarded message was created by showing
the Created column in the Voicemail folder. See “Customizing columns” on page 18-22.
Q
RE: in the From column indicates a message that was sent to you in reply to another
message.
Voicemail folders
You can store your voice messages in multiple folders. Click a folder in the Folder List to view
and act on the voice messages in that folder. See “Viewing folders in the Folder List” on
page 8-21.
13-2
The Voicemail folder contains three predefined folders:
Q
The Inbox folder. New voice messages appear here. After you listen to them, they
remain here unless you move or delete them.
Q
The Saved folder. Saved messages appear here. When you save a message by using the
telephone commands, it moves to the Saved folder.
Q
The Deleted folder. When you delete a voice message in ViewPoint, it moves to the
Deleted folder. Voice messages deleted using the telephone commands do not appear in
the Deleted folder. To empty the Deleted folder, see “Emptying the Deleted folder” on
page 8-23.
Note: The Inbox and Saved folders are the only voice message folders accessible through the
telephone commands. Voice messages in other folders are not accessible using the phone.
You can create as many custom voice message folders as you want. See “Managing folders” on
page 8-22 for instructions on creating folders and moving voice messages from one folder to
another.
Viewing shared voice message folders
When other users share their voice messages with you, those messages appear in folders
identified by the users’ names. You can find those folders under in the Favorite Folders list, or
under Public in the All Folders list. If you have permission to access the voice mailbox of a call
center queue, that mailbox also appears as a folder under Public Folders. See “Viewing folders
in the Folder List” on page 8-21.
Viewing custom data
Voicemail folders contains a Custom Data column that is hidden by default. By showing it you
can view all custom data that your office might have associated with the call, for example,
customer ID or caller priority. To show columns, choose View > Current View > Show
Columns.
Archiving voice messages and call recordings
The system may be set up to periodically archive your older voice messages and call recordings.
If you find that your messages disappear from your voice mailbox, ask your system
administrator whether they have been archived. You can access archived messages using the
TeleVantage Archived Recording Browser (see Appendix E).
Managing thousands of voice messages or call recordings
If you need to manage thousands or millions of messages or call recordings, you should have
your administrator set up automatic archiving, or manually archive your messages. This eases
the performance burden on ViewPoint and the TeleVantage Server, and you can still use the
Archived Recording Browser to quickly review, search, and manage the recordings (see
Appendix E).
CHAPTER 13. MANAGING VOICE MESSAGES IN VIEWPOINT
13-3
Listening to your voice messages and call recordings __________
To listen to a voice message or call recording, double-click it in any Voicemail folder. For
instructions on using the audio controls, see “Using the audio controls” on page 8-26.
You can play the message or recording either over your computer's speakers or over your
telephone. Choose Tools > Audio Output to switch audio output from one to the other. You can
also use the button on the right side of the status bar.
If you have call announcing turned on, messages less than five (5) seconds in length are prefaced
by a recording of the caller's name.
Note: You can open other ViewPoint folders while a message is playing and the message will
continue to play. The message stops playing, however, if you open a folder with another audio
control visible, for example, the Greetings folder.
Listening to a voice message as it is being left
To listen to a voice message as the caller is leaving it, without being heard by the caller, see
“Screening a voice message as it is being left” on page 11-7.
Handling your voice messages _____________________________
You can perform the following tasks on a voice message using a few mouse clicks:
Q
Forward it to other users
Q
Reply to one or more users directly with a voice message of your own
Q
Play it as audio into a call for all parties to hear and comment upon.
Q
Return the call, if the Caller ID or contact information is available
Q
E-mail the voice message as a WAV file attachment
Q
Associate a message with a contact
Q
Add notes to an existing message
Q
Open the contact record of the contact who left the message
Q
Send a new voice message to other users
Q
Delete a voice message
Q
Mark an existing message Private, unheard, or Urgent
Q
Move a voice message to another application
Forwarding a voice message
You can forward a voice message, except if it is marked Private, to one or more users. A copy
of the message is sent directly to the voicemail of all recipients.
13-4
You can also attach a recording of your own at the beginning of the forwarded message. For
example, “Bob, this is Jim. I received this message and thought you would want to hear it.” Your
recording precedes the forwarded message.
To forward a voice message
1.
In any Voicemail folder, right-click a voice message that you want to forward and
select Forward on the shortcut menu. The Forward Message dialog box opens.
2.
In the Available Users list, select the users to whom you want to forward the message.
To select multiple users, press CTRL while you select users.
3.
Click Add to move the selected users to the Recipients list.
4.
Optionally, record a short message that introduces the message you are forwarding.
Use the audio controls (for detailed instructions, see “Using the audio controls” on
page 8-26).
5.
Click Send. A copy of the selected voice message, preceded by your short
introductory message, is forwarded to the users in the Recipients list. When recipients
select the message, they can view (in the To field) a list of other users who received
the same message. Users can reply to the sender or to all recipients.
Replying to a voice message
Replying to a voice message lets you send a recorded reply directly to the voicemail of the user
who sent you the message. You can send the reply to other users as well. Select the message and
choose Actions > Reply. Then perform steps 3-5 of “To forward a voice message” in the
previous section.
You can reply in this way only to a message left by another TeleVantage user. You cannot send
a message in reply to a message left by an external caller.
Note: Replying to a message sends a new message to another user's voicemail. To call back
the person who left you the voice message, choose Actions > Place Call instead (see the next
section).
To reply to all recipients of a message
1.
Select the message.
2.
Click Actions > Reply to all.
The recipients are listed in the Recipients pane of the Reply to Message dialog box.
CHAPTER 13. MANAGING VOICE MESSAGES IN VIEWPOINT
13-5
Calling back the person who left a voice message
You can call back the person who left you a voice message by using the TeleVantage Place Call
or the Speed Dial command. Place Call lets you choose the number to call if several numbers
are available. Speed Dial returns the call to the default number.
To call a person back
1.
Select the voice message left by the person you want to call back.
2.
On the Actions menu, choose Place Call or Speed Dial.
Note: On messages from unidentified callers, TeleVantage places a call to the phone number
from which the message originated. If the message was left by someone calling from an office
(PBX) extension, you might not be able to connect to the correct party.
E-mailing a voice message
You can e-mail a voice message as a WAV file attachment to someone who is outside the
TeleVantage system.
To e-mail a voice message, you must have an e-mail reader that supports MAPI installed on your
computer, such as Microsoft Outlook or Eudora Pro.
To e-mail a voice message
1.
Select the message you want to send by e-mail.
2.
Choose File > Send To Mail Recipient. Your MAPI mail ViewPoint Send dialog box
opens with the message attached.
3.
Address and send the e-mail as you normally would.
Playing a voice message into a call
To play a voice message into a call, select the voice message and choose Actions > Play into
call. You can select either Current call or Other call, in which case you can choose which of
your calls hears the greeting.
For more information about playing audio into calls, see “Playing recorded audio into a call” on
page 11-13.
Opening the contact record from a voice message
If a voice message was left by an identified contact (see Chapter 16), you can open the contact
record to view or change information about the contact. To do so, choose Actions > Open
Contact.
13-6
Deleting voice messages
By default, messages in the Deleted folder that are older than three days are permanently
removed from TeleVantage. For information about how to change the default, see “To empty
the Deleted folder automatically” on page 8-23.
To move a voice message to the Deleted folder
1.
Select the message.
2.
Choose Edit > Delete. The message is moved to the Deleted folder. You can still play
it or retrieve it if necessary.
Deleting a message permanently
To delete a message permanently, select the message and press SHIFT+DELETE. A message is
also deleted permanently when you delete it from the Deleted folder or empty the Deleted folder.
See “Managing the Deleted folder” on page 8-23.
Microsoft Exchange Server synchronization
If your office uses Microsoft Exchange Server for e-mail, TeleVantage can synchronize the
Inbox and Deleted folders with those in your e-mail program. When synchronized, messages
that you delete in one application are deleted in the other application.
For example, if you delete a voice message notification e-mail in your e-mail program,
TeleVantage moves that voice message to its own Deleted folder. Similarly, if you delete the
matching voice message in TeleVantage, your e-mail notification moves to your e-mail
program’s Deleted folder.
For more information, see your TeleVantage system administrator.
Associating a voice message from “Unknown” with a contact
A voice message that appears from “Unknown,” means that TeleVantage could not identify the
caller as a TeleVantage contact or user (Caller ID, if present, is still shown in the Number
column). You can associate the message with a contact, so that the correct name appears in the
Call Monitor and so that TeleVantage identifies the contact on subsequent calls from that phone.
See “Associating a call or Caller ID number with a contact” on page 16-9 for complete
instructions.
Marking a voice message Unheard
To mark an old (heard) voice message as new (unheard), select the message and then choose
Actions > Mark As Unheard.
CHAPTER 13. MANAGING VOICE MESSAGES IN VIEWPOINT
13-7
Marking a voice message Urgent or Private
You can mark a voice message Urgent, Private, or both. Private messages cannot be forwarded,
and users who share your mailbox cannot play them, reply to them, or call back the sender.
The icons in the columns to the right of the envelope icon show whether a message is Urgent
or Private
.
Q
To mark a voice message Urgent, select the message and choose Actions > Urgent.
Select the command again to remove its Urgent status.
Q
To mark a voice message Private, select the message and choose Actions > Mark As
Private. After a message is marked Private, it cannot be made not Private again.
Adding notes to a voice message
To add written notes to a voice message, click the message and type your notes in the Notes Pane
at the bottom of the Voicemail folder.
Any notes that you create for a message accompany that message if it is forwarded to other users.
Hiding and showing notes
To hide or display the Notes Pane, choose View > Notes Pane. To hide the Notes column, see
“Showing and hiding columns” on page 18-22.
Moving a voice message to another application
You can drag-and-drop a voice message from ViewPoint to another Windows application. See
“Dragging and dropping voice messages to other applications” on page 8-21.
Managing call recordings __________________________________
The following types of call recordings can appear in your Inbox:
Q
Recordings that you made yourself using the Call Monitor (see “Recording a call” on
page 11-12).
Q
Recordings made automatically by the system. Usually such recordings are sent to the
voice mailbox of a system administrator or call center queue supervisor. If you are
receiving such recordings in error, speak to your system administrator.
You can listen to a call recording by double-clicking it, just as you listen to a voice message.
Any command you can use on a voice message you can also use on a call recording.
For automatic call recordings made by the system only, you can choose Actions > Open Call
Log Details to open the Call Log Details dialog box and view details about the recorded call.
See “Viewing call details” on page 14-5. This command is not available for call recordings you
made yourself, or call center queue call recordings.
13-8
Sharing your voice messages ______________________________
You can share your voice message folders with other TeleVantage users, including your Inbox
folder, your Deleted folder, and your Saved folder. You can also share any custom folders that
you create. See “Sharing folders” on page 8-24
Managing your voicemail quota_____________________________
Your voice mailbox has a limited amount of disk space (in minutes) to store your voice
messages. To see the size of your mailbox, choose Tools > Options, and click the Voice
Messages \ Usage tab. The TeleVantage default is 20 minutes.
All voice files in all your folders count against your total mailbox space, including messages in
the Deleted folder and call recordings. When your mailbox is full, callers cannot leave you
voicemail. They hear a message telling them that your mailbox is full.
If you log on to TeleVantage by using the telephone commands and your mailbox is nearly full,
TeleVantage prompts you to empty your Deleted folder.
To view the amount of space remaining in your mailbox
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
Click the Voice Messages \ Usage tab. The Usage progress bar indicates how close
your voice mailbox is to being full.
Note: When your mailbox is nearly full, you see a warning message when you start ViewPoint
and hear a message when you log on using the telephone.
Setting a maximum length for your voice messages
You can set a maximum length for voice messages. If a message exceeds the time limit,
TeleVantage ends the message. The default maximum is 180 seconds (three minutes). The
highest maximum you can set is 300 seconds (5 minutes), unless your administrator changes the
limit.
Note: Call recordings are not limited by message length, only by the size of your mailbox.
To set the maximum length for voice messages
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
Click the Voice Messages tab.
3.
In the Maximum message length field, enter a number of seconds.
4.
Click OK.
CHAPTER 13. MANAGING VOICE MESSAGES IN VIEWPOINT
13-9
Sending a message directly to a user’s voicemail ______________
You can record a message and send it directly to the voicemail of one or more TeleVantage
users.
1.
Choose File > New > Voice Message. The New Message window opens.
2.
Click the recipients who you want receive the message in the Available Users list.
Hold down the CTRL key as you click to select multiple users. If you select a
workgroup or a queue, the message is sent to every user within the workgroup or
queue.
3.
Click Add to move the selected users to the Recipients list.
4.
Use the audio controls to record the message. For instructions, see “Using the audio
controls” on page 8-26.
5.
Select any of the following options:
Q
Private. The voice message is marked Private and cannot be shared by the
recipients.
Q
13-10
Urgent. The voice message is marked Urgent.
6.
In Notes, type any notes that you want to accompany the message. The notes appear
in the Notes column of the recipients’ Voicemail folders.
7.
Click Send to send the message.
Knowing when you have new messages _____________________
New voice messages appear in the Inbox folder soon after they are left. TeleVantage indicates
new voice messages in the following ways:
Q
System tray button
Q
Number in navigation pane
Q
Stutter dial tone
Q
Message-waiting light (if supported by your phone)
Q
New message sound
Q
E-mail, pager, and call notifications
System tray button
If ViewPoint is running, the following button appears in the system tray at the lower right corner
of your Windows taskbar when you have unheard messages:
Hold the mouse pointer over the button to see the number of new (unheard) voice messages.
Double-click the button to bring ViewPoint to the front of your Windows desktop.
Number in navigation pane
ViewPoint’s navigation pane displays the number of new messages
in two places: next to Voice Mail in the navigation bar, and next to
the specific folder in the Voicemail Favorite Folders list.
CHAPTER 13. MANAGING VOICE MESSAGES IN VIEWPOINT
13-11
Stutter dial tone
A dial tone that begins with a stutter indicates that you have unheard voice messages.
To enable or disable stutter dial tone
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
Click the Phone \ Station Features tab.
3.
Select or clear Stutter tone.
4.
Click OK.
Message waiting light
If your phone has a message waiting light that TeleVantage supports, you can have it flash to
indicate new voice messages. For analog phones supporting CLASS message waiting lights, you
must enable the phone’s message waiting light to make it work (see “Enabling a message
waiting light” on page 18-20).
Note: If more than one user is assigned to a phone, the message waiting light and stutter dial
tone occur if there are new messages for any of the users.
New message sound
ViewPoint can play a WAV file whenever a new voice message is received. See “Playing a
sound when a new message arrives” on page 18-20.
E-mail, pager, and call notifications
TeleVantage can alert you by e-mail, page, or telephone call whenever you receive a new voice
message. This feature is handy if you are working at a remote location without ViewPoint. You
can then call your office or log on to ViewPoint Web Access and hear your messages.
You can receive notification for all voice messages, or for urgent messages only. You can also
receive notifications only on specific days or at specific times. See “Scheduling notifications”
on page 13-15.
Important: For e-mail notification to work properly, the TeleVantage Server must be configured
correctly. See your TeleVantage system administrator if you encounter any problems.
Notification is sent only for new voice messages, not new call recordings.
Setting up e-mail notification
E-mail notification messages include the caller's name (if available), the phone number at which
the call originated, the extension at which the message was left, the message length, and any
notes associated with the message. You can even have TeleVantage attach the voice message
itself to the e-mail as an audio file so that you can play it wherever you are.
13-12
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
Click the Voice Messages \ E-Mail Notification tab.
3.
Select one of the following notification options on the dropdown list:
Q
Do not send e-mail notifications. You do not receive e-mail notification of new
voice messages.
Q
Send e-mail for all messages. You receive an e-mail notification whenever you
receive a new voice message.
Q
Send e-mail for Urgent messages only. You receive an e-mail notification
whenever you receive a voice message marked Urgent.
4.
In the E-mail address(es) field, type one or more e-mail addresses to which you want
TeleVantage to send notifications. Separate addresses by semicolons.
5.
To instruct TeleVantage whether to attach the voice message to the e-mail as a WAV
file, select one of the following options on the dropdown list:
Q
Do not attach voice message. Messages are not attached to the e-mail.
Q
Attach voice message. Messages are attached to the e-mail and also appear in the
Inbox folder marked as new (unheard).
Q
Attach voice message and mark as heard. Messages are attached to the e-mail
and appear in the Inbox folder marked as old (heard).
Q
Attach voice message and delete from Inbox. Messages are attached to the e-mail
and are moved to the Deleted folder.
Note: Your TeleVantage system can be synchronized with Microsoft Exchange so that
changes you make to messages in one Inbox folder are reflected in the other. See
“Microsoft Exchange Server synchronization” on page 13-7 for more information.
6.
Click OK.
Setting up pager notification
You can set pager notifications to include the Caller ID of the voice message, the TeleVantage
extension that the caller dialed, and the length of the voice message.
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
Click the Voice Messages \ Pager Notification tab.
3.
Select one of the following notification options on the dropdown list:
Q
Do not send pager notifications. You do not receive pager notification of new
voice messages.
Q
Send a page for all messages. You receive a page whenever you receive a new
voice message.
Q
Send a page for Urgent messages only. You receive a page whenever you receive
a voice message marked Urgent.
CHAPTER 13. MANAGING VOICE MESSAGES IN VIEWPOINT
13-13
4.
In the Page using field, select the dialing service that you want TeleVantage to use to
dial your pager. For more information about dialing services, see “Using dialing
services” on page 12-8.
5.
In the Dial Sequence field, enter the dial string for your pager, including the phone
number of the paging service and your pager's PIN, if required. The dial string can
contain any touch tone digit (0-9, *, #). You can enter commas to indicate 2-second
pauses in the dial sequence.
You can also use the following special characters to add information to the page:
Q
I or i sends the Caller ID number (for an external call) or TeleVantage extension
(for an internal call).
Q
E or e sends the TeleVantage extension that the caller dialed.
Q
L or l sends the length of the voice message in seconds.
Example: The dial sequence 18007771000,,,1245983#E causes TeleVantage to dial
your paging service, pause for 6 seconds, enter your pager’s PIN (1245983) followed
by # to indicate end-of-PIN, enter your extension (the extension at which the voice
message was left), and then hang up. Your pager would display only the extension, 103
for example.
6.
Click OK.
Notes
Q
If you receive only the last portion of the pager data that you specify, you may not have
placed enough pauses between the pager number to be dialed and the information to
send. If this problem occurs, add more commas to the Dial Sequence field.
Q
Do not enter multiple stars (*) in a row in the pager string. Use only one star to send a
dash. Multiple consecutive stars can terminate the page message.
Setting up call notifications
TeleVantage places notification calls to the number of your choice. The call says, “<the queue’s
voice title> has a new voice message from <caller’s voice title if available>. Press # to hear your
message.” By pressing #, you can log onto the queue’s account and hear the new message, and
even press 4 3 to call the person back.
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
Click the Voice Messages \ Call Notification tab.
3.
Select one of the following notification options from the dropdown list:
Q
Do not place call notifications. Calls are not placed when the queue receives new
voice messages.
Q
Place call for all messages. A call is placed whenever the queue receives a new
voice message.
Q
Place call for urgent messages only. A call is placed whenever the queue receives
a voice message marked urgent.
13-14
4.
Click
5.
From the Call Using dropdown list, select the access code and dialing service to use
when placing notification calls.
6.
Click Contacts or My Numbers, then select the number to call.
7.
Click OK.
in the Number field to open the Notify Me via Call dialog box.
Note: You can enter or change the phone number to which notification calls are sent using the
telephone commands. log on and press 6 4. By logging on from a remote phone, you can have
call notifications sent to wherever you are.
Scheduling notifications
If you do not want to receive notifications 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, you can schedule
notifications to occur at specific times only. For example, you can have TeleVantage send
notifications only during business hours or after business hours on work days. You can also set
up custom hours. You can create different schedules for e-mail, pager, and call notification.
Important: Notifications are never queued for later delivery. When you use a schedule, voice
messages that arrive during an unscheduled time do not produce notifications at all.
Schedule entries
Your schedule is composed of individual schedule entries that TeleVantage uses in
combination. For example, if you want to be notified of new voice messages during business
hours and all day on holidays, you can add one schedule entry for “during business hours” and
another schedule entry for “on holidays.” You can define your own custom schedule entries for
even greater precision.
CHAPTER 13. MANAGING VOICE MESSAGES IN VIEWPOINT
13-15
Each schedule entry can be enabled or disabled, which gives your notification schedule
adaptability and flexibility. For example, if you do not want to be paged during the current
holiday, you can disable the schedule entry for “on holidays.” When you return after the holiday
you can enable it again.
The following procedure illustrates how you would create a schedule that sends e-mail
notifications for new voice messages during business hours (one schedule entry) and on
holidays (a second schedule entry). Both schedule entries are enabled.
To define a schedule for notifications
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
Click the Voice Messages \ Notification tab for the type of notification for which you
want to create a schedule.
3.
Click Schedule.
4.
The Schedule (E-mail, Pager, or Call) Notifications dialog box opens and displays any
schedule entries that have been defined so far.
5.
Select one of the following:
Q
Always send a notification. The schedule (if any has been set up) is ignored, and
you receive notification of new voice messages at all times.
Q
Only send a notification during the following times. You receive notification
only during the times specified in your schedule.
13-16
6.
To add a schedule entry, click Add. The Schedule Notification dialog box opens.
7.
To specify which set of business hours to use for scheduling, click Business Hours.
Your office may have set up multiple sets of business hours, for example, one set for
the sales department and another for support. In the Business Hours dialog box under
Name, select the business hours during which you want to schedule notifications, and
then click OK.
Note: If your office has no business hours set that matches your notification needs,
you can ask your TeleVantage system administrator to create a new set for you or you
can define custom hours for your schedule (see the next step).
8.
Under This scheduled entry occurs, choose a time during which you want to be
notified of new voice messages. For purposes of illustration, the business hours are
assumed to be Monday through Friday, 9:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m.:
Q
During business hours. Notifications are sent Monday through Friday, 9:00 a.m.
to 5:00 p.m.
Q
Q
During nonbusiness hours. Notifications are sent at all times other than business
hours, including early mornings, evenings, weekends, and holidays. In this
example, notifications are sent Monday through Friday, 5:01 p.m. to 8:59 a.m., and
all day on Saturdays, Sundays, and holidays.
After business hours on work days. Notifications are sent Monday through
Friday, 5:01 p.m. to 8:59 a.m.
Q
On nonwork days. Notifications are sent all day on Saturdays and Sundays.
Q
On holidays. Notifications are sent all day on holidays.
Q
During custom hours. Notifications are sent only during the days and hours you
define, independent of your office’s business hours and holiday hours. Click the
Custom Hours button to specify days and times. The Custom Hours dialog box
opens.
On the Hours tab, enter the days and times.
Note: You can enter multiple time ranges separated by commas, for example, “9:00
AM - 12:00 PM, 3:00 PM - 6:00 PM.”
CHAPTER 13. MANAGING VOICE MESSAGES IN VIEWPOINT
13-17
On the Holidays tab of the Custom Hours dialog box, click Add to specify
individual calendar dates. When your custom hours are finished, click OK.
9.
To receive notifications during the times you have chosen, make sure Enable this
schedule action is checked in the Schedule Notification dialog box, and then click
OK. You return to the Schedule E-mail (or Pager) Notification dialog box.
10. To add more schedule entries, repeat this procedure. When your schedule is finished,
click OK.
Managing greetings_______________________________________
Greetings are recorded messages that callers hear when they reach your voicemail. For example,
“This is Steve. I’m not at my desk at the moment, but leave me a message and I’ll get back to
you soon.”
With TeleVantage you can record and store multiple greetings and specify when you want
TeleVantage to use each one. For example, you can have a normal greeting for everyday use,
another greeting for extended absences, and a third greeting for vacations. You can also create
and use custom greetings for individual callers (see Chapter 17).
Greetings for situations other than voicemail
You can record greetings for other circumstances than voicemail, including the following:
Q
For use as “Hello” messages. You can record greetings to be messages that you use to
greet your callers when you answer the phone. For example, “Hello, thank you for
calling the XYZ corporation, this is Amy, how may I direct your call?” See “Playing
recorded audio into a call” on page 11-13.
Q
For other routing list final actions. The final action of a custom routing list can handle
calls in other ways than sending them to voicemail, and you can attach a greeting that
tells the caller what will happen. For example, if your routing list has a final action of
“Transfer to extension,” you could attach a greeting that says, “I’m not in right now.
Please wait while your call is transferred to the company operator.” See “Using greetings
with routing list final actions” on page 15-15.
Q
For grab-and-hold. Your TeleVantage account includes a special greeting called a
grab-and-hold greeting that TeleVantage plays to callers when you put incoming calls
on hold without talking to the callers first. For more information about recording and
using a grab-and-hold greeting, see “Grabbing and holding the call” on page 11-8.
Space for greetings
You have a limited amount of disk space for greeting and voice title recordings. See your
TeleVantage system administrator to find out how much space has been allocated to you and
how much you have used.
13-18
Greetings and personal status
Your greeting settings may be overridden if you apply a personal status with different greeting
preferences, or if you change your active settings directly. However, neither of these actions
changes the settings in the Greetings folder. For more information about personal status and the
active settings, see Chapter 9.
The Greetings folder
The Greetings folder lets you view and manage your greetings. To open the Greetings folder,
click Configuration in the navigation bar, then click Greetings in the Favorite Folders list.
The Greetings folder contains three sections:
Q
The Greetings list. Your existing greetings appear here.
Q
The Notes Pane. This pane displays the contents of the greeting. To hide or show the
Notes Pane, choose View > Notes Pane.
Q
The audio controls. Use these controls to record a new greeting, import a greeting from
disk, or rerecord a selected greeting. See “Using the audio controls” on page 8-26.
The active greeting
The active greeting is the greeting that TeleVantage plays by default when callers reach your
voicemail. Only one greeting at a time can be the active greeting.
Note: Callers can hear a greeting other than your active greeting if you specify another greeting
in a personal status, call rule, or routing list. See “Greeting hierarchy” on page 13-20.
The active greeting appears in bold text and is marked by
. To designate a greeting as the
active greeting, select it and choose Actions > Set as Default and Active. This command also
makes the greeting the personal status default greeting (see the next section).
To make the greeting your active greeting without making it the personal status default greeting,
double-click the greeting to edit it and check Active greeting for this extension.
CHAPTER 13. MANAGING VOICE MESSAGES IN VIEWPOINT
13-19
The personal status default greeting
The personal status default greeting is the greeting that is used whenever you select a personal
status whose Greeting property is set to Default. For more information, see “Personal status
defaults” on page 9-12.
The personal status default greeting is marked by
. To make a greeting the greeting that you
want to be your personal status default, select the greeting and choose Actions > Set as Default
and Active. This command also makes the greeting the active greeting.
To make the greeting your personal status default greeting without making it the active greeting,
double-click the greeting to edit it and check Default personal status greeting.
Note: When you make a greeting active using the telephone commands, it also becomes the
personal status default greeting.
Greeting hierarchy
A routing list, a call rule, your current personal status, and your active greeting can all specify a
different greeting to play when the caller reaches the final action of your routing list (usually the
final action is your voicemail). In cases of conflict, TeleVantage uses the following rules:
Q
If the routing list being followed specifies a greeting, that greeting plays, overriding all
other settings.
Q
If the routing list does not specify a greeting, then TeleVantage uses the standard
hierarchy for active settings. See “Active settings hierarchy” on page 9-12.
Recording a new greeting
1.
Choose File > New > Greeting. The Greeting dialog box opens.
2.
Enter a Name for the greeting.
3.
In the Contents field, enter a description of the greeting. This description can be the
text of the statements used in the greeting.
4.
Record the greeting by using the audio controls. See “Using the audio controls” on
page 8-26.
5.
Click OK.
To rerecord or edit an existing greeting, double-click the greeting in the Greetings folder and
edit the greeting by using the audio controls.
E-mailing a greeting
You can e-mail a greeting as a WAV file attachment.
13-20
1.
Select the greeting that you want to e-mail.
2.
Choose File > Send To Mail Recipient. Your e-mail application’s Send dialog box
opens with the greeting attached.
3.
Address and send the e-mail as you normally would.
Playing a greeting into a call
To play a greeting into a call, select the greeting in the Greetings folder and choose Actions >
Play into call. You can select either Current call or Other call, in which case you can choose
which of your calls hears the greeting.
For more information about playing audio into calls, see “Playing recorded audio into a call” on
page 11-13.
CHAPTER 13. MANAGING VOICE MESSAGES IN VIEWPOINT
13-21
CHAPTER 14
CHAPTER 14
USING THE CALL LOG FOLDER
CHAPTER CONTENTS
The Call Log folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Viewing a call’s history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
Taking notes on a Call Log entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
Associating a call from “Unknown” with a contact. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
Returning a call in the Call Log folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
Entering an account code for a Call Log entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Opening the contact record from a contact’s call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Listening to a recorded call from the Call Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Sharing the Call Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Reporting on the Call Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Exporting the Call Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
The Call Log folder________________________________________
The Call Log folder contains a record of all incoming and outgoing phone calls associated with
your extension. Internal calls (calls between TeleVantage users) may or may not be logged,
depending on how your TeleVantage system administrator set up the system.
To open the Call Log folder, click its entry in the navigation bar. The Favorite Folders list for
the Call Log shows all other Call Logs that have been shared to you, for example a call center
queue’s Call Log or another user's Call Log.
Call Log folder filters
The Call Log folder toolbar contains two dropdown lists that enable you to view only the calls
you want.
Use either or both of the following:
Q
Time filter. View the most recent calls according to the time frame you select.
Q
Inbound/outbound filter. View only inbound calls, only outbound calls, or both.
Call Log folder columns
The following table shows the columns that are available in the Call Log folder. Many of these
columns are hidden by default. You can view more information for a call in either of the
following ways:
14-2
Q
Double-click a call to view it in the Call Details dialog box, in which more columns are
displayed. See “Viewing call details” on page 14-5.
Q
Add more columns to the Call Log folder itself. See “Customizing columns” on
page 18-22.
Column
Description
Indicates incoming or outgoing calls, respectively.
Called Direction in the Show Columns dialog box.
Account Code
Account code associated with the call, if any.
Answered By
Name of the user who answered an incoming call.
Useful for analyzing data for ACD workgroups.
Note that on unanswered calls, this field shows the
name of the user who was dialed.
Callback number The callback phone number entered by the caller, if
one is available.
Called Number
On incoming calls, your Direct Inward Dial (DID)
number if the caller used it to call you. The field is
blank for incoming calls without DID. On outgoing
calls, the number you dialed.
Custom Data
Custom data, if any, associated with the call.
Custom data can be collected by IVR Plug-ins, auto
attendants, or call center queues.
Dial String
Digits that TeleVantage actually dialed over the
trunk, which may be different than the digits
TeleVantage displays in a contact's phone number.
For example, a dial string may contain an
international or long-distance access code, a
dialing prefix, or a dialing suffix.
Duration
Length of the call, beginning at the time when the
two parties are connected.
From
Name of the person who originated the call. On
incoming calls, "Unknown" appears unless the user
identified the caller as a contact. On outgoing calls,
this is the user’s name.
From Device
The station ID or TeleVantage trunk number from
which the call originated. Station IDs in the 16,000
range correspond to external stations created on
the fly.
From Number
On incoming calls, the caller's extension or external
phone number. On outgoing calls, the user's
extension.
Left Message
If checked, the caller left a voice message.
CHAPTER 14. USING THE CALL LOG FOLDER
14-3
Column
14-4
Description
Notes
Any notes associated with the call.
Number
On incoming calls, Caller ID name and number if
available. On outgoing calls, the number the user
dialed. On a call to or from another TeleVantage
user, this field contains <NA>.
Organization
Organization associated with the call, if any.
Organizations are associated with outbound calls
only, and represent the Organization to which the
calling party belongs.
Placed By
Name of the person who placed the call. On
incoming calls, “Unknown” appears unless
TeleVantage identified the caller as a contact or
user. On outgoing calls, the user’s name appears.
Recorded by
Queue
If checked, the call was automatically recorded by a
call center queue.
Recorded by
User
If checked, you recorded the call manually using
ViewPoint commands (see “Recording a call” on
page 11-12).
Result
How the caller’s wait ended. The possible
outcomes are:
Abandoned. The caller hung up before the call was
answered.
Connected. The call was answered.
To voicemail. The call was sent to voicemail.
Blind Transfer. A blind transfer sent the caller to
another party.
Supervised Transfer. A supervised transfer sent the
caller to another extension.
Unknown. TeleVantage was unable to identify the
outcome of the call.
Login. You logged in to TeleVantage at a remote
phone.
Start Time
Date and time that the call first arrived in the
TeleVantage system.
Stop Time
Date and time that the call ended.
Column
To
Description
Name of the party who received the call. On
incoming calls, this is the user’s name. On outgoing
calls, “Unknown” appears unless the user identified
the person as a contact.
“& others” in this column indicates a call with more
than two parties, for example, a conference call or
a call that was transferred. Double-click the call to
see all the parties in the Call Details dialog box.
To Device
On incoming calls, the user’s station ID. (Station
IDs in the 16,000 range correspond to external
stations created on the fly.) On outbound calls, the
trunk used for the call. If an incoming call was
transferred, this column shows the last station that
took the call.
To Number
On inbound calls, the extension or DID number that
the caller dialed. On outbound calls, the number
you dialed.
Wait Time
On incoming calls, the length of time from when the
caller selected the user's extension to when the
user picked up. On outgoing calls, Wait Time is
always 00:00. This column is used primarily in call
centers to keep track of the time callers spent
waiting for an agent.
Call ID
The TeleVantage ID number of the call, mostly for
use by system administrators. The call ID number
also appears in queue logs to identify the call.
Viewing call details
You can view more information about your calls by double-clicking a call in the Call Log folder.
The Call Details dialog box opens.
The Call Details dialog box displays a separate line for each party in the call.
CHAPTER 14. USING THE CALL LOG FOLDER
14-5
Note: The Call Details dialog box shows current information about the parties in the call, while
the Call Log folder shows the information as it was at the time of the call. Therefore the two can
sometimes be different, for example, if the call was from a contact and you changed the contact’s
name since the time of the call.
Call Details columns
The Call Details dialog box contains following columns.
Column
Description
Indicates the incoming and outgoing components
of the call, respectively.
Name
Name of the parties in the call. On incoming calls,
“Unknown” appears unless the user identified the
caller as a contact. On outgoing calls, the user’s
name appears.
Start Time
Date and time that each party began participating
in the call.
End Time
Date and time that each party left the call.
Answered Time
Date and time that the call was answered.
Answered By
Name of the users for whom this was an incoming
call. Useful for analyzing data for ACD workgroups.
Account Code
Account code associated with the call, if any. See
“Entering an account code for a call” on page 4-11.
Number
On incoming lines, Caller ID name and number, if
available. On outgoing lines, the number dialed. On
a call to or from another TeleVantage user, this field
contains <NA>.
Number Type
The type of number displayed in the Number
column. Types are:
Phone
External phone number
Internet
Internet or IP network address
Extension
Internal extension
Custom
Centrex extension
Access Code
14-6
On outgoing calls and incoming calls over an IP
gateway, the access code of the dialing service
used to place the call.
Column
Description
DID
On incoming lines, your Direct Inward Dial number
if the caller used it to call you. DID is not applicable
for outgoing lines.
Device
On incoming lines, the trunk or station number at
which the call was placed. On outgoing lines, your
station number.
Dial String
Digits that TeleVantage actually dialed over the
trunk, which can be different than the digits
TeleVantage displays in a contact's phone number.
For example, a dial string can contain an
international or long-distance access code,
least-cost routing information, or dialing prefix or
suffix.
Left Message
A check in this field indicates that the caller left a
voice message.
Result
How the call ended. For a list of possible results,
see Result in the previous table, on page 14-4.
Custom Data
Custom data, if any, associated with the call.
Custom data can be collected by IVR Plug-ins or
call center queues that prompt the caller for
information.
Searching for Call Log entries
To search for one or more Call Log entries, do the following:
1.
Click Tools > Find from any view, and click the Call Log tab.
2.
Check each field that you want to search by, and enter the search term.
Click New Search to clear the fields and checkboxes.
3.
Click Find Now.
CHAPTER 14. USING THE CALL LOG FOLDER
14-7
Viewing a call’s history ____________________________________
By clicking History in the bottom pane and then selecting a call, you can view the call’s entire
history through the TeleVantage system. You can see how the call was routed to you, and where
it may have been in the system before coming to you.
Call history data older than 5 days is purged automatically to save disk space.
When you copy a Call Log entry using the Edit > Copy command, the call history is copied with
it.
Note: Call history is not available in ViewPoint Web Access.
Taking notes on a Call Log entry ____________________________
By clicking Notes in the bottom pane, you can take notes on a Call Log entry. Notes can help
identify a call in the list or summarize important information about a call.
To take notes on a Call Log entry, select the entry, click in the Notes Pane, and then type your
notes. When you are done, you can press ENTER or click your mouse anywhere. The notes you
just created appear in the Notes column for that Call Log entry.
Associating a call from “Unknown” with a contact _____________
When a Call Log entry appears from “Unknown,” it means that TeleVantage was unable to
identify the caller as a TeleVantage contact or user. You can associate the call with a contact, so
that the correct name displays and TeleVantage identifies the contact on subsequent calls from
that phone.
See “Associating a call or Caller ID number with a contact” on page 16-9 for complete
instructions.
Returning a call in the Call Log folder ________________________
1.
Select the call in the Call Log folder that you want to return.
2.
On the Actions menu, choose one of the following:
Q
14-8
Place Call. This command lets you choose the number to dial from a submenu. If
the caller is a contact, you can choose the phone number to call from the list of the
contact’s phone numbers. You can also choose to call by using the Caller ID
number of the call.
Q
Speed Dial. This command places a call immediately to a user’s extension, a
contact’s default number, or an unknown caller’s Caller ID number. You can also
choose Speed Dial by double-clicking the call.
3.
Click OK. TeleVantage dials the number.
Entering an account code for a Call Log entry_________________
You can enter an account code or change the one already entered for a call in the Call Log. You
must have permission to view and edit the Call Log to enter or change account codes.
1.
Select the call, and then choose Actions > Enter Account Code.
2.
Enter an account code. You can enter numbers, letters, or other characters.
3.
Click OK.
You can also enter an account code during a call using ViewPoint (see “Entering an account
code for a call” on page 11-16) or the telephone commands (See “Entering an account code for
a call” on page 4-11).
Opening the contact record from a contact’s call ______________
If a call was identified as being from a contact, you can open the contact’s record to view or
change information about that contact. To do so, select the call and choose Actions > Open
Contact.
Listening to a recorded call from the Call Log _________________
If a call was recorded, you can play the recording from the Call Log. To play a call recording,
you must have permission to view the voice mailbox in which the call recording resides.
To see which calls have call recordings attached to them, show the following two Call Log
columns:
Q
User Recording. Displays a check for any call with an attached recording that you
made.
Q
Queue Recording. Displays a check for any call that was recorded automatically by a
TeleVantage call center queue. If your calls are not subject to such recording, you do not
need to show this column.
To show columns, choose View > Current View > Show Columns.
CHAPTER 14. USING THE CALL LOG FOLDER
14-9
Note: The Notes pane contains a call recording note if the call was recorded automatically by a
call center queue.
To play a call recording
Select the call, then choose one of the following commands:
Q
Q
Actions > Open User Recording. Plays call recording that you made manually.
Actions > Open Queue Recording. Plays a call recording that was made automatically
by a call center queue.
Note: If a command has multiple recordings to choose from, it plays the last recording made by
the first user or queue to make recordings. For example, if you recorded two sections of a call,
the last recording would play. If a call was handled by two queues, each of which automatically
recorded it, the first recording would play.
Sharing the Call Log ______________________________________
You can share your Call Log view with other users, so that they can view it in their own
ViewPoint. See “Sharing folders” on page 8-24.
Reporting on the Call Log __________________________________
If you want to create reports based on the Call Log, you can do either of the following:
Q
Export the Call Log and analyze the data in Microsoft Excel. See “Importing and
exporting TeleVantage items” on page 8-27.
Q
Run the TeleVantage Call Center Reporter by choosing Tools > Reports. You must
have the required licenses to use the Call Center Reporter and you also must have
permission to use it. See your TeleVantage system administrator about installing and
running the Call Center Reporter.
Exporting the Call Log_____________________________________
For instructions on exporting your Call Log to a CSV file, see “Exporting the Call Log” on
page 8-32.
14-10
Advanced
TeleVantage
Features
CHAPTER 15
CHAPTER 15
CALL FORWARDING AND ROUTING
LISTS
CHAPTER CONTENTS
About call forwarding and routing lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Forwarding calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Using routing lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
About call forwarding and routing lists _______________________
TeleVantage provides two ways of receiving your calls at a phone other than your own, ensuring
that you do not miss important calls when you are away from your desk:
Q
Call forwarding. Your incoming calls ring at another phone. You can use another
extension or an external number (for example, your home phone number). Click Tools
> Call Forwarding to forward your calls to another number (see “Forwarding calls” on
page 15-3).
Q
Routing lists. Your incoming calls try a series of phone numbers until you answer at one
of them. Open the Routing Lists folder to create routing lists (see “Using routing lists”
on page 15-7).
For more information about working with TeleVantage calls and ViewPoint at a remote
location, see Chapter 6.
Call forwarding and Where I Am
When you forward your calls, you change a TeleVantage active setting called Where I Am. This
setting specifies the phone (extension or external number) that rings when you receive incoming
calls. By default, Where I Am is your TeleVantage station. You can change Where I Am in the
following ways:
Q
Forward your calls. Where I Am becomes the number to which your calls are
forwarded. See the next section, “Forwarding calls.”
Q
Select a personal status with a unique Where I Am number. Where I Am becomes the
number specified in the personal status preference. See Chapter 9.
Q
Change your active settings directly. Where I Am becomes the number you specify.
See “Personal status and your active settings” on page 9-9.
To view your current Where I Am location, choose Tools > Active Settings.
15-2
Forwarding calls _________________________________________
Call forwarding causes your calls to ring at another phone, either another extension or an
external number. Call forwarding is useful when you are working away from your desk or your
office for a period of time.
Notes
Q
Call forwarding automatically updates the default Where I Am location in all your
routing lists and personal statuses. Whenever a routing list or personal status would
normally try you at your desk, it tries you at your forwarding phone number instead. See
“Using routing lists” on page 15-7 for more information.
Q
Your call forwarding settings may be overridden if you apply a personal status with a
specific Where I Am preference or if you change your active settings directly. For more
information about personal status and the active settings, see Chapter 9.
Forwarding calls by using the telephone commands
You can also forward your calls using the telephone commands. See “Forwarding your calls
using the phone” on page 5-9.
Forwarding calls in ViewPoint
The following two procedures describe how to use call forwarding in the TeleVantage
ViewPoint.
To turn call forwarding on
1.
Choose Tools > Call Forwarding. The Call Forwarding dialog box opens.
2.
Check Forward Calls (change “Where I Am”).
CHAPTER 15. CALL FORWARDING AND ROUTING LISTS
15-3
3.
Enter or select the number to dial in one of the following ways:
Q
Enter the number to which calls are forwarded in the Name/Number or
Name/Extension field. You can also type the name of a contact or user.
Q
Click Extensions and select an extension on the list. You can also select a queue,
auto attendant, IVR Plug-in, or workgroup.
Q
Click Contacts and select a contact on the list. The contact’s default phone number
appears in the dropdown list below the main list. If the contact has more than one
phone number associated with it, you can select a different number on the
dropdown list.
To create a new contact, click
to open a new Contact dialog box. To edit the
currently selected contact, press ALT and click
. See “Entering a new contact”
on page 16-4 for more information.
Q
Click My Numbers. To forward your calls to one of your own phone numbers, such
as your home or mobile phone, select it on the list. To forward your calls to another
number, type the number in the Number field. For instructions on entering numbers
in your My Numbers list, see “Entering My Numbers” on page 12-4.
Note: When you forward calls to a mobile phone, make sure that you check Prompt
recipient to accept or decline call on the Options tab. See “Mobile phone issues with
routing lists” on page 15-8.
4.
To enter an account code that will automatically be associated with all calls forwarded
to this number, type a vertical bar character (|) after the number, followed by the
account code.
At this point most users can click OK to complete call forwarding. The following steps
are for advanced TeleVantage users.
5.
If you want to transfer calls using Centrex service or a remote PBX, check Attempt
Centrex/PBX Transfer. See “Forwarding calls over Centrex or PBX trunks” on
page 15-6 for an explanation.
6.
To set other call forwarding options, click the Call Me at Another Location tab.
You can set any of the following options:
Q
Wait for answer. Enter the length of time in seconds that you want a call to ring the
forwarding number before proceeding to the next action on your routing list
(usually your voicemail). If you are using the option Prompt recipient for
password or Prompt recipient to accept or decline call (described later in this
15-4
step), you should enter at least 30 seconds. If you enter less time, the call might be
sent to your voicemail before you finish listening and responding to the prompts.
Q
Prompt recipient for password. If checked, the person who picks up the phone
hears, “Call for <your voice title>. Please connect me.” To be connected to the
caller, you must enter your TeleVantage password. Entering a password ensures
that only you can receive your forwarded calls.
This option works only when calls are forwarded to an external number and when
you have a voice title for yourself recorded. If you have not recorded a voice title,
TeleVantage ignores your selection of this option. See “Recording your voice title”
on page 2-2.
Q
Prompt recipient to accept or decline call. If checked, when you pick up the
phone at an external number, TeleVantage announces the caller (“Call from”) and
intended recipient (“Call for”) and asks you to accept or decline the call. Declined
calls proceed to the next action in your routing list, usually your voicemail.
The call announcing prompt loops, so you might not hear it from the beginning
when you pick up the phone. Press any key on your phone other than 1 or 2 to start
the prompt at the beginning.
This option is used only when forwarding calls to an external number. When
forwarding to an internal extension, your normal call announcing settings are used.
See “Customizing or turning off call announcing” on page 18-6.
Q
Ignore call rules and use Standard routing list. Check to send all your incoming
calls to the specified number, regardless of any call rules or routing lists that you
have created that might otherwise send a call to a different number. If you have not
created custom call rules or routing lists, you do not need to check this box.
This setting disables your call rules and uses the Standard routing list for all calls.
See “Using routing lists” on page 15-7 for an explanation of routing lists and
Chapter 17 for an explanation of call rules.
7.
Click OK.
To turn call forwarding off in ViewPoint
1.
Choose Tools > Call Forwarding. The Call Forwarding dialog box opens.
2.
Uncheck Forward Calls.
3.
Click OK.
Note: When your calls are forwarded,
appears in the status bar. You can double-click
this button to open the Call Forwarding dialog box.
CHAPTER 15. CALL FORWARDING AND ROUTING LISTS
15-5
Receiving forwarded ACD workgroup calls
If you receive calls as part of an ACD workgroup, and you have forwarded those calls to another
number, the ACD workgroup user’s settings override your call forwarding settings. For
example, you might have unchecked Prompt recipient to accept or decline call, but you might
nevertheless get prompted to accept or decline the call when you receive an ACD workgroup
call.
Placing calls at another user’s extension
To place calls as yourself from another user’s extension, log on either through ViewPoint or the
telephone commands, as described in “Placing outbound calls from shared stations” on
page 7-2.
Call forwarding and voicemail
If no one answers at your call forwarding location, the call is sent to your voicemail.
To completely send your calls to another user's phone and voicemail, so that all calls to you ring
the other user's phone and go to their voicemail, do not use call forwarding. Instead, create a
routing list whose only action is a final action of Transfer to Extension, and make this routing
list your active routing list. (See “Using routing lists” on page 15-7.)
Forwarding calls over Centrex or PBX trunks
If your company has trunk lines that are connected by Centrex lines, an external PBX, an ISDN
line with the 2B Channel Transfer feature, or a TeleVantage IP Gateway, you can use the
Centrex/PBX transfer feature to economize TeleVantage’s trunk use.
If properly configured by your administrator, this feature can transfer or forward calls to external
numbers with consuming any TeleVantage trunk lines. It works by telling the provider of the
call (the PBX or phone company) to transfer the call on TeleVantage’s behalf. Without this
feature, two trunk lines are consumed for the duration of the call (one for the incoming call, and
one for the outgoing call).
You can check Attempt Centrex/PBX transfer when you set up call forwarding or when you
add a routing list action. If this option is checked, TeleVantage attempts to signal to the call
provider to transfer the call on behalf of TeleVantage. Incoming calls on other trunks that don’t
support this feature are routed to the forwarding number in the usual way, using a second trunk.
Note: Forwarding calls with this method avoids tying up extra trunks. However, when a call is
routed out, TeleVantage loses control of it and cannot send it to subsequent actions on the user’s
routing list. For example, after transfer using Centrex or PBX, a call cannot go to voicemail.
15-6
Using routing lists________________________________________
A routing list is a series of phone numbers that TeleVantage dials when calls for you arrive. If
you do not answer at one location, TeleVantage proceeds to the next. For example, you can set
up a routing list that tries you at your desk, then at your home, and finally at your mobile phone.
A routing list also contains a final action that determines what happens if no one answers.
Usually the caller is sent to your voicemail, but you can specify other final actions. For example,
you can transfer calls to another extension, put callers on hold and try the series of numbers
again, or hang up. You can specify a different final action for when you’re on the phone vs. when
you’re away from your desk. For example, if your phone is busy you can play a voicemail
greeting such as “I'm sorry I'm on the phone, please leave a message and I'll return your call as
soon as possible.”
You can create as many routing lists as you want and make any one of them the active routing
list at any time.
Note: Call center queue calls sent to agents do not follow the agents’ routing lists. See
TeleVantage Call Center Administrator’s Guide for details.
Routing lists for individual callers
By using call rules, you can have TeleVantage use a specific routing list for a specific caller or
group of callers. For example, you can have a routing list for important customers that includes
trying your mobile phone and another routing list for everyone else that only rings your
extension. See Chapter 17 for more information.
How routing lists move from action to action
A routing list tries calling the next phone number in the series if it:
Q
Detects a busy signal
Q
Encounters the three-tone operator intercept, for example, when a number is not in
service
Q
Rings for a number of seconds that you specify
You can have TeleVantage prompt the recipient to accept or decline the call. In that case, the
routing list moves on unless someone presses 1 to accept the call. You can choose to prompt the
recipient at external phone numbers only. See “Creating a new routing list” on page 15-10 for
more information.
Important: If you are using hands-free answering, your routing list will not be used unless you
have enabled call announcing. When you are in hands-free mode, your phone is automatically
picked-up—whether you are there to hear it or not. Therefore, the pickup stops the routing list
from being processed. If you want your routing list to be processed while you are using hands-free
answering, be sure to enable call announcing (click Tools > Options and then click the
Phone \ Call Announcing tab).
CHAPTER 15. CALL FORWARDING AND ROUTING LISTS
15-7
Caller options while following a routing list
When a routing list moves to the next action, TeleVantage can alert the caller and offer the
following choices:
Q
Press 1 or stay on the line to try the next number.
Q
Press 2 to leave a voice message.
Q
Press 3 to return to the auto attendant.
Q
Press 0 to transfer to the Operator. If you have defined a personal Operator, the call is
transferred to that extension. If you have not defined a personal Operator, the call is
transferred to your office’s Operator extension.
You can specify whether TeleVantage offers these choices for each action in the routing list. See
“Creating a new routing list” on page 15-10.
Mobile phone issues with routing lists
Calls to a mobile phone are picked up by the mobile phone company first and then passed to the
individual phone. When TeleVantage detects this first pickup, it stops proceeding down the
routing list, whether or not you actually answer the mobile phone. For this reason, when you put
a mobile phone in your routing list, always check Prompt recipient to accept or decline call.
TeleVantage then relies on user input to signal a connection and will proceed down the routing
list unless you explicitly accept the call.
The Routing Lists folder
The Routing Lists folder lets you view and manage your routing lists.
The Standard routing list
The Standard routing list is the default routing list that is built into TeleVantage. It consists of
one action: trying you at your Where I Am location. (See “Call forwarding and Where I Am” on
page 15-2.) If you are busy or do not answer, the routing list sends the caller to voicemail.
15-8
You cannot edit the Standard routing list. To have calls follow a different route, you must create
a new routing list and make it the active routing list.
The active routing list
The active routing list is the routing list that all incoming calls follow. Calls can follow another
routing list if you have created call rules for them (see Chapter 17). Only one routing list at a
time can be the active routing list. The active routing list is marked by bold text and
.
You cannot delete the active routing list.
To make a routing list the active routing list
1.
Right-click the routing list that you want to make the active routing list.
2.
Choose Actions > Set as Default and Active.
This command also makes the routing list the personal status default routing list (see the next
section). To make a routing list active without making it the personal status default routing list,
edit the routing list and check Active routing list for this extension.
Note: Your active routing list may be changed if you apply a personal status with a different
routing list preference or change your active settings directly. For more information about
personal status and active settings, see Chapter 9.
The personal status default routing list
The personal status default routing list is the one that is used whenever you select a personal
status whose Routing List preference is set to Default. For more information, see “Personal
status defaults” on page 9-12.
The personal status default routing list is marked by
. To make a routing list the personal
status default, select the routing list and choose Actions > Set as Default and Active. This
command also makes the routing list the active routing list. To make a routing list the personal
status default routing list without making it active, edit the routing list and check Default
personal status routing list.
CHAPTER 15. CALL FORWARDING AND ROUTING LISTS
15-9
Creating a new routing list
1.
Choose File > New > Routing List. The Routing List dialog box opens. Under
Actions, the actions of your routing list appear in the order that they will be completed.
Each action is a phone number at which TeleVantage will try to reach you.
2.
Enter a name for the routing list in the Name field.
3.
Click Add to add a routing list action. The Routing List Action dialog box opens.
4.
In the Action field, choose one of the following actions. The other elements in the
dialog box change depending on your selection.
Q
15-10
Call me where I am. This action sends calls to your Where I Am phone, which is
your station unless you have changed it (see “Call forwarding and Where I Am” on
page 15-2). Specify the length of time the phone should ring in the Ring duration
field.
Q
Call me at another location. This action directs calls to an extension or an external
number that you specify. Click
to open the Call Me at Another Location dialog
box, which functions in the same manner as the Place Call To dialog box. For
information about using this dialog box, see “Placing a call” on page 12-2.
Specify the length of time the phone should ring in the Ring duration field.
If you choose an external number, see step 5 for further options.
Calls routed to another extension do not follow call forwarding or routing lists in
effect at that extension. To send calls to another extension so that they follow that
extension’s forwarding or routing list, use a final action of Transfer To extension.
You cannot route calls to an auto attendant or call center queue as a routing list
action, but you can do so by using a final action of Transfer To extension.
Q
Call a Workgroup. This action directs calls to one or all members of a workgroup.
Usually this action is used only by TeleVantage system administrators setting up an
ACD workgroup. For instructions, see “Routing calls to workgroups” on
page 15-14.
Specify the length of time the phone or phones should ring in the Ring duration
field.
Q
Play Greeting. This action does not ring a phone, but instead plays the caller the
greeting that you select on the Greeting dropdown list. You can also play a greeting
as part of each action and before the final action. To record a new greeting from this
dialog box, click
. See “Managing greetings” on page 13-18.
While any greeting is playing, the caller can press 0 to transfer to the Operator or 1
to leave a voice message. You might want your greeting to mention these options.
5.
If you are routing the call to an external number, you can use the following options
under When calling an external number:
Q
Prompt recipient for password. The person who answers the phone hears, “Call
for <your voice title>. Please connect me.” To be connected to the caller, you must
enter your TeleVantage password. Using this option ensures that only you can
receive your calls at the external phone number.
This option is available only if you have recorded a voice title. See “Recording your
voice title” on page 2-2 for more information.
Q
Prompt recipient to accept or decline call. TeleVantage announces the caller
(“Call from”) and the intended recipient (“Call for”), and offers the option to accept
or decline the call. Declined calls proceed to the next routing list action.
With this option checked, the call will not be connected unless someone presses 1
to accept it. For this reason, leave the field unchecked when routing to a pager.
6.
To play the caller a message before the routing list tries this action, check Prompt
caller before trying this action, and then select the message on the dropdown list.
CHAPTER 15. CALL FORWARDING AND ROUTING LISTS
15-11
You can select one of your greetings or System menu to try the next location, which
offers the caller options (see “Caller options while following a routing list” on
page 15-8). You can also click
to create a new greeting.
For example, a message might say, “The system will now try my home number to try
to find me. If you would rather transfer to the Operator, press 0.”
7.
Click OK to add this action to your routing list. The Routing List Action dialog box
closes, and the new action appears under Actions in the Routing List dialog box.
Repeat steps 3-7 to create additional actions for the routing list.
8.
When you have finished creating the routing list’s actions, move down in the Routing
List dialog box to specify the routing list’s final action. Final actions are performed on
calls that are still unanswered after trying all the actions.
Note: To specify different final actions for busy and no-answer states, see the next
section, “Handling busy station calls differently than calls not answered.”
To specify a final action, make the following choices:
Q
Play Greeting. Check to play a greeting before the final action, then choose the
greeting from the dropdown list. For information about the System hold
greeting, see the Pause and repeat final action in the following list.
Important: Under most circumstances you should select this check box and
select Active as the greeting. For information, see “Using greetings with routing
list final actions” on page 15-15.
Q
15-12
Action. Select the final action from the dropdown list. The following table
describes the possible final actions.
Final action
Description
Take a message.
The call is sent to your voicemail.
Hang up.
The call is disconnected.
Prompt to hang up.
Internal callers are disconnected.
External callers are prompted to
choose to end the call or to stay on the
line for more options. Callers who want
more options are transferred back to
your company’s auto attendant.
Final action
Description
Transfer to an extension.
The call is transferred to an extension
that you select on the Extension
dropdown list, for example, an
operator, a coworker who handles your
calls, or an auto attendant. The
transferred call is treated as a new call
to that extension. If no one answers at
that extension, the call follows that
extension's routing list.
Transfer to other
voicemail.
The call is sent directly to another
extension’s voicemail. Select an
extension from the Mailbox dropdown
list.
Pause and repeat.
The caller holds for the number of
seconds you define in the Pause
duration field, and then begins the
routing list again. During the pause,
callers can press 0 for the operator or 1
to leave a voice message. The greeting
you choose can mention these options.
The special prerecorded greeting
called the System Hold Greeting says,
“The person you are calling is
unavailable. To hold, please stay on
the line. To leave a message, press 1.”
It does not mention the option to press
0 for the operator.
Camp on station.
9.
See the next section, “Handling busy
station calls differently than calls not
answered.”
Check Active routing list for this extension if you want to make this routing list your
active routing list.
10. Check Default personal status routing list to make this routing list the default
routing list for your personal statuses. See “Personal status defaults” on page 9-12.
11. Click OK to save the routing list and close the Routing List dialog box.
CHAPTER 15. CALL FORWARDING AND ROUTING LISTS
15-13
Handling busy station calls differently than calls not answered
You can optionally specify two final actions—one for situations when your station is busy, one
for situations when each action rings and goes unanswered. This allows you to handle calls
differently when you’re on a call vs. when you’re away from your phone(s). For example, you
can have a special greeting that plays when you’re on a call, that says, “I'm on the phone right
now, please leave a message.”
To use this feature, check Handle busy calls differently than calls not answered, and use the
dropdown list to specify both a Final action if the call is not answered and a Final action if
the station is busy. Specify each using the instructions in step 8 above. If unchecked, you
specify one final action to use in both situations.
Note: TeleVantage can detect a routing list action as “busy” only when it is a TeleVantage
station. External numbers and workgroups cannot trigger the “busy” final action.
Using “Final action if the station is busy” and “Camp on station”
When you specify a Final action if the station is busy, the action you pick behaves differently
from a normal final action. As soon as the routing list encounters a busy station, the final action
triggers, skipping any subsequent actions. For example, if you have one action that tries your
office station and a second that tries your cell phone, with Final action if the station is busy
set to “Take a message,” and a call comes in while your station is busy, the call is sent to your
voicemail without trying your cell phone.
The “Camp on station” final action is available only as a Final action if your station is busy.
With “Camp on station,” your incoming calls are placed on hold until your station is no longer
busy, then they ring the station. While callers are on hold, by default they hear the special
prerecorded “System camp on greeting,” which says, “The person you have attempted to reach
is on the phone. To hold for your party, remain on the line. Otherwise, to leave a message, press
1. To end this call, press 2.” The prompt repeats every 60 seconds. While holding, the caller can
press 1 to go to your voicemail or 2 to disconnect the call. You can also specify your own custom
greeting, in which you can choose whether or not to announce the caller options.
Note: If while you are on the phone you receive an incoming call on an available line appearance
(for example, with call waiting or on a digital phone PDN), the call goes to the “Final action if the
station is busy” after the ring duration expires for your phone.
Routing calls to workgroups
A routing list action can send a call to a group of people by using the action Call a Workgroup.
The first person in the workgroup to answer the call is connected to the caller. TeleVantage
system administrators must use this option to set up ACD workgroups.
When a routing list calls a workgroup, the only numbers called are TeleVantage users’ “Where
I Am” locations (internal or external stations or call forwarding numbers) and contacts’ default
numbers. Auto attendants, queues and IVR Plug-ins in the workgroup are ignored and not called.
15-14
See “Using workgroups” on page 16-14 for instructions on creating a workgroup.
To route calls to a workgroup as an action in an existing routing list
1.
Double-click the routing list in the Routing Lists folder. The Routing List dialog box
for that routing list opens.
2.
Click Add. The Routing List Action dialog box opens.
3.
In the Action field, select Call a Workgroup.
4.
Select a Workgroup or click
5.
Under Method, choose one of the following ways to ring the workgroup’s phones:
to create a new workgroup.
Q
Sequentially from the top down. The call tries each member of the workgroup in
order until it is answered, starting with the first.
Q
Individually in a round robin. The call tries each member of the workgroup in
order until it is answered, starting with the next member in line after the one who
answered the preceding call.
Q
Simultaneously. The phones of all workgroup members ring simultaneously, and
the call goes to the first member who accepts it. Any contacts in the workgroup are
ignored.
6.
In the Ring duration field, specify the length of time each workgroup phone should
ring before the call tries the next phone in the workgroup.
7.
For any external numbers in the workgroup, you can choose Prompt recipient for
password. When calling a workgroup, Prompt recipient to accept or decline call is
automatically selected, so that ACD calls are guaranteed to be answered by agents.
8.
To play callers a message before they are routed to the workgroup, check Prompt
caller before trying this action, and select the message on the Prompt dropdown list.
9.
Click OK. You return to the Routing List dialog box, in which the new routing list
action appears in the Actions list.
10. Use the arrows next to the Actions list to reorder any actions in the routing list and
then click OK.
When routing calls to a workgroup, you also can use the Pause and repeat final action. This
action keeps callers on hold until a member of the workgroup answers the call. Calls are
answered in the order of longest hold time, or “first in, first out” (FIFO).
Using greetings with routing list final actions
For most routing lists, you should check Play greeting before the final action and select Active.
This ensures that callers who reach the routing list’s final action (for example, your voicemail)
hear a greeting. It also allows the greeting to change based on your other settings. For example,
you can use a call rule to play a different greeting when your friend Jim calls (see Chapter 17),
or have a different greeting play when you select the personal status On Vacation (see
Chapter 9).
CHAPTER 15. CALL FORWARDING AND ROUTING LISTS
15-15
If you select a specific greeting under Play greeting, that greeting overrides the active greeting
and plays to all callers who reach the final action of the routing list, even if a different greeting
is specified in a call rule or personal status.
If you clear the Play greeting checkbox, no greeting plays to callers who reach the final action
of this routing list, even if a greeting is specified in a call rule or personal status. If the final
action is Take a Message, callers who reach your voicemail hear only the beep that signals that
recording has begun.
When to use a specific greeting with a routing list
It is highly recommended that you select a specific greeting to play if your routing list’s final
action is not ‘Take a Message.” In such a case, you want to be sure that the greeting that callers
hear matches the action that is about to happen. Examples of greetings for other final actions are
the following:
Q
Hang Up. “I’m sorry you couldn’t find me. I’m not taking messages at the moment.
Good-bye.”
Q
Transfer to extension. “I’m sorry you couldn’t find me. I’m transferring you now to my
administrative assistant.”
Q
15-16
Pause and repeat. “The person you are calling is unavailable. To hold, please stay on
the line. To leave a message, press 1.” This is the text of the System Hold Greeting, a
greeting provided with TeleVantage for just this circumstance. You can also record your
own version. See “Managing greetings” on page 13-18 for instructions on recording
greetings.
CHAPTER 16
CHAPTER 16
MANAGING CONTACTS AND
WORKGROUPS
CHAPTER CONTENTS
About contact management and TeleVantage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
The Contacts folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Managing contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Teaching TeleVantage to recognize your contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
Opening contacts from within other folders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-12
Using contacts in another contact manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-13
Using workgroups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-14
About contact management and TeleVantage__________________
ViewPoint’s Contacts folder provides you with an online phone book of your telephone contacts
in which you can enter the names, phone numbers, and other information about people you talk
with frequently on the phone. After you enter contacts, you can place calls to them with a few
clicks of the mouse.
This chapter describes the Contacts folder and then explains the following aspects of working
with contacts:
Q
Managing contacts
Q
Teaching TeleVantage to recognize your contacts
Q
Using workgroups
The Contacts folder _______________________________________
To open the Contacts folder, click its icon in the navigation bar. The Favorite Folders list for the
Contacts folder shows the Public Contacts folder for your office and all other Contacts folders
that have been shared with you.
Using contacts folders
You can create folders to organize your contacts. For example, you could have a Friends folder
for personal contacts that keeps your friends separate from your other contacts. Separating
contacts into folders makes it easier to find your contacts quickly. See “Organizing items in
folders” on page 8-21.
16-2
Private and public contacts
In TeleVantage, contacts can be private or public, as follows:
Q
Private contacts are your own personal contacts. These contacts appear only in the
Contacts folder of your ViewPoint on your computer. Other users cannot see your
contacts unless you explicitly share your Contacts folder with them.
Q
Public contacts are available to all users in your office. When public contacts call your
office, TeleVantage identifies them no matter which extension or user they are calling.
Public contacts contained in the Public\Contacts folder and can also be accessed via the
Phonebook pane's Contacts tab, and by choosing Actions > Place Call. To enter or edit a public
contact, you must have public contact editing permissions. If you do not have those permissions,
you can view and place a call to public contacts, but you cannot edit them.
Viewing shared contacts
To view contacts that another user has shared with you, click that user’s name under Public
Folders in the Folder List and click the Contacts folder.
Changing double-click behavior
You can choose whether double-clicking a contact opens the contact for editing or places a call
to the contact. See “Defining double-click behavior in the Contacts folder” on page 18-22 for
more information.
Using the Index buttons for quick access
Use the Index buttons on the right side of the Contacts folder to quickly move to a letter of the
alphabet. The buttons alphabetize your contacts according to the column by which the folder is
currently sorted. Choose View > Index Buttons to hide or show them.
Searching for contacts
To search for one or more contacts, do the following:
1.
Click Tools > Find from any view, and click the Contact tab.
2.
Check each field that you want to search by, and enter the search term.
Click New Search to clear the fields and checkboxes.
3.
Click Find Now.
CHAPTER 16. MANAGING CONTACTS AND WORKGROUPS
16-3
Managing contacts________________________________________
You can manage your contacts using TeleVantage ViewPoint, or you can use another contact
manager application or customer relationship management program with TeleVantage if you
prefer. You can also import contacts from other contact managers into TeleVantage. See
“Importing contacts from other contact managers into TeleVantage” on page 16-13.
Entering a new contact
Entering a new contact involves the following tasks, which are explained in detail in the three
procedures that follow:
Q
Entering a contact's name and basic information. Other basic information includes
the contact’s company, any account code, and the language used for prompts for this
contact. You can also enter up to 5,000 characters in the Notes Pane of the Contact dialog
box.
Q
Entering a contact's phone numbers and addresses. When you enter a contact’s
phone numbers, you can specify the number used for Caller ID and the number that is
the default number to dial when you call the contact. You can also specify a contact's
e-mail and instant messaging addresses for reference.
Q
Recording a voice title for a contact. Like your own voice title, a contact’s voice title
is a short recording that you create of the contact's name. If you are using call
announcing, TeleVantage announces calls from the contact by saying “Call from,”
followed by the contact’s voice title. Contacts who do not have voice titles recorded are
prompted to say their names each time they call you, unless you have turned off that
prompt (see“Customizing or turning off call announcing” on page 18-6).
Note: You have a limited amount of space for all voice files, including voice titles.
Therefore, if you have many contacts, you can save space by recording voice titles for the
most important ones only. Ask your TeleVantage system administrator how much space
you have been allocated and how much you have used.
16-4
Entering a contact's name and basic information
1.
Choose File > New > Contact. The Contact dialog box opens to the General tab.
2.
Select which folder to create the contact in, using the Create new contact in folder
dropdown list.
If you have permission to create public contacts, you can make this contact a public
contact by choosing Contacts (Public). Public contacts can be seen and used by all
TeleVantage users. All other selections create a private contact, which only you can
see and use.
3.
Enter the appropriate information about the contact in the First Name, Last Name,
Company, and Title fields. The first and last names are displayed in the Call Monitor
folder when this contact calls you.
Either a first name or a last name is required. To create a contact that has the name of
a company only, enter the company name into one of these fields.
4.
If your office uses account codes, you can enter an Account code for the contact.
TeleVantage automatically uses the account code for the call when it identifies the
contact on an incoming call or when you dial one of the contact’s numbers on an
outgoing call.
If you are prompted to enter account codes when you place calls, you will hear a
double beep instead of a single beep to indicate you are dialing a contact who has an
account code already entered. When you hear the double beep, you can press # on your
phone to accept the contact’s existing account code, or you can enter another account
code.
For more information, see “Entering account codes when placing calls” on page 3-3.
CHAPTER 16. MANAGING CONTACTS AND WORKGROUPS
16-5
5.
In the Preferred telephone prompts dropdown list, select the language that you want
TeleVantage to use when it plays voicemail and other prompts to this contact. The
available languages are the languages that were installed on your system.
Entering a contact's phone numbers and addresses
1.
On the General tab in the Contact dialog box, double-click the appropriate line in the
Phone Numbers and addresses list. The related Address dialog box opens.
Q
For Business, home, mobile or other. Enter the phone number or Internet address
by selecting the dialing service on the Call using dropdown list and then entering
the number in the field below the list. See “Entering phone numbers using various
types of dialing service” on page 12-8 for more information.
You can enter notes about the phone number or address in the Description field.
This is a good place to enter extensions.
Check This number is the contact’s default if this is the phone number you dial
most frequently to reach the contact. The number you choose as the default is
slightly faster to select when you place calls.
Check Use this number as caller identification for this contact if you want
TeleVantage to identify calls from this number as calls from the contact. Checking
this box adds the phone number to the contact’s Incoming Caller ID list (see
“Teaching TeleVantage to recognize your contacts” on page 16-7). If this option is
unchecked, calls from this number appear in the Call Monitor and Call Log folders
as being from “Unknown.”
Q
16-6
For E-mail or IM address. Enter the e-mail or instant message address. You can
enter notes about the address in the Description field.
2.
Click OK to close the Phone Number dialog box.
3.
To enter more phone numbers or addresses for this contact, repeat steps 1-2 for the
other categories in the Phone numbers and addresses list.
4.
Click OK to close the Contact dialog box. The new contact now appears in the Contacts
folder.
Recording a voice title for a contact
1.
In the Contacts folder, select the contact for whom you want to record a voice title and
choose File > Open.
2.
In the Contact dialog box, click the Caller Identification tab.
3.
Record the voice title by using the audio controls. See “Using the audio controls” on
page 8-26 for instructions.
4.
Click OK.
Notes
Q
TeleVantage can play the voice titles of contacts over your computer speakers
automatically when those contacts call. See “Customizing incoming call behavior” on
page 18-16 for more information.
Q
TeleVantage can also capture the names of contacts in the voices of the contacts when
they respond to the call announcing prompt. TeleVantage can then use those recordings
as voice titles. See “To associate a call with a contact” on page 16-10 for more
information.
Placing calls to your contacts
You can place a call to a contact with a phone number using ViewPoint. See “Placing a call” on
page 12-2 for instructions.
Sharing your contacts
You can share any of your contacts folders with other TeleVantage users. Those users can access
your contacts folders from their Folder Lists according to access levels that you specify. You
can grant individual users specific levels of access to your contacts.
For instructions, see “Sharing folders” on page 8-24.
Teaching TeleVantage to recognize your contacts______________
TeleVantage’s more advanced features depend on TeleVantage recognizing your contacts. You
can teach TeleVantage to recognize your contacts in the following ways:
Q
By recognizing the Caller ID number or name of the contact’s phone.
Q
By recognizing a special number you give to the contact to dial after your extension,
called a Contact PIN. By using Contact PINs, TeleVantage can recognize contacts
regardless of the phone they use to call.
Note: TeleVantage automatically identifies other TeleVantage users when they call from their
stations or their public numbers (see “Entering My Numbers” on page 12-4).
CHAPTER 16. MANAGING CONTACTS AND WORKGROUPS
16-7
The benefits of having TeleVantage recognize contacts include:
Q
Their names appear in the Call Monitor while the phone is ringing to let you know who
is calling.
Q
Their names are displayed on your Caller ID phone, if you have one.
Q
Their names appear in the Call Log and Voicemail folders, so that you can easily see
contacts in your phone record and quickly call them back.
Q
You can hear your contact's name announced over your phone or PC speakers—without
forcing your callers to say their name every time they call—by saving a recorded voice
title with the contact.
Q
You can use call rules to set up individualized call handling for them, such as playing a
unique voicemail greeting or routing their calls according to a specific routing list (see
Chapter 17).
Q
You can exempt them from the Do Not Disturb personal status, so that their calls ring
your phone when others are sent directly to voicemail.
One form of identification, Caller ID from the phone company, is available automatically for
every call. The phone number and Caller ID name of the caller appear in the Number column of
the Call Monitor, the Call Log, and the Voicemail folders.
Identifying contacts by name
Each contact has a list of associated phone numbers called the Incoming Caller ID list. When a
call arrives from one of those phone numbers, TeleVantage identifies that contact.
The Incoming Caller ID list can include Caller ID names as well as phone numbers. See
“Understanding name and number on Caller ID” on page 16-11 for pointers on which item is
more useful for identifying a given contact.
To view a contact's Incoming Caller ID list, select the contact in the Contact’s folder, choose
File > Open, and then click the Caller Identification tab.
16-8
To guarantee that TeleVantage recognizes contacts, regardless of the phone number from which
they are calling, use a contact PIN. See “Using contact PINs for guaranteed recognition” on
page 16-12 for more information.
Adding phone numbers for contact recognition
You can add a phone number to a contact’s Incoming Caller ID list by doing one of the
following:
Q
Add a new phone number for the contact in the General tab and check Use phone
number as caller identification for this contact. See “Entering a new contact” on
page 16-4 for more information.
Q
Associate the phone number from a call or voice message with the contact. See
“Associating a call or Caller ID number with a contact” on page 16-9 for more
information.
Deleting a number from the Incoming Caller ID list
If TeleVantage wrongly identifies a contact as the caller, it is likely that the Incoming Caller ID
list for that contact includes an incorrect phone number. You can prevent further
misidentification by deleting the phone number from the list.
1.
Double-click the contact from whom you want to delete a phone number. The Contact
dialog box opens.
2.
Click the Caller Identification tab.
3.
In the Incoming Caller ID list, select the incorrect phone number.
4.
Click Delete and then click OK.
Associating a call or Caller ID number with a contact
If TeleVantage shows a caller’s name as “Unknown,” but you know who the caller is, you can
associate the call with one of your contacts. Doing this replaces “Unknown” with the contact’s
name.
You can also associate the Caller ID number or the name from the call with a contact. Doing this
adds the number to the contact’s Incoming Caller ID list. Future calls from that phone show that
contact as the caller. In this way you can “teach” TeleVantage to recognize the people who call
you.
CHAPTER 16. MANAGING CONTACTS AND WORKGROUPS
16-9
For example, the following illustration shows a voice message before association, showing
“Unknown” as the caller.
The next illustration shows the same message after you associate it with your contact Nathaniel
Chestnut.
You can teach TeleVantage to recognize a caller by Caller ID name instead of the phone
number. This can be useful, for example, if the contact calls from a company with a PBX that
randomly assigns phone numbers to trunks but uses a Caller ID name that remains the same.
To associate a call with a contact
1.
Click one of the following:
Q
An active call in the Call Monitor folder
Q
An entry for a call in the Call Log folder
Q
A voice message in any Voicemail folder
2.
Click
3.
Select the contact in the list with whom you want the phone number shown to be
associated. If you want to cancel an association and revert the call to its original
identification, click “<Unknown>.”
on the toolbar. The Associate dialog box opens.
Note: If a call was originally identified as being from a contact, clicking “<Unknown>”
16-10
reverts it to being identified as from that contact.
To create a new contact directly from this dialog box, click
. (See “Entering a new
contact” on page 16-4 for instructions.) When you finish creating the contact, you
return to this dialog box with the new contact added to the list.
4.
If the call came from a phone number that is new for this contact, you can add the new
number to the contact’s phone number list now. You can then dial it later from
ViewPoint. Check Save <phone number> as the following phone number, and then
select the phone number category on the dropdown list.
5.
If you are associating an active call in the Call Monitor folder, you can create a voice
title for the contact based on the recording of the caller’s name that was made by the
caller. To create a voice title in this way, check Use this voice title. You can test the
recorded name by clicking the button to the right of the field.
Note: This field is available only if there is a recorded name available to capture.
6.
If you want only to label the individual call or voice message with the contact’s name,
uncheck Use caller identification for this contact.
If you want TeleVantage to associate all subsequent calls from that phone with the
contact, check Use caller identification for this contact and select one of the
following:
Q
Number. TeleVantage uses the phone number to recognize subsequent calls.
Q
Name. TeleVantage uses the Caller ID text to recognize subsequent calls.
Q
Callback. TeleVantage uses the callback number entered by the caller. This option
is only available if the caller entered a callback number.
See the next section for more information.
7.
Click OK.
You cannot associate a phone number or Caller ID text with a public contact unless you have
permissions to edit public contacts. You can, however, label an individual call as being from a
public contact.
Understanding name and number on Caller ID
When you receive a call, TeleVantage receives two pieces of information about where the call
originated: the phone number and the Caller ID name. You can associate either of these items
with a contact.
Depending on where the call originated, one item may work better than the other, as the
following examples illustrate:
Q
If the call is from a home phone (for example, ANTANDER,LOU - 6178380405). In this
case, where both the number and name are unique, either could be used for association.
Q
If the call is from a company with many phone lines (for example, Vertical 6175641121). In this case the phone number may change with every call, because the
CHAPTER 16. MANAGING CONTACTS AND WORKGROUPS
16-11
office’s PBX system uses a random trunk for all outgoing calls. The Caller ID name,
however, remains constant, so you should use that for association.
Q
If the call is from a standardized Caller ID name (for example, california 7605550807). In cases where the Caller ID name is standardized for many different
phones, you should use the phone number for association.
Using contact PINs for guaranteed recognition
Contact PINs provide a guaranteed way for callers to be recognized by TeleVantage whenever
they call. A contact with a PIN can call from any phone number and be identified by
TeleVantage.
Contact PINs are unique numbers that you give out to contacts. Contacts add their PINs to your
extension when they call you.
Examples:
Q
Your extension is 177, and you give Mr. Jones a contact PIN of 55. Mr. Jones calls your
office, and when prompted to enter your extension, he types in 17755. TeleVantage is
thus assured of identifying this call as coming from Mr. Jones.
Q
If you have a car for sale, you could advertise it in the paper with your extension plus a
contact PIN (for example, “Call me at ext. 17756”). Set up the contact as “Car buyer” with
a PIN of 56. Now when anyone calls about the ad, it appears as from “Car buyer” in your
Call Monitor.
To enter a contact PIN
1.
In the Contacts folder, double-click the contact for whom you want to create a contact
PIN. The Contact dialog box opens.
2.
Click the Caller Identification tab.
3.
Under Contact PIN, enter the number that you intend to give to this contact. If the
contact PIN you entered conflicts with one already created, TeleVantage prompts you
to enter a different number.
4.
Click OK.
Note: You cannot enter a contact PIN for a public contact.
Opening contacts from within other folders ___________________
After an incoming call has been identified as coming from a contact, you can easily open the
contact record from a Voicemail folder (if the contact left a voice message) or the Call Log
folder. Select the call or voice message, and then choose Actions > Open Contact.
16-12
Using contacts in another contact manager___________________
If you make extensive use of another TAPI-compatible contact manager or customer
relationship management application such as Microsoft Outlook, GoldMine or FrontOffice
2000, or Interact Commerce Corporation’s Act!, you can place TeleVantage calls to your
contacts from those applications by using the TeleVantage TAPI Service Provider. See your
TeleVantage system administrator about installing the TAPI Service Provider, and then follow
your contact manager’s instructions for placing calls. Calls placed by other applications still
appear in your TeleVantage Call Log and Call Monitor folders.
You can also install the TeleVantage Contact Manager Assistant (CMA) and receive
screen-pops showing the name, the Caller ID, and the time of day of the call. Act! users can
receive screen-pops without installing the CMA.
You do not need to have the TeleVantage ViewPoint installed to use the TAPI Service Provider
or the CMA.
Using the TeleVantage Contact Manager Assistant
The Contact Manager Assistant enables Outlook, GoldMine, or FrontOffice 2000 contact
managers to pop up contact information automatically when contacts in one of your contact
managers call. TeleVantage recognizes the incoming Caller ID number, Caller ID, or name.
To run the Contact Manager Assistant (CMA)
1.
Choose Start > Programs > Vertical TeleVantage > Contact Manager Assistant.
The program starts and runs in the background.
2.
Right-click
in the system tray for a shortcut menu of commands that you can use
to configure and personalize the program. For further instructions, see the CMA’s
online Help.
Importing contacts from other contact managers into TeleVantage
You can export contacts from other contact managers and import them into TeleVantage.
Exporting contacts from Microsoft Outlook
The following instructions show how to export contacts from Microsoft Outlook:
1.
In Outlook, Select File > Import and Export.
2.
Select Export to a file from the list and click Next.
3.
Select Comma Separated Values (Windows) and click Next.
4.
Select a folder in which to store the contacts file and click Next.
5.
Enter a filename and click Next.
6.
Click Finish.
CHAPTER 16. MANAGING CONTACTS AND WORKGROUPS
16-13
Importing contacts into TeleVantage
See “Importing and exporting TeleVantage items” on page 8-27.
Using workgroups ________________________________________
A workgroup is a group of related extensions or contacts. Extensions in TeleVantage include
users, IVR Plug-ins, auto attendants, or queues. With a workgroup you can:
16-14
Q
Send, reply, or forward a voice message to the workgroup. All mailboxes in the
workgroup receive the message at once. See “Sending a message directly to a user’s
voicemail” on page 13-10.
Q
Create a call rule for the workgroup. Incoming calls from any member of the workgroup
are handled according to the call rule. For example, you can have a custom voicemail
greeting that plays for all the members in your “VIP group.” See Chapter 17 for more
information.
Q
Share your voice mailbox or contacts with the workgroup. See “Sharing folders” on
page 8-24.
Q
Call the workgroup from ViewPoint, or from the phone if your system administrator has
assigned it an extension. The phones of all users in the workgroup ring simultaneously,
and the first user to answer is connected. See “Placing a call” on page 12-2. Members of
a workgroup other than users are ignored, for example, contacts, queues, auto attendants,
and IVR Plug-ins.
Q
View the users in your workgroup when transferring calls, which makes it easier to pick
the right recipient. You can set any workgroup to appear as a tab in the Extensions
section of the Transfer To dialog box. For example, you can define the members of your
Sales department as a workgroup. When you have a call for the Sales department, you
can click the Sales tab and see all the department members at a glance, along with their
current personal statuses. See “Transferring a call” on page 11-10, and “Having a
workgroup appear as an Extensions tab” on page 16-16.
Q
Quickly answer any ringing phone in your workgroup by picking up your phone and
pressing *99. See “Answering a call at another ringing phone” on page 4-4.
Q
Place a page to all users in the workgroup (if the workgroup has an extension). Available
users with supported phones receive the page and you can speak over their
speakerphones without their needing to pick up the phone. See “Placing a page or
intercom call” on page 3-6.
Q
Create a routing list that distributes calls to the users in a workgroup according to the
distribution algorithm you choose. TeleVantage system administrators use this feature
to set up ACD workgroups. See “Routing calls to workgroups” on page 15-14. For
information about setting up ACD workgroups, see TeleVantage Call Center
Administrator’s Guide.
Personal and public workgroups
Generally, the workgroups you will create in TeleVantage are personal workgroups. Only you
can see the personal workgroups that you create. Other users cannot see workgroups that you
create.
Public workgroups, which are accessible to all TeleVantage users who have permission to see
them, can be created only by Administrator users or other users who have been given special
permission to do so. Your system administrator can assign public workgroups an extension so
that the workgroup can be accessed via the phone.
You can also view and select public workgroups when you place a call using the Place Call To
dialog box. See “Using the Place Call To dialog box” on page 12-3.
Note: You can create or edit public workgroups only if your TeleVantage system administrator
has given you permission to do so.
The Workgroups folder
The Workgroups folder lets you view and manage your workgroups.
To open the Workgroups folder, click the Configuration icon in the navigation bar. The Favorite
Folders list offers access to your office’s Public Workgroups folder.
Creating a workgroup
1.
Do one of the following:
Q
To create a personal workgroup, open the Workgroups folder.
Q
If you have the permission to create a public workgroup, open Public Folders in
the Folder List and click Workgroups. You can only create a public workgroup if
your TeleVantage system administrator has given you permission to do so.
CHAPTER 16. MANAGING CONTACTS AND WORKGROUPS
16-15
2.
Choose File > New > Workgroup. The Workgroup dialog box opens.
3.
Enter a Name for the workgroup and any Notes to describe the workgroup.
4.
Add one or more members to the workgroup by selecting names on the list of
Available Extensions and then clicking Add. Press CTRL to select multiple names on
the list. The members you selected appear in the Members list. Use the arrows next to
the list to arrange the order of the members. Click Remove to delete members from
the list.
Note: The order of the workgroup is important only if you have set up a routing list to
route calls to it according to the Top Down or Round Robin algorithms. See “Routing
calls to workgroups” on page 15-14.
5.
Click OK.
Personal workgroups appear as a tab in your Extensions list only, not the Extensions lists of
other users. See the next section.
Having a workgroup appear as an Extensions tab
You can specify whether or not a particular workgroup appears as a tab in your Extensions list.
If you create a tab for the workgroup, it lists all extensions within the workgroup, and you can
see the current status of those extensions at a glance (contacts in the workgroup do not appear).
The tab also appears in the Extensions section of the Place Call To and Transfer Call To dialog
boxes.
By default, TeleVantage displays an Extensions list tab for the following workgroups:
Q
Any of your personal workgroups of which you are a member
Q
Any public workgroup of which you are a member
Note: You do not see an Extensions list tab for the personal workgroups of other users, even if
you are a member of such workgroups.
16-16
You can also choose to show a tab for any other personal workgroups or any other public
workgroup.
To specify whether a workgroup has a tab in the Extensions list
1.
Select the workgroup in your personal Workgroups folder or the public Workgroups
folder (see “Personal and public workgroups” on page 16-15).
2.
Choose Actions > Show as Tab in Extensions view. If the menu choice is checked,
the workgroup appears as a tab.
For more about the Extensions list, see Chapter 10.
CHAPTER 16. MANAGING CONTACTS AND WORKGROUPS
16-17
CHAPTER 17
CHAPTER 17
USING CALL RULES
CHAPTER CONTENTS
About call rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
The Call Rules folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
Creating a new call rule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
Enabling or disabling a call rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-8
Choosing the priority of a call rule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-9
Ignoring all call rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10
About call rules __________________________________________
TeleVantage call rules enable you to handle specific incoming calls differently than other calls.
For example, you can create a call rule for your friend Jim so that he is routed to your cell phone
and hears a special voicemail greeting whenever he calls.
Call Rules overview
To create a call rule, you determine two things:
Q
Which incoming calls activate the call rule
Q
How the call rule handles those calls
Distinguishing which incoming calls activate the call rule
You can distinguish which incoming calls are handled by a call rule by using one or both of the
following conditions:
Q
Caller condition. The rule activates depending on who is calling. In addition to having
call rules for individual callers, you can have call rules that apply to all internal callers,
all external callers, all unidentified callers, or any member of a workgroup.
Q
Schedule condition. The rule activates depending on when the call arrives. You can
handle calls differently during business hours, after business hours, and at specific dates
or times.
You can use caller and schedule conditions separately or in combination to achieve various
effects. See “Combining caller and schedule conditions” on page 17-5.
Determining how the call rule handles calls
A call rule can handle incoming calls according to any combination of the following settings:
Q
Greeting. You can choose which greeting plays if the caller reaches your voicemail.
Q
Routing List. You can choose which routing list a call follows.
Q
Taking calls. You can specify whether your phone does or does not ring. Note that a
setting of “Yes” overrides the Do Not Disturb personal status.
Q
Personal Status. You can select a personal status and have the call handled as if that
personal status were in effect.
If you select a personal status, note that its settings are overridden by the call rule’s other
settings. For example, a call rule uses the “Standard” greeting. It also uses the Out of the
Office personal status, which uses the “Be back tomorrow” greeting. When the call rule
handles a call, the “Standard” greeting is the one used.
Call rule settings override all other settings for routing list, taking calls, and personal status. See
“Active settings hierarchy” on page 9-12.
17-2
Examples of how you can use call rules
Q
Calls from your “Friends” workgroup can follow a routing list that tries you at several
locations in the office during business hours.
Q
During your lunch hour, you can have a special “At lunch” greeting that plays to callers
before sending them to voicemail.
Q
You can have the Do Not Disturb personal status turn on automatically every day at 6:00
pm, but only for internal callers.
Q
You can create a contact called “Nuisance Callers” and associate the phone numbers of
salespeople with that contact. Those callers can follow a routing list that plays a greeting
and then hangs up without ringing your phone. The greeting can say, “I’m sorry. I don’t
accept calls from salespeople during business hours.”
The Call Rules folder
The Call Rules folder lets you view and manage your call rules. To open the Call Rules folder,
click the Configuration icon in the navigation bar.
CHAPTER 17. USING CALL RULES
17-3
Creating a new call rule____________________________________
The following procedure explains how to create a call rule. Be sure to go to any sections
referenced in the procedure.
To create a new call rule
1.
Choose File > New > Call Rule. The Call Rule dialog box opens.
2.
Enter a name for the call rule in the Name field.
3.
Select one or more caller conditions. See “Setting caller conditions” on page 17-5.
4.
Select a schedule condition. See “Setting schedule conditions” on page 17-6 for more
information.
5.
Select one or more settings to specify how the rule handles calls. See “Selecting how
a call rule handles a call” on page 17-8 for more information.
6.
If you do not want this call rule to be active, uncheck Enable this Call Rule. The call
rule remains in storage, but does not handle any calls until you enable it again. See
“Enabling or disabling a call rule” on page 17-8.
If you want the call rule to be active, leave this field checked.
7.
17-4
Click OK.
Combining caller and schedule conditions
When you create a call rule, you can specify only caller conditions, only schedule conditions, or
both conditions together, with the following results:
Q
Only caller conditions. The call rule is always active and handles calls that meet its
caller conditions at all times. For example, a call rule for your friend Jim activates
whenever Jim calls.
Q
Only schedule conditions. The call rule handles all incoming calls during the specified
dates and times, regardless of who’s calling. For example, a call rule for after business
hours (with no caller conditions set) handles all calls after business hours.
Q
Both caller conditions and schedule conditions. The call rule handles calls only when
both conditions are met. For example, a call rule for your friend Jim after business hours
handles only calls from Jim that occur after business hours. If Jim calls during business
hours, the call rule does not activate. Likewise, if anyone other than Jim calls after
business hours, the call rule does not activate.
Setting caller conditions
Under Activate this rule based on the following conditions, check the types of callers to
whom you want the call rule to apply. If you select more than one caller condition, the call rule
will apply if any caller condition is met. For example, selecting internal callers and your Friends
workgroup will activate this call rule if any internal user or any member of the Friends
workgroup calls.
You can select one or more of the following caller conditions:
Q
Person or Workgroup. A specific user, contact, or workgroup. Select the item from the
dropdown list.
To create a new contact or workgroup, click
. To edit the current contact or
workgroup, ALT-click
. See “Entering a new contact” on page 16-4 and “Creating a
workgroup” on page 16-15.
Q
Internal callers. TeleVantage users.
Q
External callers. Callers from outside of your TeleVantage system.
Q
Unidentified callers. Callers from outside of your TeleVantage system who are also not
identified as contacts.
CHAPTER 17. USING CALL RULES
17-5
Setting schedule conditions
To make the call rule active during certain dates or times only, check Calls at certain dates or
times.
If Calls at certain dates or times is unchecked, the call rule is always active and will handle
incoming calls that meet its caller conditions at all times.
To set a schedule condition
1.
Check Calls at certain dates or times.
2.
Click
opens.
3.
Under This schedule entry occurs, choose an option for when the call rule activates.
Choose one of the following two options:
Q
or double-click in the schedule text box. The Schedule Call Rule dialog box
Dates and times based on your office’s business hours. All options other than
During custom hours are based on your office’s business hours.
To view your office’s business hours, click Business Hours. If your company has
more than one set of business hours available, choose the set that you want to use.
Note that if you change your business schedule, it affects all other items scheduled
through ViewPoint, such as your schedule for e-mail and pager notification of new
voice messages (see “E-mail, pager, and call notifications” on page 13-12).
Q
4.
17-6
Dates and times that you define. Click During custom hours. See the next section
for instructions.
Click OK.
Specifying custom hours
If you selected During custom hours as your schedule condition, use the following procedures
to specify when the call rule activates.
To have the call rule activate on a daily or weekly basis
1.
Click Custom Hours. The Custom Hours dialog box opens.
2.
Check the days for which you want to set custom hours.
3.
Replace the default times with the hours during which you want the call rule to be
active. The call rule will be active during these hours on the selected days.
Note: You can enter multiple time ranges separated by commas, for example, “9:00
AM - 12:00 PM, 3:00 PM - 6:00 PM.”
4.
Click OK.
To have the call rule activate on an individual date
1.
Click Custom Hours, and then click the Holidays tab.
2.
Click Add. The Custom Date dialog box opens.
3.
Enter a Custom Date on which the call rule will be active.
4.
To schedule this rule for the whole day, accept the default of All day. Select Partial
day if you want to set specific hours.
CHAPTER 17. USING CALL RULES
17-7
5.
If you select Partial day, enter the Active hours for the day.
6.
Click OK when you are finished setting the schedule.
Selecting how a call rule handles a call
Calls are normally handled with your active settings, such as your standard greeting and routing
list. Call rules override one or more of these settings to handle calls in different ways.
Under Handle calls using the following settings, check any combination of the following
options. Note that you must check at least one option, or your call rule will do nothing.
Q
Greeting. Select a greeting. Callers handled by the call rule will hear that greeting if they
reach your voicemail.
Q
Routing List. Select a routing list. Calls handled by the call rule will follow that routing
list.
Q
Taking calls. Select whether or not calls handled by the call rule ring your phone.
If set to Yes, incoming calls follow your active routing list, which usually includes
ringing your phone. If set to No, incoming calls are sent directly to the final action on
your active routing list, which by default is your voicemail. Note that a setting of Yes
overrides the personal status Do Not Disturb.
Q
Personal Status. Select a personal status. Calls handled by the call rule will be handled
as if that personal status were in effect. Note that the call rule’s own settings for greeting,
routing list, and whether you are taking calls override the preferences in the personal
status.
You can click the buttons next to Personal Status, Greeting, and Routing List to create a new
item of each type. Press ALT and click a button to edit the currently selected item.
Enabling or disabling a call rule _____________________________
You can enable or disable existing call rules. Disabled call rules remain in storage but do not
handle any calls until you enable them again.
To enable or disable a call rule
1.
In the Call Rules folder, select the call rule that you want to enable or disable.
2.
Choose Actions > Enabled from the menu bar.
Enabled call rules are marked with
17-8
.
Choosing the priority of a call rule __________________________
TeleVantage handles incoming calls according to the priority of your call rules. The call rules
in the Call Rules folder are ordered from the top down. If two call rules apply to the same call,
the call rule highest in the list is the one used.
You can create multiple call rules that contain similar caller and schedule conditions, and then
prioritize them to ensure that the correct greeting and routing list are used for calls. For example,
if you create a call rule for a workgroup, but want calls from a certain individual within that
workgroup to be handled differently, you can create a call rule for that individual and give it a
higher priority than the workgroup’s call rule.
To set the priority of a call rule
1.
Select a call rule in the Call Rules folder.
2.
Click
or
position.
on the toolbar to move the call rule to a higher or lower priority
How TeleVantage resolves call rule setting conflicts
When a call is subject to multiple call rules, individual settings (personal status, greeting, routing
list, or phone) are determined by the highest priority rule in which the setting is not blank. If the
highest priority rule has a setting with an instruction, that setting is used. But if it has another
setting that is blank, while a lower priority rule has an instruction for that setting, the setting
from the lower priority rule is used. This can result in settings from different call rules being
used on a single call. See the example that follows.
Example: You create a call rule for your friend Paul that will be in effect during business hours.
In that call rule, you choose a custom greeting for him to hear and a routing list that rings your
cell phone. You choose to leave the personal status and phone settings blank. If Paul also
belongs to the Sales workgroup for which you have a lower-priority call rule, and that call rule
specifies a personal status and phone state, calls from Paul are handled in the following way:
Q
Greeting. The custom greeting you created for Paul is used.
Q
Routing List. Calls from Paul ring your cell phone, as specified in Paul’s call rule.
Q
Taking calls. The behavior specified in the call rule for the Sales workgroup is used,
because no Taking calls setting is specified in Paul’s call rule.
Q
Personal Status. The Sales workgroup’s personal status setting from the Sales
workgroup’s call rule is used, because no personal status is specified in Paul’s call rule.
CHAPTER 17. USING CALL RULES
17-9
Ignoring all call rules ______________________________________
If you create routing lists and call rules, TeleVantage handles your incoming calls according to
those settings and rules. There can be times, however, when you want TeleVantage to ignore
those rules.
You can set TeleVantage to use the Standard routing list and ignore your call rules by choosing
Tools > Ignore Call Rules. The check mark on the menu indicates that Ignore Call Rules is
turned on. All call rules are then ignored and all incoming calls ring at your Where I Am phone
number (your extension, unless you have changed it with call forwarding or a personal status).
If there is no answer, the caller is sent to voicemail. Any settings specified by your call
forwarding, personal status, or active settings are still in effect.
Example: You have set up a routing list that tries you at various phones around the office. Now
you are taking a trip out of town and you want all calls forwarded to your hotel. Use call
forwarding to forward your calls to the hotel, and then turn Ignore Call Rules on to make sure
your calls do not get sent around the office while you are away.
When return to your office and you turn off Ignore Calls Rules, TeleVantage again enforces all
of your routing lists and call rules.
You can have a personal status cause TeleVantage to ignore call rules whenever that personal
status is in effect. See Chapter 9.
17-10
CHAPTER 18
CHAPTER 18
CUSTOMIZING VIEWPOINT
CHAPTER CONTENTS
About customizing ViewPoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
Customizing telephone behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
Configuring a digital feature phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-13
Customizing incoming call behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-16
Customizing ISDN outbound Caller ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-17
Customizing SIP accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-19
Customizing voice message behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-20
Customizing ViewPoint for Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-21
Customizing the ViewPoint display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-22
Enhancing ViewPoint with Add-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-25
Other customization options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-29
About customizing ViewPoint_______________________________
You can customize ViewPoint and your TeleVantage account to suit the way you work.
Most customization options presented in this chapter are set in the Options dialog box, accessed
by choosing Tools > Options. Your TeleVantage system administrator may have made some or
all tabs of the Options dialog box unavailable to you. See your system administrator if you
cannot access a particular option that is described in this chapter.
Guide to the Options dialog box
Use the following table to locate instructions for the fields in the Options dialog box.
Tab
Personal
Field
See...
Voice Title
“Recording a voice title” on
page 18-5
Telephone Prompts
“Changing the language of
telephone command prompts” on
page 18-6
Personal Operator
“Changing your personal Operator”
on page 18-9
List in dial-by-name
directory
“Customizing your listing in the
dial-by-name directory” on
page 18-9
Accept ACD Workgroup
calls
“Marking yourself ready and
unavailable” on page D-2
ISDN outbound Caller ID
“Customizing ISDN outbound Caller
ID” on page 18-17
SIP Accounts
“Customizing SIP accounts” on
page 18-19
\ My Numbers
Phone
18-2
“Entering My Numbers” on
page 12-4
Default Ring Duration
“Customizing how long your phone
rings” on page 18-10
Enable Call Waiting
“Customizing or turning off call
waiting” on page 18-8
Ring back ...
“Turning ringback for calls on hold
on and off” on page 18-9
Imitate a station ...
“Imitating a station at a remote
number” on page 6-10
Tab
Field
See...
\ Call Announcing
Announce who the call is
for
“The “call for” announcing prompt”
on page 7-3
Screen and announce
the caller ...
“Customizing or turning off call
announcing” on page 18-6
Analog phone type
“Specifying your phone type” on
page 18-5
\ Station Features
(Internal analog
station)
Caller ID
Caller ID on call waiting
“Displaying Caller ID on a phone”
on page 18-8
Message waiting
indicator
“Enabling a message waiting light”
on page 18-20
Stutter tone
“Turning off stutter dial tone” on
page 18-20
Voice-first answering
“Receiving internal intercom calls
with voice-first answering” on
page 4-5
\ Station Features
“Configuring a digital feature phone”
on page 18-13
(digital phone
station)
\ Station Features
(external station)
Destination / Call Using /
Number
“Configuring an external station” on
page 6-12
\ Caller ID Display
\ Ring Patterns
“Changing ring patterns” on
page 18-11
\ Hands-Free
“Enabling and disabling hands-free
answering” on page 18-11
Voice Messages
\ Usage
Maximum message
length
“Setting a maximum length for your
voice messages” on page 13-9
Voice message playback
order
“Setting voice message playback
order” on page 18-20
Play a sound...
“Playing a sound when a new
message arrives” on page 18-20
Usage
“Managing your voicemail quota” on
page 13-9
Remove Items from
Deleted folder
“Managing the Deleted folder” on
page 8-23
CHAPTER 18. CUSTOMIZING VIEWPOINT
18-3
Tab
See...
\ E-Mail
Notification
“Setting up e-mail notification” on
page 13-12
\ Pager Notification
“Setting up pager notification” on
page 13-13
\ Call Notification
“Setting up call notifications” on
page 13-14
ViewPoint
\ Call Monitor
18-4
Field
Log on automatically
“Resetting ViewPoint so that login is
required” on page 8-3
Double clicking
contacts...
“Defining double-click behavior in
the Contacts folder” on page 18-22
Name format
“Changing how names are
displayed” on page 18-24
Use Navigation pane
“The view bar” on page 8-11
Play this greeting...
“Grabbing and holding the call” on
page 11-8
Display Call Monitor...
“Displaying the Call Monitor folder
automatically” on page 11-5
Actively sorted
“Automatically sorting new calls” on
page 11-2
Grouped by owner on All
tab
“Displaying calls on the All tab” on
page 11-4
\ Call Alerts
“Customizing incoming call
behavior” on page 18-16
Change
Password
“Changing your password” on
page 8-7
Customizing telephone behavior____________________________
The options described in this section allow you to customize your interaction with TeleVantage
on the phone. These options include:
Q
Specifying your phone type. See the next section.
Q
Recording a voice title. See this page.
Q
Changing the language of telephone command prompts. See page 18-6.
Q
Customizing or turning off call announcing. See page 18-6.
Q
Customizing or turning off call waiting. See page 18-8.
Q
Displaying Caller ID on a phone. See page 18-8.
Q
Turning ringback for calls on hold on and off. See page 18-9.
Q
Changing your personal Operator. See page 18-9
Q
Customizing your listing in the dial-by-name directory. See page 18-9
Q
Customizing how long your phone rings. See page 18-10.
Q
Changing ring patterns. See page 18-11.
Q
Enabling and disabling hands-free answering. See page 18-11.
Q
Enabling and disabling voice-first answering. See page 18-12.
Q
Customizing your hold music. See page 18-12.
Specifying your phone type
If you have an Aastra Powertouch or Cybiolink phone, you should select that phone type to
make its features work better with TeleVantage. To do so:
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
On the Phone \ Station Features tab, use the Analog Phone type dropdown list to
select your type of phone.
3.
Click OK.
Recording a voice title
A voice title is a short recording of just your name that TeleVantage fits into its own recorded
prompts. For more information, and for instructions on recording a voice title on the phone, see
“Recording your voice title” on page 2-2.
To record a voice title in ViewPoint
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
On the Personal tab, use the audio controls for Voice Title to record your voice title.
See “Using the audio controls” on page 8-26 for more information.
3.
Click OK.
CHAPTER 18. CUSTOMIZING VIEWPOINT
18-5
You have a limited amount of space for your voice title, your contacts’ voice titles, your
greetings, and recorded conversations. Ask your TeleVantage system administrator how much
space you have been allocated and how much you have used.
Changing the language of telephone command prompts
TeleVantage can play the telephone command prompts in any language that was installed with
TeleVantage. Whenever you log on or press Flash, the prompts are played in the language you
choose.
To change the telephone commands language
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
On the Personal tab, select the language that you want on the Telephone prompts
dropdown list. All languages that were installed with TeleVantage appear on the list.
3.
Click OK.
Customizing or turning off call announcing
Call announcing allows you to screen callers by using only your telephone. When you answer
your ringing phone, you hear, “Call from,” followed by the name of the caller. You can then
accept or decline the call. For detailed information about your options, see “Call announcing”
on page 4-2.
The following procedure shows you several ways to customize call announcing. You can also
turn it off entirely.
To customize call announcing or turn it off
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
Click the Call Announcing tab.
3.
Under Screen and announce the caller for these types of calls, choose any of the
following:
Q
18-6
Internal. Calls from other TeleVantage users.
Q
External. Calls from external callers who choose your extension from an auto
attendant or are transferred to you by another user.
Q
External Direct. Calls from external callers who dial you directly. If you have a
Direct Inward Dial (DID) number, or if a trunk line is routed directly to your
extension, you may receive these types of calls. Ask your TeleVantage system
administrator about whether your phone is set up in either of these ways.
To turn call announcing off for a type of call, uncheck it for that type. With call
announcing turned off, you are connected directly to the caller when you answer your
phone.
Note: If your call announcing settings are different for internal and external calls, it can
be helpful to set different ring patterns for internal and external callers (see “Changing
ring patterns” on page 18-11). You can then tell by the ring pattern whether you will hear
the caller or the call announcing prompt when you pick up the phone.
4.
Use the following options in conjunction with call announcing for external calls:
Q
Ask callers without a voice title for their names. By default, if call announcing is
turned on, contacts and users without voice titles are prompted to say their names.
When you pick up the phone, you hear, “Call from,” followed by what they say. If
you uncheck this field, callers are not prompted to say their names.
With this field unchecked, when you receive a call from a caller without a voice title
you will hear either “Call from internal user,” “Call from external caller,” or “Call
from contact,” depending on the caller.
Q
If Caller ID is present, do not ask for their name. If checked, incoming callers
with Caller ID are not prompted to say their names. This is a useful setting if you
have a phone with a Caller ID display. You can skip asking the caller for a name if
you can see on your Caller ID display who is calling.
If unchecked, all callers without voice titles are prompted to say their names.
Q
5.
Announce who is transferring. Check this option if you want to hear the name of
the person transferring a call to you. For example, if checked, you would hear
“Helen Shire is transferring a call from Shane West.” To announce who is
transferring, you must have call announcing turned on for internal calls. If it is not
turned on, you are connected directly to transferred calls.
Click OK.
CHAPTER 18. CUSTOMIZING VIEWPOINT
18-7
Customizing or turning off call waiting
With call waiting turned off, incoming calls that arrive while you are on the phone go directly
to the next action in your routing list (by default, the next action is your voicemail).
However, if call waiting is turned off, you can easily intercept an incoming call visually in your
Call Monitor folder. See Chapter 11 for more information.
To customize call waiting or turn it off
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
On the Phone tab, check Enable call waiting if you want to use call waiting. Uncheck
it if you want to turn call waiting off.
3.
If you use ViewPoint’s Call Monitor folder to alert you to incoming calls, and thus do
not want the audible beep over the phone, check Do not play call waiting beep when
using ViewPoint. The beep will play only when you are not running ViewPoint.
4.
Click OK.
Displaying Caller ID on a phone
If your phone can display Caller ID, you can choose whether or not it shows the Caller ID of
incoming calls. If your phone supports Caller ID display on call waiting, you can also choose
whether to use that feature.
1.
Choose Tools > Options.
2.
Click the Phone \ Station Features tab.
3.
Choose one of the following options:
4.
Q
Caller ID. When checked, your phone displays the Caller ID of incoming calls.
Q
Caller ID on call waiting. When checked, your phone displays the Caller ID of
incoming calls when you are on the phone. When unchecked, your current caller’s
ID remains in the phone display despite the incoming call.
Click OK.
Notes:
18-8
Q
Caller ID is transmitted between the first and second ring. If your phone supports Caller
ID, you may want to increase this setting so that there is enough time for Caller ID to be
displayed and read.
Q
Because Caller ID data is sent between the first and second rings, sending Caller ID to a
phone can interfere with the beginning of customized ring patterns. See “Changing ring
patterns” on page 18-11.
Turning ringback for calls on hold on and off
If you hang up with one or more calls on hold or parked, TeleVantage can ring your phone to
remind you of the calls. You can turn ringback on and off, and you can specify how long
TeleVantage waits before ringing your phone.
Note: If you are an agent in a call center queue, the ringback settings for queue calls are set by
your queue administrator and are not affected by these settings, which are for personal calls only.
To turn ringback on and off
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
Click the Phone tab.
3.
Do one of the following:
Q
To turn ringback on, check Ring back if I leave a call on hold or parked.
Q
To turn ringback off, uncheck the option.
4.
In the Ring back interval field, enter the number of seconds that TeleVantage should
wait before ringing you back after you put a call on hold or park a call.
5.
Click OK.
Changing your personal Operator
Callers who reach your voicemail or who are waiting on a routing list can always press 0. By
default, 0 transfers them to your system’s Operator, but you can transfer them to any other
extension, for example, your company’s auto attendant.
To change the extension to which callers transfer when they press 0
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
On the Personal tab, choose an extension on the Personal Operator dropdown list.
You can choose a user, auto attendant, queue, or IVR Plug-in.
3.
Click OK.
Customizing your listing in the dial-by-name directory
The dial-by-name directory lets callers dial a user by entering the first few letters of the user’s
name. Callers who know your name but not your extension can find you quickly in the
dial-by-name directory.
You can remove your name from the dial-by-name directory if you want only callers who know
your extension to call you. You can also specify whether or not the dial-by-name directory reads
your extension to callers.
CHAPTER 18. CUSTOMIZING VIEWPOINT
18-9
To customize your dial-by-name listing
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
On the Personal tab, uncheck List in dial-by-name directory to remove yourself from
the directory. If checked, callers can dial you by name.
3.
If you choose to be listed in the dial-by-name directory, you can check Play extension
to the caller to have TeleVantage read your extension to callers who find you by using
the dial-by-name directory. Callers hear “Transferring to <your voice title> at
extension <your extension>.”
If unchecked, callers who find you by using the dial-by-name directory hear only
“Transferring to <your voice title>.”
4.
Click OK.
Customizing how long your phone rings
You can specify how long a call rings your phone (your default internal or external station)
before it proceeds to the next action on your routing list (by default your voicemail). Ring
duration for call forwarding and routing lists is determined elsewhere.
1.
Choose Tools > Options.The Options dialog box opens.
2.
Click the Phone tab.
3.
In the Default ring duration field, enter the number of seconds your phone should ring
before a call proceeds to the next action on your routing list.
The ring duration you enter here can be overridden by the ring duration specified in a
personal status or routing list.
Note: By default the minimum ring duration is 5 seconds and the maximum is 120
seconds. Your system administrator can extend the possible range from 1 to 999
seconds.
4.
Click OK.
Note: Caller ID is transmitted between the first and second ring. If your phone supports Caller
ID, you may want to increase this setting so that there is enough time for Caller ID to be displayed
and read before the call is sent to the next action on the routing list.
18-10
Changing ring patterns
You can change how your phone rings when you receive an incoming call. You can set different
ring patterns for internal and external calls.
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
Click the Phone \ Ring Patterns tab.
3.
Under Ring patterns, select the type of ring that you want for Internal calls and
External calls. The “Splash ring” settings create a group of short rings followed by a
pause.
To test a ring pattern, click the button to the right of the dropdown list. Your phone
rings three times in a demonstration of that ring. Because the ring pattern derives from
a continuous loop, the first one might be truncated. Listen for the subsequent rings to
hear the pattern accurately.
Note: On some systems, Splash ring 3 plays as Splash ring 2, and Short ring, Long
ring plays as Long ring, Short ring. This occurs if your TeleVantage Server uses Dialogic
DM/IP Internet telephony boards, DI/SI or HDSI station boards, or DM/V conference
bridge boards. Your TeleVantage administrator can tell you if your system behaves this
way.
4.
Click OK.
Note: If your ring patterns do not begin correctly, it may be because you are sending Caller ID
data to a display phone. See “Displaying Caller ID on a phone” on page 18-8.
Enabling and disabling hands-free answering
For an overview of hands-free answering, see “Using hands-free answering” on page 4-4. Use
the following procedure to enable or disable hands-free answering from ViewPoint:
1.
On the main menu, click Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
Click the Phone \ Hands-Free tab.
3.
Select the Enable hands-free answering check box to enable hands-free answering.
Clear the check box to turn hands-free answering off.
4.
Enter the desired time in the Dial tone time-out seconds. This setting identifies how
long a dial tone plays after the end of a call before the station reverts to silence while
it waits for the next call. A setting of 0 indicates no dial tone, which means that the
station reverts to silence as soon as a call ends.
5.
Click OK.
Note: You can also pick up the phone and press *10 to enable and disable hands-free
answering.
CHAPTER 18. CUSTOMIZING VIEWPOINT
18-11
Enabling and disabling voice-first answering
For an overview of voice-first answering, see “Receiving internal intercom calls with voice-first
answering” on page 4-5. Use the following procedure to enable or disable voice-first answering
from ViewPoint:
1.
Choose Tools > Options.
2.
On the Phone \ Station Features tab, check or uncheck Voice-first answering.
3.
Click OK.
Customizing your hold music
If your office has multiple sources of music-on-hold, you can use any source as your personal
hold music, that callers hear when you put them on hold.
Your system administrator makes this setting for you. Talk to your system administrator about
the music-on-hold options that are available and which one you would like to use as your
personal hold music.
Note: You can use audio files as your hold music, as long as they are in WAV or VOX format.
18-12
Configuring a digital feature phone__________________________
If your station is supported digital feature phone, you can configure it in ViewPoint. For
instructions on using the digital phone, including using line appearances, see “Using digital
feature phones” on page 4-11.
To configure a digital feature phone
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
Choose the Phone \ Station Features tab.
3.
Set the following general phone options:
Q
LCD idle message. Enter the message that you want to appear on the first line of
the LCD display when the phone is not in use. The second line shows the current
day and time. The idle message usually shows the user name and extension for the
phone.
Q
Ring volume. The slider bar adjusts the default ring volume for the phone. Note that
pressing the phone's volume up and volume down buttons has the same effect as
using the slider bar to change the ring volume of the phone.
Note: On many digital phones, volume can only be controlled from the phone, not
from this slider bar.
Q
Use voice-first answering. Enables voice-first answering. With voice-first
answering, internal calls are connected to the your speakerphone automatically
without the phone ringing or needing to be picked up. All external callers ring the
phone as normal. For more information, see “Receiving internal intercom calls with
voice-first answering” on page 4-5.
CHAPTER 18. CUSTOMIZING VIEWPOINT
18-13
Q
Pickup answers a ringing SDN. If checked, when an SDN rings, picking up the
phone connects you immediately to the call. If unchecked, to connect to a ringing
SDN call you must pick up the phone, then press the SDN. For information on
SDNs, see “Using SDNs” on page 4-12.
When PDNs ring, picking up the phone always connects you to the call.
4.
Use the feature buttons list at the top of the widow to configure the programmable
buttons on your phone. To configure a button, click the button number in the Button
column, then select a feature from the dropdown list in the Feature column.
For a full list of features that you can map to a programmable button, see the next
section. For a description of PDNs and SDNs, see “Using line appearances” on
page 4-12.
To find which button on a phone corresponds to the button number in TeleVantage,
press the buttons on the phone. Unassigned buttons display their TeleVantage button
numbers in the phone’s LCD display.
Note: On the T-series Norstar phone, button settings you make in TeleVantage apply
to that button plus one on the phone. For example, if you assign Speed Dial to button
1, press button 2 on the phone for Speed Dial. Button 1 on the T-series Norstar is
reserved for speakerphone use.
The following features require additional steps:
Q
Access Voice Mail. Click the Parameter column to select the user whose voicemail
account is accessed. By default it is the account of the user currently logged into the
phone.
Note: If the phone has no message waiting light, the button programmed for Access
Voice Mail lights for your new messages, as long as you are selected in the
Parameter column.
Q
Call Forwarding. Click the button in the Parameter column to open the Call
Forwarding dialog box. Select or enter the number to forward your calls to, and
click OK. For instructions, see “Forwarding calls in ViewPoint” on page 15-3.
Q
Set Personal Status. Click the Parameter column to select the personal status to
attach to this button. The button functions as a toggle that switches your personal
status between the personal status selected and “Available.”
18-14
Q
5.
Speed Dial. Click the button in the Parameter column to open the Speed Dial
dialog box. Select or enter the number to dial and click OK. For instructions on
using the Numbers and Extensions tab, see “Using the Place Call To dialog box” on
page 12-3. To enter a custom dial string—for example, a TeleVantage telephone
command beginning with * or #— click the Direct Dial tab and enter the dial string
in the Direct dial field.
Click OK.
TeleVantage features you can map to digital phone buttons
Several TeleVantage commands are available to be mapped to a digital feature phone’s
programmable buttons. You can then press the button to activate the command. For instructions
on mapping a TeleVantage feature to a phone button, including special instructions for certain
features, see the previous section.
The following TeleVantage features are available:
Feature
Description
Access Voice Mail
Connects you to your voicemail account or that of
another user. Prompts for password.
Account Code
Lets you enter an account code for the call using
your telephone keypad.
Call Forwarding
Forwards your calls to a fixed destination
configured for that button. Pressing the button
also configures the call forwarding number.
Call Menu
Connects you to the telephone commands’ call
handling menu. See “Call handling commands”
on page A-2.
Cnf/Trn
Conferences or transfers the call.
Do Not Disturb
Selects the Do Not Disturb personal status,
sending all calls directly to voicemail. Pressing it
again makes you Available. See Chapter 9.
Flash
Performs a Flash command, required for many
TeleVantage telephone commands.
Hold
Puts the caller on TeleVantage hold.
Park/Unpark
Parks the call so it can be retrieved from any
phone, or unparks a parked call.
Phone Page
Performs the *15 command to place a page or
intercom call.
Record Call
Begins recording the call. Pressing it again stops
recording the call.
CHAPTER 18. CUSTOMIZING VIEWPOINT
18-15
Feature
Description
Redial
Redials the last call received.
Release
Disconnects the call. Note that if another line
appearance is ringing, hanging up the phone will
connect you to that line, so Release gives you a
way to hang up without taking the new call.
Send to Voicemail
Sends the call to your voicemail.
Set Personal Status
Sets the personal status of your choice. Click the
Parameter column to select the personal status
you want. The button toggles between that
personal status and “Available.” See Chapter 9.
Speaker
Allows you to use the speaker option on a phone
without a speaker button.
If your phone already has a Spkr button, do not
map this command to a button. Two speaker
buttons can conflict with each other.
Speed Dial
Places a call to the number configured for that
button. Also lets you set the speed dial number.
If your system administrator has enabled Busy
Lamp field for digital phones, Speed Dial buttons
light up when their target user is on a call. See
“Speed Dial with illuminated buttons” on
page 4-13.
Take Call
Answers a ringing call.
Customizing incoming call behavior _________________________
You can set various call alert behaviors to occur when you receive an incoming call. If you have
Call Monitor tabs other than “My Phone,” you can set call alerts separately for each tab-category
of calls (see “Call Monitor folder tabs” on page 11-3). For example, you can have the ViewPoint
title bar flash only on calls for your colleague whose Call Monitor you are sharing.
To set call alerts
18-16
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
Click the ViewPoint \ Call Alerts tab.
3.
Use the dropdown list to choose the category of incoming call for which you want to
set call alerts. The categories correspond to your Call Monitor tabs. You can set alerts
differently for each category. To set alerts that trigger on all incoming calls, select “For
all incoming calls.”
Note: With “For all incoming calls” selected, a half-selection mark indicates that the
option is selected in another category.
4.
5.
Select any of the following options:
Q
Display the Call Monitor. Brings ViewPoint to the front of your desktop with the
Call Monitor showing when a call arrives. If you are actively working in another
folder, ViewPoint opens the Call Monitor folder.
Q
Play the caller’s name over the speakers. Announces the caller's name over your
computer speakers if the recording is available. TeleVantage users and identified
contacts are announced if they have voice titles already recorded. Unidentified
callers are announced only if you have call announcing turned on with the prompt
to say their names.
Q
Flash the title bar. Flashes ViewPoint’s title bar.
Q
Flash the Call Monitor tab. Flashes the Call Monitor tab that contains the incoming
call. This can be useful if you work with multiple Call Monitor tabs, for example,
if you are an agent in a call center.
Click OK.
You can also customize the pattern in which your phone rings for internal and external incoming
calls. See “Changing ring patterns” on page 18-11 for more information.
Customizing ISDN outbound Caller ID _______________________
You can determine the type of Caller ID that accompanies your outbound calls on ISDN trunks.
Note: On trunk types other than ISDN, your outbound Caller ID is always set by the telephone
company.
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
Click the Personal tab.
3.
From the ISDN outbound Caller ID dropdown list, select one of the following options
for your Caller ID number:
Q
System default. Your outbound Caller ID number is whatever your system
administrator has set for the TeleVantage system as a whole. The current setting is
displayed in parentheses.
Q
Custom. Your outbound Caller ID number is whatever your system administrator
has specified as your custom number. The current number is displayed in
parentheses. Talk to your system administrator to request a different custom
number.
Note: If you specify a custom number, people who use the telephone company’s
*69 service to call you back will dial the custom number.
Q
Blocked. Caller ID number appears blank on your outbound calls. Note that the
system still sends Caller ID information even though it is blocked: this is a
CHAPTER 18. CUSTOMIZING VIEWPOINT
18-17
requirement, because some institutions have the right to read blocked Caller ID, for
example emergency services and 800-numbers.
4.
From the ISDN outbound Caller ID name dropdown list, select one of the following
options for your Caller ID name:
Q
System default. Your outbound Caller ID name is whatever your system
administrator has set for the TeleVantage system as a whole. The current setting is
displayed in parentheses.
Q
Organization name. The name of your Organization appears as your Caller ID
name. Your current Organization, if one is defined, appears in parentheses. Talk to
your system administrator to request a different Organization.
Q
User name. Your TeleVantage user name appears as your Caller ID name.
Q
Custom name. Your outbound Caller ID name is whatever your system
administrator has specified as your custom name. The current name is displayed in
parentheses. Talk to your system administrator to request a different custom name.
5.
Click OK.
You can block outbound Caller ID on your calls using the telephone commands, as follows:
18-18
Q
*67. Blocks outbound Caller ID. Caller ID will not be shown on your subsequent
outbound calls.
Q
*82. Unblocks outbound Caller ID. Caller ID reverts to your custom setting. If no
custom setting is available, the system Caller ID setting is used.
Customizing SIP accounts_________________________________
If your system is configured to place Voice-over-IP (VoIP) calls using SIP, you can define one
or more SIP accounts, which are used to identify you to remote SIP end points.
By default, remote SIP end points must call you using an address based on your extension, such
as “sip:101@vertical.com” for extension 101. You can create other SIP accounts so people can
call you using more meaningful addresses, for example sip:VinWilliams@vertical.com. For
outbound calls, SIP accounts are also used to identify yourself to others and also to authenticate
yourself on external SIP services such as www.broadvoice.com.
To create a personal SIP account
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box appears.
2.
Click the Personal \ SIP Accounts tab. The tab lists the SIP accounts created so far.
3.
Click Add. The SIP Account dialog box opens.
4.
Under Display name, enter your full name, or whatever you want to appear in the
display name portion of the SIP URI. For example, “Vin Williams” in the SIP URI
“Vin Williams” <sip:vwilliams@abccorp.com>.
5.
Under Userinfo of SIP URI, enter the portion of the SIP URI that appears before the
@ sign. For example “vwilliams” in the SIP URI “Vin Williams”
<sip:vwilliams@abccorp.com>”.
6.
Check Use this account in ‘From’ header field on outbound calls to have the
outbound SIP header include this display name and userinfo. If you have more than
one SIP account for the same SIP server, only one of the accounts can have this setting
checked.
7.
Choose whether this is an external or local SIP account as follows:
Q
Choose This is a local account to create a TeleVantage-based SIP URI that other
SIP-using parties use to contact you.
Q
Choose This is an account at external server to create a SIP URI used to log in to
an account on an external SIP server, for example a third-party dialing service such
as Broadvoice (www.broadvoice.com). Choose the appropriate SIP server from the
dropdown list, then fill in the external account credentials as follows:
Q
REGISTER address-of-record for this account. Check to have TeleVantage
use this account when sending REGISTER updates to the external server.
Q
This account requires authentication. If logging on to the account requires
password verification, check this field and fill in the appropriate user name and
password information. See your system administrator if you need help with this.
8.
Click OK.
CHAPTER 18. CUSTOMIZING VIEWPOINT
18-19
Customizing voice message behavior________________________
You can customize use of stutter dial tone, the message waiting light, and the order in which you
hear your voice messages. For example, you can hear your unheard (new) messages in the order
newest to oldest, and then you can hear your heard (old) messages in the order oldest to newest.
Turning off stutter dial tone
Stutter dial tone is an audible signal that alerts you to new voice messages when you pick up
your phone. Stutter dial tone is the default. To turn it off:
1.
Choose Tools > Options.
2.
In the Options dialog box, click the Phone tab.
3.
Uncheck Stutter tone.
4.
Click OK.
Enabling a message waiting light
If your phone has a CLASS-compatible message waiting light or other display feature that
indicates new voice messages, you can enable that feature in ViewPoint and use it.
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
Click the Phone \ Station Features tab.
3.
Select or clear Message waiting indicator.
4.
Click OK.
Setting voice message playback order
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
Click the Voice Messages tab.
3.
Under Voice message playback order, choose the order you prefer.
4.
Click OK.
Playing a sound when a new message arrives
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
Click the Voice Messages tab.
3.
Check Play a sound when a new message arrives.
4.
Click OK.
The sound file played is Chord.wav, located in the TeleVantage ViewPoint directory (by default
C:\Program Files\TeleVantage\Client). To play a custom sound file, name it Chord.wav and
place it in that directory.
18-20
Customizing ViewPoint for Operators________________________
If you are an Operator user, you can use the following options to make your tasks easier and
faster:
Q
Place incoming call on hold automatically. When you have several incoming calls at
once, you can have TeleVantage put each one on hold automatically until you are ready
to answer it, so that none of them go to voicemail. Edit your routing list to use the Pause
and Repeat final action, and the System Hold Greeting. See “Using routing lists” on
page 15-7.
Q
Transfer calls by dragging-and-dropping to the Phonebook pane. If you display the
Phonebook pane in the Call Monitor folder, you can transfer a call by dragging it from
the Call Monitor to a contact or an extension. This action performs a blind transfer. See
“Adding the Phonebook Pane to the Call Monitor folder” on page 8-15 and “Dragging
and dropping items” on page 8-19.
Q
Resize the Transfer To dialog box. You can make the Transfer To dialog box larger so
that you can see more users and more columns at a glance. TeleVantage remembers the
new size of the Transfer To dialog box whenever you open it.
Q
View users by workgroup. In the Extensions list and Transfer To dialog box, each
workgroup can be represented by a tab that lists its members. You can create workgroups
that represent the departments of your office, so that when transferring calls, you can see
at a glance all the users in a given department. For example, if you have to transfer a call
to Sales, you can click the Sales tab (for the Sales workgroup) and see all the members
of the Sales department and their current personal statuses. See “Having a workgroup
appear as an Extensions tab” on page 16-16.
Q
Manage all parked calls together. Right-click any Call Monitor tab, choose Show
Tabs, and check Show all parked calls.
Q
Increase ring duration. If you have a phone with multiple DKTs and you let multiple
calls ring until you can answer them, speak to your system administrator about
increasing your maximum ring duration using TVSettings.
CHAPTER 18. CUSTOMIZING VIEWPOINT
18-21
Customizing the ViewPoint display __________________________
You can customize your ViewPoint display in any of the following ways.
Showing or hiding ViewPoint window elements
You can show or hide ViewPoint’s Navigation pane, status bar, toolbars, and other window
elements by checking or unchecking their entries on the View menu.
Defining double-click behavior in the Contacts folder
Double-clicking a contact lets you either edit the information for the contact or place a call to
the contact.
To define the result of double-clicking a contact
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
Click the ViewPoint tab.
3.
Under Double clicking contacts behavior, select the desired behavior.
4.
Click OK.
Customizing columns
You can choose to show or hide columns in a folder. You can also customize columns in a folder
by moving, resizing, and sorting them. The changes you make to columns in a folder are saved
when you exit ViewPoint.
Showing and hiding columns
For each folder in ViewPoint, you can choose the columns that you want to see in the folder.
Some folders do not show all the available columns by default.
18-22
To show or hide columns in a ViewPoint folder:
1.
Choose View > Current View > Show Columns. You can also right-click in the folder
and select Show Columns. The Show Columns dialog box opens. For an explanation
of the columns, click Help.
2.
Do any of the following:
3.
Q
In the Available columns list, select a column and click Add to show it.
Q
In the Show these columns in this order list, select a column and click Remove
to hide it.
Q
Use the arrows to arrange the columns in the left-to-right order you want. The
highest columns appear furthest to the left.
Click OK.
Moving columns
To move a column, click its header and then drag and drop it to a new location. You can also
move columns by using the Show Columns dialog box (see the previous section).
Resizing columns
You can change column widths by dragging the sides of the column headers.
Sorting by column
Click a column header to sort the items in a folder by the information in that column. Click the
column header again to sort in the reverse order.
The column in the folder that contains an arrow is the column by which the display is currently
sorted. The direction of the arrow indicates the order.
CHAPTER 18. CUSTOMIZING VIEWPOINT
18-23
Keeping columns in view when you scroll horizontally
In any folder you can drag a vertical lock line to a column division, so that all columns to the
left of the lock line remain on-screen when you scroll horizontally. For example, in the Contacts
folder, you could keep the Name column on-screen when you scroll to the right, so that you can
always see the names of your contacts as you view other information about them.
The lock line is originally just inside the first column of the folder. The mouse pointer changes
to a lock icon when you hover over it. After you drag it to a column division, the locked columns
to the left are shaded.
Changing the font of a ViewPoint folder
You can choose the font and size of data in each ViewPoint folder. To do so, go to the folder,
then choose View > Current View > Font.
Changing how names are displayed
Several folders in ViewPoint display names and allow you to sort by the columns in which they
appear. For example, in the Contacts folder and the Extensions list, one column contains names.
To specify how names are displayed in a folder
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
Click the ViewPoint tab.
3.
Under Name Format, select the format that you want:
4.
Q
First name Last name - Joe Smith
Q
Last name, First name - Smith, Joe
Click OK.
Hiding and showing toolbar buttons in a folder
In any folder, you can hide or show buttons on the toolbar. Click the triangle at the far right of
the toolbar and choose Add or Remove Buttons. In the menu that opens, check or uncheck a
toolbar button to hide or show it.
18-24
Enhancing ViewPoint with Add-ins __________________________
Add-ins are custom executable (.exe) files or Dynamic Link Library (.dll) files that add extra
functionality to TeleVantage ViewPoint. Add-ins can enhance ViewPoint with custom toolbar
or menu options, or process data behind the scenes, for example, monitoring incoming calls for
Caller ID that matches certain criteria.
TeleVantage comes with the following Add-ins:
Q
TeleVantage SoftPhone. See Appendix F, “Using the TeleVantage H.323 SoftPhone.”
Q
Reverse Phone Number Lookup. See “Using the Reverse Phone Number Lookup
sample Add-in” on page 18-26.
Q
Desktop Alert. See “Using the Desktop Alert Add-in” on page 18-26.
Q
Instant Messaging. See “Sending an instant message to an extension” on page 10-5.
The sample add-ins provided with TeleVantage are located by default in C:\Program
Files\TeleVantage\Client\AddIns.
You can create custom Add-ins using the TeleVantage SDK's Add-in API, as described in the
TeleVantage Developer’s Guide, located in the \Manuals directory of the TeleVantage Master
CD.
Managing Add-ins
To add, remove, or change options for an Add-in, do the following:
1.
Choose Tools > Add-in Manager. The Add-in Manager dialog box opens.
The dialog box lists all Add-ins loaded in ViewPoint so far.
2.
To add a new Add-in, click Add. Navigate to the Add-in (a .DLL file) and select it.
To remove an Add-in, click it, then click Remove. The Add-in is detached from
TeleVantage, but the Add-in file is not deleted.
To temporarily disable an Add-in without deleting it from the list, click it, then
CHAPTER 18. CUSTOMIZING VIEWPOINT
18-25
uncheck Enabled.
To view or change options for an Add-in, click it, then click Options.
3.
When you are done adding Add-ins, click Close.
Using the Reverse Phone Number Lookup sample Add-in
The Reverse Phone Number Lookup sample Add-in enables you to right-click a phone number
and display a web page with the results of a Google™ search of the phone number. If successful,
Google displays information about the phone number including name, address and a link to a
map showing the location.
To add the Reverse Phone Number Lookup Add-in, follow the instructions in the previous
section, and select the file TVReversePhoneLookup.dll, located by default in C:\Program
Files\TeleVantage\Client\AddIns).
Once the Reverse Phone Number Lookup is added, you can perform the lookup by going to the
appropriate folder and right-clicking on any item.
Using the Desktop Alert Add-in
With the Desktop Alert Add-in you can set up custom alert windows that pop up automatically
whenever you receive a new call or voice message. The alert window has two buttons to which
you can assign custom actions. For example, on a new call alert window you could assign the
actions “Decline the call and send to voicemail” and “Grab the call and put it on hold” to the two
buttons. The pop-up alert window would then look like this:
To add the Desktop Alert Add-in, use the Add-in Manager, described in the previous section,
and select the file DesktopAlert.dll, located by default in C:\Program
Files\TeleVantage\Client\AddIns.
18-26
Customizing the Desktop Alert Add-in
To customize the alert behavior for new calls and voice messages, choose Tools > Desktop
Alert Options. The Desktop Alert Options dialog box opens.
To customize desktop alerts
1.
To enable desktop alerts for new calls or new voice messages, check the appropriate
category.
2.
To define the desktop alert behavior and actions for new calls, click Call Alert
Options. To define it for new voice messages, click Voicemail Alert Options.
3.
Click the Behavior tab.
Set any of the following options:
Q
Automatically dismiss alerts after __ seconds. Check and enter a number of
seconds after which the desktop alert window closes. You can close the window
manually at any time. If unchecked, the window stays open until manually closed.
CHAPTER 18. CUSTOMIZING VIEWPOINT
18-27
Q
Limit the number of simultaneous alerts to __. Check and enter the maximum
number of alert windows that you want open on the screen at any one time. After
that number is reached, new alerts appear in the existing windows. If unchecked, an
unlimited number of alert windows can be open at the same time.
Q
4.
Display alerts for the following folders only. Check to limit alerts to new calls or
voice messages that arrive in specific folders. Click Pick Folders to specify which
folders trigger alerts. If unchecked, a new call or new voice message in any of your
personal or shared folders triggers an alert.
Click the Actions tab.
Choose which actions are available from the alert window, as follows:
Q
Action assigned to the alert. Choose the action that you can select by clicking in
the alert window.
Q
Action assigned to the first/second button. Choose the actions that you can select
by clicking the first and second buttons in the alert window.
5.
Click the Appearance tab. Use the options on this tab to choose the font, colors, and
other appearance options for the alert window. Click Advanced Appearance Options
to set more appearance options, such as the degree of transparency for the alert
window.
6.
Click Preview to preview the appearance of the alert window with the definitions you
have made.
7.
Click OK twice to return to ViewPoint.
Using the TeleVantage Instant Messaging Add-in
The TeleVantage Instant Messaging Add-in allows you to type real-time conversations with
other users who have the add-in enabled. For more information, see “Sending an instant message
to an extension” on page 10-5.
18-28
Other customization options _______________________________
The following table refers you to customization options described elsewhere in this manual.
Feature
Description
See
Recording greetings
Create recordings that
callers hear when
they reach your
voicemail.
page 2-3, page 13-18
Recording a
grab-and-hold
greeting
Create a recording
heard by incoming
callers when you put
them on hold without
talking to them first.
page 11-8
Automatically
logging on
Log on to ViewPoint
without needing to
enter your password.
page 8-3
Changing your
password
Change the password
you use to log on to
TeleVantage
page 8-7
Displaying the Call
Monitor folder
automatically
Bring ViewPoint to the
front with the Call
Monitor showing when
you place calls from
ViewPoint.
page 11-5
Setting e-mail and
pager notification
Receive an e-mail
message or a page
whenever you have
new voice messages.
page 13-12
Setting deletion
options
Choose how voice
messages are
permanently deleted
from the Deleted
folder.
page 8-23
CHAPTER 18. CUSTOMIZING VIEWPOINT
18-29
Appendices
APPENDIX A
APPENDIX A
TELEPHONE COMMANDS QUICK
REFERENCE
CHAPTER CONTENTS
Call announcing commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Call handling commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Quick call commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Voicemail/Account menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
This appendix provides a quick reference to the TeleVantage telephone commands. For more
instructions on using TeleVantage over the phone, see Chapter 3 through Chapter 6.
Note: Press * at any time to return to a higher-level menu.
Call announcing commands _______________________________
If you have call announcing turned on, you can use the following commands when you answer
an incoming call. These commands are offered whether you pick up your phone to answer it or
answer it after hearing a call waiting beep.
Call announcing commands
1
Connect to the caller.
2
Send the caller to your voicemail.
3
Send the caller to voicemail and listen to the message as it is
being left. Press Flash 1 to pick up the call while the caller is
leaving a message.
4
If you are on a call and another call arrives, pressing 4 creates
a conference call with your current call and the new one.
Hang
up
Send the caller to the next action on your routing list. Unless
you have created a custom routing list, the next action is your
voicemail, so hanging up is the same as pressing 2.
Call handling commands __________________________________
As soon as you press Flash to put a call on hold, you will hear a context-sensitive menu of call
handling options. The caller does not hear these menu prompts. At any time while listening to
the prompts, you can press Flash again to reconnect to the caller.
Note: If you are in direct transfer mode, pressing Flash while on a call gives you the transfer
command only. If you are in direct transfer mode and would rather have access to the full
call-handling menu, talk to your system administrator.
Call Handling Commands
With a call on the line, press Flash, and then...
1
Transfer the call.
2
Send the call to voicemail.
3
Disconnect from the call.
4
Reconnect to the call.
5
Create a conference call.
6
Park the call.
7
Silent hold (stops menu until next keypress).
8
Send a trunk Flash command to an external Centrex or
PBX system rather than to TeleVantage.
#
Get an internal dial tone (dial a new call or use telephone
commands beginning with *).
*11
Enter an account code for the call or change the account
code already entered.
*16
Start recording the call. Press again to stop recording.
Flash
A-2
Reconnect to the call.
Quick call commands_____________________________________
Pressing * at a dial tone gives you quick access to the commands listed in the following table
Some or all of these commands may be unavailable to you if your system administrator has not
granted you permission.
Quick call commands
*0
Hear your phone’s station ID, extension and other
information. Pressing *00 logs you out from a station
you have been using as a visitor, and returns the station
to its default user.
*10
Enable and disable hands-free answering. See “Using
hands-free answering” on page 4-4.
*11
Enter an account code for the current call or the call you
are about to dial.
*12
Enable and disable voice-first answering. See
“Receiving internal intercom calls with voice-first
answering” on page 4-5.
*14
Call as a queue. See the next table for details.
*15
Place a page or an intercom call. To place a page
(1-way audio to multiple users), dial *15 plus a
workgroup’s extension. To place an intercom call
(2-way audio), dial *15 plus a user’s extension. See
“Placing a page or intercom call” on page 3-6.
*16
Start and stop recording a call. You can press *16 at the
dial tone, then dial the call. You can also press
Flash *16 at any point during the call to start or stop
recording.
*17
Associate a trunk with an external station, so that
subsequent placed calls are treated as originating from
the station. This command is valid only after logging on
to an account that has an assigned external station.
*18
Test the Internet connection between a VoIP
TeleVantage station and the TeleVantage Server. After
pressing *18 from the VoIP station, the system echoes
back anything you say, enabling you to judge delay. To
end the test, press # or hang up. This command is
available only from VoIP stations.
APPENDIX A. TELEPHONE COMMANDS QUICK REFERENCE
A-3
Quick call commands
A-4
*19
Test hold audio. Enter the ID number of a hold audio
source to hear the audio exactly as callers on hold are
hearing it. See your system administrator for the ID
numbers of hold audio sources.
*50-56
See the next table for a list of quick call commands for
call center agents and supervisors.
*57
Monitor another user’s call. The other parties in the call
cannot hear you.
*58
Coach another user’s call. The other user can hear you,
but the other parties in the call cannot.
*59
Join another user’s call as a full participant, able to hear
and be heard by all parties.
*66
Redial the last call you placed.
*67
Block outbound Caller ID for the next call. Dial *67
followed by the phone number. (See also *82.)
*69
Dial the phone number of your last incoming call.
*70
Disable call waiting for the next call.
*82
Unblock (restore) outbound Caller ID for the next call.
Dial *82 followed by the phone number. (See also *67.)
*91
Answer another ringing phone. Optionally, enter the
extension of the phone to answer. Press # to connect.
(See also *99.)
*92
Retrieve a parked call.
*93
Dial a TeleVantage user by name.
*95
Manage your calls on hold.
*96
Log off from a remote session. Only available at a dial
tone when logged in at a remote phone.
*99
Answer another ringing phone within your workgroup.
(See also *91.)
Quick call commands for call center agents
The following commands are available only for agents in a call center queue.
Quick call commands
*14
Call as a queue. This logs your subsequent outbound
calls as being placed by the queue, to keep track of
which outbound calls are queue-related.
To call as a queue, press *14<queue’s extension>#.
To cancel calling as the queue, and revert to calling as
yourself, press *14#.
*50
Select the personal status Available. This personal
status makes you available, and you start receiving
calls from all queues to which you are signed in.
In the Available personal status, you receive both
queue calls and non-queue (personal calls). To receive
only queue calls, choose the personal status Available
(Queue Only).
*51
Select the personal status Available (Queue Only). This
personal status makes you available, and you start
receiving calls from all queues to which you are signed
in.
In the Available (Queue Only) status, only queue calls
ring your phone. Non-queue calls are sent directly to
your voicemail. To have all your calls ring your phone,
make yourself available by choosing the personal
status Available.
*52
Select the personal status Available (Non Queue). This
personal status makes you unavailable and the call
center queues stop sending you calls.
Important: Use this command only at the end of your
workday, to preserve the accuracy of queue statistics. To leave
your phone temporarily during your workday, use *53.
You can also end your workday by choosing any
personal status other than Available, Available (Queue
Only), or On Break.
APPENDIX A. TELEPHONE COMMANDS QUICK REFERENCE
A-5
Quick call commands
*53
Go on break. You become unavailable and the call
center queues stop sending you calls, but your workday
is still ongoing for statistical purposes. This command
changes your personal status to On Break.
While you are on break, non-queue calls continue to
ring your phone.
*54
End wrap-up. This command terminates the wrap-up
time that follows a queue call. During wrap-up time the
queue does not send you calls. Ending wrap-up makes
you available to receive queue calls again.
*55
Hear real-time call center statistics for a queue. To use
*55, you must have been given permission to do so by
your TeleVantage system administrator.
*56
Sign in or out of a queue. When signed out of a queue,
you do not receive calls from that queue even when you
are available. To use *56, you must have been given
permission to do so by your TeleVantage system
administrator.
Voicemail/Account menu __________________________________
The Voicemail/Account menu lets you listen to your voicemail, send messages to other users'
voicemail, and change your TeleVantage account settings. You need to log on to access this
menu.
Logging on
To log on to the Voicemail/Account menu, pick up your phone and enter # <your extension> #
<your password> #
When logging on from your own TeleVantage phone, you can skip the extension. Enter # #
<your password> #.
If your voice mailbox is almost full when you log on, TeleVantage prompts you to empty your
Deleted folder. Messages in the Deleted folder count against your total space for voice files. For
more information, see “Managing your voicemail quota” on page 13-9.
Logging on from a remote location
Depending on how your system is set up, you can log on from a remote phone by calling in and
pressing # at the auto attendant or 9 at a voicemail greeting. The auto attendant logon key may
be different in your system. Check with your system administrator for instructions on remote
logon.
A-6
Voicemail/Account menu commands
Summary of Commands
1
Voice messages (Inbox folder)
2
Voice messages (Saved folder)
1
41
44
7
#
3
Replay
2 Next message
Reply
42 Forward
Call back & delete 5 Previous message
Rewind
8 Undelete all
Skip message preamble; skip rest of message
Send voice message
1 Send
4 Append
* Cancel
4
3 Rerecord
6 Mark Private
2 Next greeting
5 Revert
3 Make active
6 Record new greeting
2 To internal
5 Query forwarding
3 To external
6 Toggle ignore call rules
Call forwarding
1 To this number
4 Cancel forwarding
6
2 Review
5 Mark Urgent
Manage greetings
1 Replay
4 Rerecord
7 Delete
5
3 Delete message
43 Call back
6 Save
9 Fast Forward
Account preferences
1 Personal status (see next table)
2 Record voice title
3 Change password
4 Change call notification # 9 Set as external station
7
Disconnect from TeleVantage
#
Dial tone to start another call
Notes
Q
Option 7 is available only when logging on from an outside line.
Q
Option 5 1 forwards your calls to the phone at which you are located. This phone can be
a TeleVantage extension or an external number. Using this command at a TeleVantage
extension logs you in to that extension. See “Placing outbound calls from shared
stations” on page 7-2.
APPENDIX A. TELEPHONE COMMANDS QUICK REFERENCE
A-7
Q
Option 4 3 reads the callback number to you. You can press 1 to dial it, or press 2 to dial
other numbers such as the user's extension or any of the contact's numbers. You can also
press 2 # to dial any other number.
Personal Status commands
The commands shown in the following table are available after choosing 6 1 from the
voicemail/account menu:
Personal Status commands
log on and choose 6 1 from the voicemail/account menu
A-8
1
Available
2
Do Not Disturb
3
In a Meeting
4
Out of the Office
5
On Vacation
6
Available (Queue only)
7
Available (non-Queue)
8
On Break
9
Custom (followed by 1 to select your first custom status, 2 to
select your second custom status, and so on)
APPENDIX B
APPENDIX B
WORKING AS AN AGENT IN A CALL
CENTER QUEUE
CHAPTER CONTENTS
Whether this chapter applies to you . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Starting and ending your shift, and taking breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
What call center agents need to know to get the job done . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Working at different phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Signing in and out of a queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Receiving and handling queue calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Placing calls from a queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Popping up caller information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
Working remotely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
Whether this chapter applies to you _________________________
This chapter provides instructions for working as an agent in a TeleVantage call center. Whether
or not this chapter applies to you depends on the TeleVantage call distribution method that your
office uses, as follows:
Q
Use this chapter if you are an agent in a TeleVantage call center queue that was set up
using separately licensed call center agent licenses.
Q
Do not use this chapter if you are an agent in a TeleVantage ACD workgroup that was
set up by using an ACD workgroup user and a routing list that sends calls to agents who
are members of a workgroup. If you are an agent in an ACD workgroup, see Appendix
D, “Working as an Agent in an ACD Workgroup.”
For complete information about setting up and running a TeleVantage call center, see the
TeleVantage Call Center Administrator’s Guide.
Starting and ending your shift, and taking breaks ______________
Important: Do not use this section if you are disallowed from changing your own personal
status. In that case, a supervisor will control your workflow. Talk to your queue manager or
administrator about how to work in the queue.
As a call center agent, you control your workday by changing your personal status. At the
beginning of your shift, you make yourself ready. At the end of your shift, you make yourself
unavailable. While you are ready, you receive calls from all queues for which you are signed in.
When you make yourself unavailable, queues stop sending calls to you.
Note: If you have to temporarily leave your phone during your shift, choose TeleVantage’s On
Break personal status.
The following sections describe which personal statuses to use to make yourself ready and
unavailable. For instructions on changing your personal status, see Chapter 9.
Starting your shift
To begin receiving queue calls, make yourself ready by doing either of the following:
Q
Q
Using your telephone keypad, press either of the following at a dial tone:
Q
*50. This selects the Available personal status.
Q
*51. This selects the Available (Queue Only) personal status.
In ViewPoint, select either of the following personal statuses:
Q
Available. You receive personal calls (calls to your extension) and queue calls.
Q
Available (Queue Only). You receive only queue calls. Personal calls are sent
directly to your voicemail.
If you will be making outgoing calls from the queue, see “Placing calls from a queue” on
page B-8.
B-2
Ending your shift
Note: Use this procedure at the end of your shift only. To take a break during your shift, use the
On Break personal status to ensure the integrity of call center statistics. See the next section,
“Taking a break.”
To stop receiving queue calls, make yourself unavailable by doing either of the following:
Q
Using your telephone keypad, press *52 at a dial tone. This selects the personal status
Available (Non-Queue).
Q
In ViewPoint, select any personal status whose Queue calls preference is set to No,
other than On Break. For example, select the Personal status Available (Non-Queue) to
receive personal calls without receiving queue calls.
Important: If you have marked your outbound calls as being from the queue, you must switch
back to calling as yourself. Otherwise your outbound calls will continue to be marked as coming
from the queue (and may be monitored), even though you have ended your shift. See “Placing
calls from a queue” on page B-8.
Taking a break
To take a break from answering queue calls during your shift, do one of the following:
Q
Pick up the phone and press *53.
Q
In ViewPoint, select the personal status On Break.
Note: If you leave your phone without selecting On Break, queue calls might be sent to your
phone, and callers will hear an interval of ringing before they are placed back on the queue.
When you finish your break and are ready to receive calls again, make yourself ready again.
Press *51 on your phone or select the personal status Available or Available (Queue Only).
What call center agents need to know to get the job done _______
If you are working as a call center agent, you should be aware of the following:
Q
While you are ready, always take queue calls that are sent to you. If a queue call
rings your phone and you do not answer, the caller will hear ringing and then be placed
back on the queue. Also, if you do not pick up a ringing queue call, or decline it using
the call announcing options, the queue might automatically place you in the On Break
personal status.
Q
Use the On Break personal status only to leave your phone during your shift.
Making yourself unavailable by using other statuses, such as Available (Non-Queue) or
Do Not Disturb, signals TeleVantage that you are ending your shift (these statistics are
reset daily).
Q
Your personal status can be changed by others. If you do not answer queue calls that
ring your phone, the queue can automatically place you in the On Break personal status.
Also, a supervisor can change your personal status at any time.
APPENDIX B. WORKING AS AN AGENT IN A CALL CENTER QUEUE
B-3
Working at different phones ________________________________
If you need to work at a phone other than your default station, or if you have no default station
and always work at a variety of phones, add the following steps to your routine:
1.
When you first sit down at a new phone to receive calls, before marking yourself as
Available, log on and forward your calls to your current location. Otherwise, your call
center performance might be logged under another agent’s name. Use either of the
following methods:
Q
Pick up the phone and log on by pressing # <extension> # <password> #. Once
logged on, press 5 1 to forward calls to their current location.
Q
Start the TeleVantage ViewPoint. The Select Station dialog appears. Select the
second logon option, Use station <x> to place and answer calls as <name>.
Check Forward my calls to this station.
2.
After you have logged on, make yourself ready as described in “Starting your shift” on
page B-2.
3.
When you are finished using a phone, log off by either picking up the phone and
pressing *0 0, or by exiting ViewPoint.
Note: When you are logged in at a station other than your own, voice message indicators apply
to you. For example, if you hear stutter dial tone or see a message waiting light on the phone, it
means you have new voice messages.
B-4
Signing in and out of a queue ______________________________
You can be either signed in or signed out of each queue to which you belong. Only when you
are signed in do you receive calls from the queue. When you are signed out of a queue, you can
see and affect its calls in the Call Monitor, but the queue does not send calls to your phone.
As an agent, you might be signed out for the following reasons:
Q
You are a supervisor who wants to observe a queue and manually take calls if necessary,
but you do not want queue calls to ring your phone.
Q
You are an agent who is a member of multiple queues, and you periodically change
which queue you receive calls from. You receive calls only from the queues to which
you are signed in.
To sign in or out of a queue
You must have permission to sign yourself in or out of queues. If you do not have permission,
talk to your TeleVantage system administrator about signing in and out.
Using ViewPoint
1.
Choose Tools > Queue Sign In/Out. The Queue Sign In/Out dialog box opens,
displaying all queues for which you are a member. A check mark for a queue indicates
that you are signed in to that queue.
2.
Check the box next to a queue’s name to sign in to that queue, or clear the checkbox
to sign out.
3.
Click OK.
Note: In the Queue Monitor or Call Monitor folder, you can also right-click a queue tab to sign in
or out of that queue.
Using the telephone
Using your telephone keypad, press *56 at a dial tone. Enter the extension of the queue for which
you want to sign in or out followed by #, for example, “*56 102 #”.
Seeing whether you are signed in or out of a queue
In the Queue Monitor and Call Monitor folders, the tab for a queue displays an asterisk (*) if
you are signed out from that queue.
APPENDIX B. WORKING AS AN AGENT IN A CALL CENTER QUEUE
B-5
Receiving and handling queue calls _________________________
You can receive and handle queue calls by using either the telephone commands or ViewPoint.
When the queue sends a call to you, your phone rings and the call appears in ViewPoint’s Call
Monitor folder. Queue calls ignore your routing list and only ring your “Where I Am” location
(your station or call forwarding number).
To answer a call, do either of the following:
Q
Pick up the phone.
Q
Click the incoming call in the Call Monitor and choose Actions > Take Call. If your
phone is on-hook, it rings to connect you to the call.
After you are connected to a queue call, you can use any TeleVantage call-handling features
such as transfer, park, mute, and so forth.
Note: Your queue calls are not shared, even if you are sharing your Call Monitor folder.
Viewing your position in the queue
If you have permission to see ViewPoint’s Queue Monitor folder, you can use it to monitor your
position in the queue, and determine when you are likely to receive the next call. See
“Monitoring the position of agents in the queue” on page C-13.
Being monitored or coached by a supervisor
Call Center supervisors have the ability to supervise your queue calls on the following levels:
Q
Monitoring. A supervisor may listen in on any of your calls without you or the caller
hearing. You will be unaware of the monitoring unless you have the permission View
agents being monitored. If you do, the monitor appears in the Call Monitor as an
indented line under the call.
Q
Coaching. A supervisor may speak to you during a call without the caller hearing.
Coaching appears in the Call Monitor as a separate line under the call. If you are being
coached, try not to speak to the coach, as the caller will not be aware of the coach’s
presence on the line.
Q
Joining. A supervisor may join your call, essentially creating a three-way conference
call in which all parties can hear each other. For more about conference calls, see
“Creating conference calls” on page 12-12.
By default, only queue calls are susceptible to being supervised. This includes inbound queue
calls and outbound calls that you have associated with a queue (“Placing calls from a queue” on
page B-8).
B-6
Having your calls recorded
The queue may be configured to record some or all of your queue calls. You receive no
indication that a call is being recorded. The queue may be configured to place call recordings in
your Inbox as new voice messages.
Your non-queue calls will not be recorded unless the TeleVantage system has been configured
to record all calls.
Using the Call Monitor tabs
When you are an agent in a call center queue, your Call Monitor folder displays the following
tabs:
Q
A tab that shows the queue’s calls, with the name of the queue on it. If the tab name
appears with an asterisk, it means that you are signed out from that queue.
Note: You must have permission to see this tab. If you do not see it, see your
TeleVantage system administrator.
Q
The My Phone tab, which shows all the calls that are being handled by your phone,
including any queue calls you have taken.
Q
The All tab, which shows all your queue and personal calls together.
If you are an agent in multiple queues, the Call Monitor displays a tab for each queue.
Click the My Phone tab or a queue tab to view only the calls for that tab. Click the All tab to
view all calls at once.
Note: Your Call Monitor folder may display other tabs than the ones described in this section.
See Chapter 11 for a full description of the Call Monitor.
APPENDIX B. WORKING AS AN AGENT IN A CALL CENTER QUEUE
B-7
Wrap-up time
After you finish a queue call, you are given wrap-up time to complete any work relating to the
call. During your wrap-up time you will not receive any queue calls. Your TeleVantage system
administrator sets how much wrap-up time you have.
While you are in wrap-up time,
appears in ViewPoint status bar.
Terminating your wrap-up time early
To terminate your wrap-up time early and mark yourself as ready to take queue calls again, do
either of the following:
Q
Click
in ViewPoint status bar.
Q
Using your telephone keypad, press *54 at a dial tone.
Viewing queue activity
The Queue Monitor folder in ViewPoint displays a list of agents in the queue and up-to-date
queue statistics. You can use it to see the status of other agents in the queue and your current
position in the queue, among other things.
To see the Queue Monitor folder in your ViewPoint, you must have the appropriate permission.
For a description of the Queue Monitor folder, see “Monitoring queue statistics” on page C-3.
Placing calls from a queue _________________________________
If you are a call center agent and you place a call at your desk using the telephone or the Client,
by default TeleVantage treats the call as one made by you. You can choose instead to place calls
as a queue, which may be necessary for your work as a call center agent. When you place calls
as a queue, TeleVantage treats the call as if the queue placed it. Other agents can see it in their
Call Monitors, it can be monitored by supervisors, and statistics and reports can accurately
reflect queue activity.
When calling as a queue, your calls appear on both the My Phone tab and the queue tab in your
Call Monitor. The calls are logged both in your personal Call Log and the queue’s Call Log, with
the queue name in the From column.
Important: When you are done placing calls as a queue, be sure to switch back to calling as
yourself. If you don’t, your personal calls will be treated as queue calls, meaning they will be seen
by all agents and will throw off queue statistics.
To place calls as a queue using ViewPoint
On the ViewPoint status bar, your name and extension are a dropdown list. Pull down the list
and select the queue as which you want to place calls.
B-8
To revert to placing calls as yourself, select yourself from the dropdown list.
To place calls as a queue using the telephone
Pick up your phone and press *14<queue’s extension># at a dial tone.
To switch back to calling as yourself, press *14# at a dial tone.
Determining whom you are calling as
ViewPoint’s status bar (at the bottom of ViewPoint window) displays whether the system is
treating outbound calls from its station as being from you or from someone else.
You can also learn from whom a station is placing outbound calls by picking up the station and
pressing *0. The station information recording includes the line, “The current extension is
<Ext.> calling as <Queue>.”
Q
<Ext.> is the extension of the last user who logged in at the station.
Q
<Queue> is the name of the queue that outbound calls are marked as being from.
Popping up caller information ______________________________
You can use the TeleVantage Contact Manager Assistant to pop up information about callers
that you have in another contact manager application. Callers must be contacts in one of the
following contact manager or customer relationship management applications:
Q
Act! 3.0, 4.0, and 2000
Q
Goldmine 4.0 and 5.0, and Goldmine Business Contact Manager 5.7
Q
Goldmine FrontOffice 2000
Q
Microsoft Outlook 98, 2000, and XP
For instructions on configuring the TeleVantage Contact Manager Assistant, see its online Help.
Act! does not require the Contact Manager Assistant to pop up contact information.
Note: Your office might also use a custom screen pop application created with ViewPoint API.
If this is the case, see your TeleVantage system administrator for instructions on using it.
Working remotely ________________________________________
For instructions on using TeleVantage remotely, see Chapter 6.
APPENDIX B. WORKING AS AN AGENT IN A CALL CENTER QUEUE
B-9
APPENDIX C
APPENDIX C
SUPERVISING A CALL CENTER
QUEUE
CHAPTER CONTENTS
About supervising queues in ViewPoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Viewing current queue calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Monitoring queue statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Supervising other agents’ calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
Managing agents’ status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
Managing a queue’s voice mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20
About supervising queues in ViewPoint ______________________
This appendix describes the process of supervising a TeleVantage call center queue. For
complete instructions on setting up and managing a TeleVantage call center, see the TeleVantage
Call Center Administrator’s Guide.
You can assign agents any number of queue permissions that give them the ability to supervise
a queue. Supervisors are merely agents with extra permissions. Supervisory tasks include the
following:
Q
Configuring the queue in the Administrator, including the agents that belong to it
Q
Signing agents in or out for the queue
Q
Viewing real-time queue statistics in the TeleVantage ViewPoint
Q
Changing an agent’s personal status
Q
Managing a queue’s voice mailbox
Q
Supervising agent conversations by monitoring or coaching
You assign permissions separately for each queue. To give an agent supervisor permissions in
more than one queue, you must edit the agent separately in each queue.
For instructions on adding agents to a queue and setting their permission levels, see the
TeleVantage Call Center Administrator’s Guide.
Exempting supervisors from receiving queue calls
Because supervisors are agents in the queue, by default they receive queue calls when they are
ready, just as other agents do. To exempt an agent from receiving calls from a queue, sign the
agent out for that queue, or configure the agent as an Observer using the TeleVantage
Administrator (see the TeleVantage Call Center Administrator’s Guide).
When supervisors are signed out from a queue, the queue does not send calls to them. However,
supervisors can watch queue calls in the Call Monitor folder and answer them if necessary using
the Take call command. They can also perform all other queue monitoring and managing tasks
when they are signed out.
For instructions on signing a supervisor out, see “Signing agents in or out of a queue” on
page C-18.
Viewing current queue calls ________________________________
Agents with the permission Access Queue call monitor can view all current queue activity on
the queue’s tab in ViewPoint’s Call Monitor folder. Note that only calls associated with the
queue appear in the queue’s tab. If the agent is on a personal call or a call from another queue,
it does not appear in the queue tab.
For more information, see “Using the Call Monitor tabs” on page B-7.
C-2
Monitoring queue statistics ________________________________
Agents who have the permission Monitor queue statistics set to Allow can monitor a queue’s
performance by using either the telephone commands or the Queue Monitor folder in
ViewPoint.
Viewing queue statistics in the Queue Monitor folder
The Queue Monitor folder lets you monitor queue activity in real time. To open the Queue
Monitor folder, click Call Monitor > Queue Monitor in the navigation pane.
Each queue for which you have permission to view statistics appears as a tab at the bottom of
the folder. Click a queue’s tab to see statistics for that queue and the agents in that queue.
For a detailed description of when Queue Monitor statistics reset to zero, see “When statistics
are reset” on page C-12.
Note: You can continue to use the Call Monitor while you are in the Queue Monitor. Choose
View > Calls Pane to add the Call Monitor to the Queue Monitor folder as a separate pane.
The Agents pane
At the top of the Queue Monitor folder, the Agents pane displays the names of all agents in the
queue, their current statuses, and their performance, including inbound and outbound calls.
You can have the Agents pane display statistics by day or by shift. Choose Actions > Show
agent statistics by day/shift. For information about shifts, see the TeleVantage Call Center
Administrator’s Guide.
Note: The Agents pane’s statistics are those for the selected queue only. For example, the Calls
answered field shows the number of calls an agent has answered for this queue. The agent may
have answered other calls such as personal calls or calls from other queues.
APPENDIX C. SUPERVISING A CALL CENTER QUEUE
C-3
The Agents pane displays the information shown in the following table. Some columns may be
hidden by default. To show them, choose View > Current View > Show Columns.
Agents Pane Information
Icon showing the agent’s phone as on-hook or
off-hook.
Availability
Icon for the agent’s current personal status.
Personal Status icon
Distribution Order
The order in which agents are scheduled to
receive calls. The order is dependent on the
queue’s distribution algorithm. The agent who
will receive the next call is the agent with the
lowest number among currently Ready
agents.
This column may be disabled. See “Enabling
and disabling the Distribution Order column”
on page C-15.
Name
C-4
Agent’s name.
Agents Pane Information
Agent State
Agent’s current level of availability to take
calls from this queue. Note than an agent can
be in different states for different queues at
the same time. The possible states are:
Ready. The agent is signed in, and in the
personal status Available or Available (Queue
Only), and the phone is on-hook. The agent is
ready to take a call.
Active Inbound. The agent is on an inbound
call from this queue.
Active Outbound. The agent is on an
outbound call associated with this queue.
Wrap-up Inbound. The agent is in the
wrap-up period immediately following the end
of an inbound call associated with this queue.
Wrap-up Outbound. The agent is in the
wrap-up period immediately following the end
of an outbound call associated with this
queue.
Standby. The agent is On Break, or is in a
non-queue call (such as a personal call or a
call from another queue.)
Signed out. The agent is signed out of this
queue and so is not taking calls from this
queue.
Unavailable. The agent is in a personal status
other than Available or Available (Queue
Only), and so is not taking queue calls.
No answer. The agent did not answer the last
queue call. The queue does not send calls to
agents in the No Answer status. TeleVantage
automatically removes the agent from No
Answer status after a certain time based on
what caused the No Answer status.
Offering. The agent's phone is ringing with a
call from this queue, but the agent has not
accepted the call yet.
APPENDIX C. SUPERVISING A CALL CENTER QUEUE
C-5
Agents Pane Information
Time in State
The length of time that the agent has been in
the current state for this queue. Times are
displayed in the following format: days:
hours:minutes:seconds.
Calls answered
Number of incoming calls from this queue that
the agent has answered since the beginning
of the queue’s current display period. Does
not include calls the agent participated in but
did not answer (see Total Calls - All)
Calls placed
Number of outbound calls associated with this
queue that the agent has placed since the
beginning of the queue’s current display
period. Does not include calls the agent
participated in but did not place (see Total
Calls - All)
Time on calls
The total time the agent has spent on this
queue’s calls since the beginning of the shift.
You can show this column separately for
inbound calls, outbound calls, and all calls.
Longest call
The length of time of the longest queue call
(including wrap-up time) that the agent
handled since the beginning of the shift.
You can show this column separately for
inbound calls, outbound calls, and all calls.
Avg. call
Average length of the agents' queue calls
(including wrap-up time) since the beginning
of the shift.
You can show this column separately for
inbound calls, outbound calls, and all calls.
Longest talk
The length of time of the longest single call
the agent handled (not including wrap-up
time).
You can show this column separately for
inbound calls, outbound calls, and all calls.
Away
C-6
A check mark indicates that the agent has
been automatically placed in On Break status
by the queue for having let his or her most
recent queue calls ring unanswered.
Agents Pane Information
Forced Break
Number of times the queue has automatically
placed the agent in On Break status for letting
queue calls ring unanswered, since the
beginning of the current display period.
Inbound Calls
Number of incoming queue calls that the
agent has participated in since the beginning
of the queue's current display period,
including inbound calls transferred from other
agents in the queue.
Longest wrap-up
The length of time that the agent spent in the
longest wrap-up after a call.
No Answer
Number of queue calls to the agent that rang
unanswered, since the beginning of the
current display period.
Outbound Calls
Number of outbound queue calls that the
agent has participated in since the beginning
of the queue's current display period,
including outbound bound calls placed by
other agents in the queue and then
transferred to this agent.
Overflow
The agent’s overflow tier. If no number is
listed the agent is a primary agent (assuming
the overflow skill default is set to 0).
Personal Status
Name
Name of the agent’s current personal status.
Queue
Name of the agent’s queue.
Signed in
A check mark indicates that the agent is
signed in to this queue.
Total calls - All
The total number of calls associated with this
queue in which the agent has participated
since the beginning of the queue’s current
display period. Includes inbound and
outbound calls, and calls where the agent did
not answer or place the call (for example,
joining another agent in a conference call or
having another agent transfer a call to him)
APPENDIX C. SUPERVISING A CALL CENTER QUEUE
C-7
The Queue Statistics pane
At the bottom of the Queue Monitor folder, the Queue Statistics pane displays statistics for the
queue as a whole. To show or hide the Queue Statistics pane, choose View > Queue Statistics
Pane.
You can display queue statistics for inbound calls only, outbound calls only, or all calls, by
clicking the appropriate button above the Queue statistics by day section.
Note: For outbound calls to appear in the Outbound Statistics section, agents must place calls
as the queue. See “Placing calls from a queue” on page B-8.
The Queue Statistics pane is divided into the following sections:
Q
Current status. Statistics for the number of agents and calls currently in the queue.
Q
Queue statistics by day. Statistics for calls since the beginning of the current day.
These statistics automatically reset to zero at midnight.
Q
Queue statistics by period and shift. Statistics for calls during the current period and
shift, compared to the previous period and shift. When the current period or shift ends,
the current statistics automatically reset to zero, and the totals that had accumulated are
moved into the Previous column.
For detailed descriptions of when day, period, and shift statistics reset to zero, see “When
statistics are reset” on page C-12.
Note: Queue statistics by shift are not updated during gaps between shifts. For example, if one
shift ends at noon and the next shift begins at 12:30, queue activity between 12:00 and 12:30 is
not reflected in the shift totals.
The Queue Statistics pane displays the statistics shown in the following table.
Queue Statistics Pane
Current Status
Queue status
Whether the queue is currently distributing
calls to agents. The possible statuses are:
Open. The queue is distributing its calls
to ready agents as normal.
Closed. The queue is closed. No calls
are being distributed to agents.
Closed - No agents. All agents in the
queue are currently signed out, so the
queue is automatically sending its calls
directly to voicemail.
C-8
Queue Statistics Pane
Agents on break
Number of agents currently signed in and in
the On Break personal status.
Agents ready
Number of agents waiting to receive queue
calls. Ready agents are those who are signed
in, have their personal statuses set to
Available or Available (Queue Only), and are
not currently off hook or in a wrap-up period.
Signed in and
available
Number of agents eligible to receive queue
calls, including those currently on a call or in
wrap-up period. To receive queue calls an
agent must be signed in and in a personal
status whose Queue calls field is set to “Yes,”
such as Available or Available (Queue Only.)
% agents ready
The percentage of agents eligible to receive
queue calls who are currently waiting for a
call. The others are either off hook or in a
wrap-up period.
Calls waiting
Number of calls currently waiting on the
queue.
Calls being placed
Number outbound calls in the process of
being placed. (Connected outbound calls are
not counted.)
Agents wrap-up
Number of agents currently in the wrap-up
period following a queue call.
Inbound Statistics
Calls answered
Number of calls answered by an agent.
Calls transferred out
Number of calls transferred out of the queue
without being handled by an agent, as a result
of callers pressing the transfer key.
Calls received
Total number of calls received, including
abandoned calls.
Calls abandoned
Number of callers who hung up without talking
to an agent.
Calls completed
Number of completed calls in which a caller
finished talked with an agent. Completed calls
are calls that ended by hanging up or
transferring.
APPENDIX C. SUPERVISING A CALL CENTER QUEUE
C-9
Queue Statistics Pane
Avg. talk time
Length of the average time that callers spent
talking with agents.
Calls to voicemail
Number of calls that went to voicemail without
being handled by an agent, as a result of
callers pressing the key to leave voicemail.
Total talk time
Total number of minutes that callers have
spent talking with agents.
Longest time
Length of the longest time in each of the
following categories (by day only):
Talk time. Time spent talking with an
agent.
Wait time. Time spent waiting on the
queue.
Average wait time
Average length of time callers waited on the
queue for each of the following categories:
All calls. All inbound calls to the queue.
Answered calls. All calls to the queue in
which the caller spoke with an agent.
Abandoned calls. All calls to the queue
in which the caller hung up or left a voice
message.
Redirection
Number of calls that have been automatically
redirected by the queue, for each of the
following categories:
Maximum hold. Calls that reached the
maximum wait time without being
answered.
Queue busy. Calls that were redirected
because the queue was too busy.
Queue closed. Calls that were redirected
because the queue was closed.
Outbound Statistics
C-10
Calls placed
Number of outbound calls placed by this
queue.
Calls completed
Number of connected calls that are now over.
Calls connected
Number of calls that have connected with the
called party.
Queue Statistics Pane
Longest time*
Length of the longest time by one call.
Average time*
Length of the average time over all calls.
Total time*
Total number of minutes from all calls.
* Talk time = Time spent talking with an agent.
Combined Statistics
Calls attempted
Total number of inbound calls received and
outbound calls placed.
Calls completed
Total number of inbound and outbound calls
completed.
Calls connected
Total number of inbound calls that were
answered and outbound calls that were
connected with the called party.
Longest time*
Longest call and talk time counting both
inbound and outbound calls.
Average time*
Average call and talk time counting both
inbound and outbound calls.
Total time*
Total call and talk time adding inbound and
outbound calls.
* Talk time = Time spent talking with an agent.
APPENDIX C. SUPERVISING A CALL CENTER QUEUE
C-11
When statistics are reset
Statistics are reset to zero at the following times:
Statistic type
When reset
Statistics by day
At midnight, or when the Server is restarted.
Statistics by period
On 15, 30, or 60 minute intervals, depending
on your configuration for Statistics period
interval. The intervals are counted from
midnight, so a 15-minute interval would reset
at 12:15, 12:30, 12:45, etc.
All queues that share the same statistics
period interval reset at the same clock time.
Note: Period statistics are always reset
counting from midnight, not from the time of a
Server restart. This could result in a short
period. For example, if the Server was started
at 9:50, the period would still end at 10:00,
resulting in a 10-minute period.
Statistics by shift
At the end of the shift, as you defined it (see
the TeleVantage Call Center Administrator’s
Guide).
Note: When a call overlaps a reset time, some statistics for it will appear in the first grouping,
some in the second, depending on when the statistic is counted. For example, Calls Answered is
counted as soon as the call is answered, while Calls Completed is counted when the call ends.
Therefore, if a call lasts from 11:58 PM to 12:20 AM, it would be counted as a Call Answered in
Day 1, and a Call Completed in Day 2.
When statistics are refreshed
By default the Queue Monitor folder refreshes with new statistics as soon as they become
available, providing a real-time picture of queue activity. You can enter a slower refresh rate to
improve the responsiveness of agents’ ViewPoint applications. You should change this setting
if you find that agents’ ViewPoint applications are responding too slowly.
To change the Queue Monitor refresh rate
C-12
1.
In the TeleVantage Administrator, choose Tools > System Settings. The System
Settings dialog box opens.
2.
Choose the Queue tab.
3.
Enter the refresh rate you want (in milliseconds) in Queue statistics refresh interval.
4.
Click OK.
About agents’ personal status and state
It is important to distinguish between an agent’s personal status and state.
Q
Personal status. Determines whether the agent receives queue calls. An agent's
personal status is the same across all queues.
Q
State. Displays the agent's current activity, for example, whether the agent is currently
in a queue call. An agent's state can be different in different queues. For example, if an
agent is a member of Queue A and Queue B, and the agent is currently in a call for Queue
A, his state would be Active in Queue A and Standby in Queue B.
For a description of agent states, see the Agent State column in the Agents pane table on
page C-4.
Monitoring the position of agents in the queue
The Queue Monitor’s Distribution Order column—displayed as
in the Agents pane—shows
the order in which ready agents are scheduled to receive calls. The agent with a 1 in the column
is scheduled to receive the next call, followed by the agent with a 2 in the column, and so on.
Unavailable agents do not receive a position number. Unavailable agents include agents who are
signed out or in a personal status that makes them unavailable such as Do Not Disturb or
Available (Non-Queue).
Note: You can enable or disable the Distribution Order column. See the next section.
The agent with a 1 in the distribution order will not necessarily receive the next call. The
distribution order reflects the scheduled order according to the queue’s distribution algorithm,
but it does not reflect which agents are currently Ready. A Ready agent might have 5 in the
Distribution Order column and yet receive the next call because all other agents are busy at the
moment. The agent who will receive the next call is the agent with the lowest distribution order
number among Ready agents.
Distribution order numbers for overflow agents follow those for primary agents. For example,
if a queue has 10 ready primary agents, the first scheduled overflow agent will display 11 in the
Distribution Order column. The distribution order of overflow agents is determined first by tier,
and then within each tier by the queue’s distribution algorithm. For more about overflow agents,
see the TeleVantage Call Center Administrator’s Guide.
APPENDIX C. SUPERVISING A CALL CENTER QUEUE
C-13
The following table shows how agent positions are calculated for each distribution algorithm.
The descriptions apply separately to primary agents and to each tier of overflow agents.
Algorithm
Agent positions
Top down
Agents’ positions are ordered by their order in
the queue and do not change.
Round robin
Agents’ positions are reordered according to
which agent answered the previous queue call.
Whenever an agent answers a queue call, the
next agent down in the list becomes 1, the agent
after that becomes 2, and so on. When the
bottom of the queue is reached, the order
continues from the top down until it meets the
agent who answered the most recent call.
Longest idle agent
Agent positions are ordered according to the
length of time without being in an Active state.
The agent who has gone the longest without
being Active inbound is in position 1.
Note that talking on non-queue calls and being
in the On Break personal status place an agent
in the Standby state, so that the time since the
agent was Active continues to increase.
Likewise, Wrap-up is not an Active state, so
agents' wrap-up time also increases their “idle”
time. Only receiving a queue call makes an
agent Active and resets the agent's “idle” time.
An agent's position is reduced by 1 whenever an
agent with a longer time since being Active
receives or places a queue call. The only way
for an agent's position to increase is for the
agent to receive a queue call.
Fewest calls
Agent positions are ordered according to which
agent has received the fewest queue calls
during the current display period. The agent who
has received the fewest queue calls since the
beginning of the shift is at position 1.
Note that the length of time spent on a queue
call is not significant for adjusting position, only
the number of queue calls participated in.
C-14
Algorithm
Agent positions
Least talk time
Agent positions are ordered according to which
agent has spent the least time on inbound
queue calls during the current display period.
The agent who has spent the least time on
inbound queue calls since the beginning of the
shift is at position 1.
Note that only calls from a queue count as talk
time in that queue. An agent working in two
queues will have a different talk time in each.
Simultaneous ring
Agents have no position, as each call rings all
agents’ phones simultaneously.
Note: The distribution algorithms Longest idle, Fewest calls, Least talk time count inbound
queue calls only.
Enabling and disabling the Distribution Order column
You can enable or disable the Distribution Order column in the Agents pane of the Queue
Monitor. Disabling the column can speed up system performance.
To enable or disable the Distribution Order column
1.
In the Administrator, choose Tools > System Settings. The System Settings dialog
box opens.
2.
Choose the Queue tab.
3.
Check or uncheck Update Agent Distribution Order column in Queue Monitor.
4.
Click OK.
APPENDIX C. SUPERVISING A CALL CENTER QUEUE
C-15
Monitoring queue statistics using the phone
Agents who have permission to monitor queue statistics can hear the current statistics for a
queue at any time by picking up a TeleVantage phone and dialing *55. The system prompts them
to select the queue for which they want to hear statistics.
Dialing *55 plays the queue statistics shown in the following table. Statistic totals are kept since
midnight at the beginning of the current day.
*55 Queue Statistics
Callers waiting
Number of callers waiting on the queue.
Expected wait time
Rough estimate of how long callers can
expect to wait if they called right now. The
formula used is <total wait time of all
answered calls so far this day> / <number of
answered calls so far this day>.
Active agents
Number of agents currently available. This
includes all agents who are signed in and in
the personal status Available or Available
(Queue Only).
Total calls
Total number of calls received today (since
the last midnight).
Abandon rate
Abandoned calls as a percentage of total
calls.
Supervising other agents’ calls _____________________________
Agents can use the Supervise commands—Monitor, Coach, and Join—to supervise other
agents’ calls. For an explanation of Monitor, Coach, and Join, see “Supervising other users’
calls” on page 12-14.
Supervising in a call center is a separate feature from supervising personal calls, and the two are
controlled by different permissions, as follows:
Q
Supervising personal calls. Supervising personal calls requires TeleVantage user
permissions set up by your system administrator. Users with only these permissions
cannot supervise call center calls.
Q
Supervising call center calls. To supervise call center calls, you must be a call center
agent with agent permissions set up per queue by your queue administrator. As a call
center supervisor, you can supervise only other agents in your queue, and only their
queue calls, not their personal calls.
Note: For you to supervise an agent’s outbound calls, the agent must have associated his or her
outbound calls with the queue. See “Placing calls from a queue” on page B-8.
C-16
If the agent whose call you are supervising transfers the call to another party, or parks
it and it is unparked by another party, you are disconnected.
How monitoring and coaching appear in the Call Monitor
When you are monitoring or coaching an agent on a call, the call appears in your Call
Monitor showing all three parties to the call. Your row, the top row in the call, is
labelled “Monitoring” or Coaching.”
If you are coaching an agent, the agent sees you as a party in the call. If you are
monitoring an agent, the agent does not see you as a party, unless that agent has the
permission View agents being monitored set to Allow. See the next section.
Note: When you join another agent’s call, the call appears as a normal conference
call.
Viewing when agents are being monitored
Agents who have the permission View agents being monitored set to Allow can see
when an agent is being monitored by another agent. The monitoring agent appears in
the Call Monitor as another party in the call, identified by the Status “Monitoring.”
Agents who have the permission set to Disallow (the default) cannot see when they or
other agents are being monitored.
Note: The Call Log does not keep a record of agents who were monitored.
APPENDIX C. SUPERVISING A CALL CENTER QUEUE
C-17
Managing agents’ status ___________________________________
With supervisor permissions, agents can directly control the status of other agents in
the queue in the following ways:
Q
Signing agents in or out of a queue
Q
Changing an agent’s personal status
Signing agents in or out of a queue
An agent who is signed in to a queue receives calls from that queue when ready. When
signed out, the agent is still a member of the queue, but does not receive queue calls.
An agent who is signed out can still view queue calls in the Call Monitor folder and
answer them if necessary by using the Take Call command.
Supervisors can use the sign in/out feature to move agents among queues without
having to delete them from one queue and add them to another. For example, if Kim
works as an agent in the Sales queue in the morning and in the Support queue in the
afternoon, a supervisor can sign Kim out for the Sales queue at midday and sign her in
for the Support queue.
Note: Agents with the Queue Sign In/Out permission can sign themselves in and out
of the queue. See “Signing in and out of a queue” on page B-5.
You can sign agents in or out using either ViewPoint or the Administrator.
Signing agents in or out using ViewPoint
To use this procedure you must have the queue permission Monitor Queue statistics
(see the TeleVantage Call Center Administrator’s Guide) and the general TeleVantage
permission Access Queues folder (see Administering TeleVantage).
1.
Open the Queue Monitor folder by clicking Public Folders in the Folder
List, then clicking its icon.
2.
If there are tabs for more than one queue, click the tab of the queue for which
you want to sign the agent in or out.
3.
In the Agents pane, select the agent.
4.
Choose Actions > Sign this agent into queue or Sign this agent out of
queue. The command signs the agent in or out.
Signing agents in or out using the Administrator
To use this procedure you must have the general TeleVantage permission Access
Queues Folder (see Administering TeleVantage).
C-18
1.
Open the Queues folder and double-click the queue for which you want the
agent to be signed in or out. The Queue dialog box opens.
2.
Click the Agents tab and double-click the agent’s name in the Agents in this
queue list. The Agent dialog box opens.
3.
Check or uncheck This agent is signed in.
4.
Click OK to close the Agent dialog box.
5.
Click OK to close the Queue dialog box.
Changing an agent’s personal status
A agent who has the permission Change an agent’s personal status set to Allow can
directly change the personal statuses of agents in the queue. A supervisor can use this
feature in the following situations:
Q
When agents are prevented from changing their own personal status. In this
case you must manage their workflow for them, changing their personal status
to begin and end their workday and to let them take breaks.
Q
When agents leave their phones and forget to change their personal statuses
themselves. In this case, you can set the personal statuses of the agents to On
Break.
Q
When the queue is configured to automatically place agents On Break if they
let calls from the queue go unanswered. In this case, you ensure that agents
become ready when they return to their desks.
Q
When agents leave for the day and are still ready. In this case, you can change
their personal statuses to make the agents unavailable.
Important: If agents leave at the end of their workday without making themselves
unavailable, you must make them unavailable before the start of the next workday, or
reports data will be inaccurate.
To change an agent’s personal status
1.
2.
In ViewPoint, select the agent on the appropriate tab in any of the following
locations:
Q
The Extensions folder
Q
The Extensions tab of the Phonebook pane in the Call Monitor folder
Q
The Agents pane in the Queue Monitor folder
Choose Actions > Apply Personal Status, and then select a personal status.
For more information about how to use personal statuses, see Using TeleVantage.
APPENDIX C. SUPERVISING A CALL CENTER QUEUE
C-19
Managing a queue’s voice mailbox __________________________
Agents who have the permission Access queue mailbox set to View and Edit can manage voice
messages that callers leave in the queue’s voice mailbox. They can listen to messages, reply to
them, and delete them. They also can create voice mailbox folders and move messages among
those folders.
Agents who have the permission set to View Only can see and listen to voice messages, but not
perform any other commands on them.
To access the queue’s voice mailbox, click Voicemail in the navigation bar, then click the folder
with the queue’s name in the Favorite Folders list.
For complete instructions on managing voice messages using ViewPoint, see Chapter 13.
Managing queue voice messages on the telephone
You can also manage a queue’s voicemail using the telephone by logging on as the queue. When
logging on, use the queue’s extension and password.
For instructions on logging on and managing voice messages using the telephone commands,
see Using TeleVantage.
C-20
APPENDIX D
APPENDIX D
WORKING AS AN AGENT IN AN ACD
WORKGROUP
APPENDIX CONTENTS
About participating in an ACD workgroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
Marking yourself ready and unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
Using the Call Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Placing ACD workgroup calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
Taking a break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
Listening to the ACD workgroup’s voicemail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
Viewing the ACD workgroup’s contacts and Call Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
About participating in an ACD workgroup_____________________
This appendix describes how agents participate in an ACD workgroup.
Important: This section covers instructions for working in an ACD workgroup only. For
instructions on working in a call center queue, see Appendix B.
For complete instructions on setting up and managing a TeleVantage call center, including an
ACD workgroup, see the TeleVantage Call Center Administrator’s Guide.
Use of the TeleVantage ViewPoint
Agents in an ACD workgroup must use the TeleVantage ViewPoint. Without ViewPoint, there
is no way for agents to control whether or not they receive calls from the ACD workgroup.
Agents require ViewPoint to begin and end their workday and to take breaks during it, as
described in the next section.
Marking yourself ready and unavailable ______________________
To mark yourself as ready to receive ACD workgroup calls:
1.
Log on to ViewPoint using your own name and password.
2.
Choose Tools > Options.
3.
Click the Personal tab.
4.
Check Accept ACD Workgroup calls.
5.
Click OK.
To mark yourself as unavailable, which stops ACD workgroup calls from being sent to you,
uncheck Accept ACD Workgroup calls.
Note: If your ACD workgroup uses the simultaneous ring method, you cannot make yourself
available while a call is ringing and answer it. Because you were not available when the call
started ringing, your phone will not be rung for that call.
D-2
Using the Call Monitor ____________________________________
To use the Call Monitor to handle ACD workgroup calls, agents log on to ViewPoint using their
own names and passwords. They can view incoming ACD workgroup calls by using the ACD
workgroup tab in their Call Monitor folders.
Call Monitor folder tabs work as follows:
Q
My Phone. Displays non-ACD calls.
Q
<ACD workgroup user name>. Displays ACD workgroup calls only.
Q
All. Displays all calls together.
Important: For agents to see the ACD workgroup tab in their Call Monitor folders, you must
have shared the ACD workgroup user’s Call Monitor with them. See “Sharing your Call Monitor
folder” on page 11-19.
Receiving a call __________________________________________
When a call to the ACD workgroup arrives, the phones in the workgroup ring according to the
method specified by the routing list. Calls continue to ring agents until they are answered or until
the caller chooses to leave a message or hang up.
Incoming calls appear in all participating agents’ Call Monitor folders immediately. Agents do
not have to wait for their phones to ring to take a call. As soon as an incoming call appears, they
can click it in the Call Monitor folder and choose Actions > Take Call.
The status of a call in progress appears in agents’ Call Monitor folders as “Active.” Agents
cannot affect other agents’ active calls. However, they can perform any action on their own
calls, such as Hold, Transfer, Mute, and so forth.
APPENDIX D. WORKING AS AN AGENT IN AN ACD WORKGROUP
D-3
Placing ACD workgroup calls_______________________________
If you are an ACD workgroup agent and you place a call at your desk using the telephone or
ViewPoint, by default TeleVantage marks the call as a call made by you. However, you may
need to place outgoing calls as part of your work as an ACD workgroup agent. Such calls in
TeleVantage can be marked as calls from the ACD workgroup—not as calls from your
extension—so that reports on ACD workgroup activity accurately reflect agent performance.
To mark all subsequent outbound calls as ACD workgroup calls, use your telephone keypad to
press *14<ACD workgroup user’s extension># at a dial tone. All calls that are made from your
station are now logged as calls that are made by the ACD workgroup user. The calls appear in
the Call Monitors of all agents in the workgroup. The calls do not appear on the My Phone tab
in your Call Monitor. The calls are logged both in your personal Call Log and the ACD
workgroup user’s Call Log, with the queue name in the From column.
To switch back, and mark subsequent outbound calls as being from you, press *14# at a dial tone
again. All subsequent calls from your station are now marked as being placed by you. These
calls appear only in your Call Monitor and only in your Call Log.
Taking a break ___________________________________________
To take a break during your work shift, uncheck Accept ACD Workgroup calls as described in
“Marking yourself ready and unavailable” on page D-2.
Note: The Do Not Disturb personal status does not stop ACD workgroup calls from ringing your
phone.
Listening to the ACD workgroup’s voicemail __________________
If you have shared the ACD workgroup user’s Inbox with other agents, and given those agents
the required permission, they can play and respond to the ACD workgroup’s voice messages.
To do so, they go to the ACD workgroup’s Inbox under Shared Folders in the Folder List.
Agents can play and respond to the ACD workgroup’s voice messages exactly as they work with
their own voice messages.
Viewing the ACD workgroup’s contacts and Call Log ___________
If the ACD workgroup’s contacts and Call Log have been shared with you, you can view those
folders under Shared Folders in the Folder List.
D-4
APPENDIX E
APPENDIX E
USING THE TELEVANTAGE ARCHIVED
RECORDING BROWSER
The TeleVantage Archived Recording Browser is a tool for listening to and managing thousands
of mailbox recordings (voice messages or call recordings) that have been archived by
TeleVantage. You can search for recordings using a variety of criteria, edit or delete recordings,
flag recordings for follow up, or restore them to the appropriate Inbox or other folder from which
they were archived.
This appendix describes how to do the following:
Q
Run the Archived Recording Browser. See page E-1.
Q
Search for mailbox recordings that meet the criteria that you set. See page E-2.
Q
View and act on recordings. See page E-9.
Q
Check the recording archive for missing audio files. See page E-11.
Q
Purge archived recordings. See page E-11.
Q
Import a recording archive from TeleVantage 6.x. See page E-12.
Running the Archived Recording Browser____________________
In order to use the Archive Recording Browser, you must know the network location of the
archive and have network access to that location. See your system administrator for details.
To run the Archived Recording Browser
1.
Choose Start > Programs > Vertical TeleVantage > TeleVantage Archived
Recording Browser. The TeleVantage Archived Recording Browser dialog box
opens:
2.
Enter your archive user User Name and Password. These can be different than your
TeleVantage user name and password—ask your system administrator for the user
name and password to use.
Click OK.
3.
If you are prompted to do so, navigate to the network location of the recording archive.
4.
To log on as another archive user (for example, as a user with different access
privileges), click File > Log On as a Different User, and then enter that archive user’s
User Name and Password.
Searching for recordings __________________________________
The Archived Recording Browser does not display any entries when you run it. To view
recordings in the Browser window, you must first search for recordings that match criteria that
you set.
To search for recordings, use either of the following methods:
Q
Start a new search. See page E-2.
Q
Load a saved search. See page E-8.
Starting a new search
To start a new search
1.
E-2
Click
on the toolbar. The Search Archived Recordings dialog box opens.
2.
Do one of the following:
Q
If your search only involves the criteria shown on the Basic tab. On the Basic
tab, you can quickly specify commonly-used criteria, and anything you enter is
treated as a partial search. For example, entering “617” in the Number field will
return all records with 617 in that field, including “61755511212”, and
“5126175555”.
For a description of each field on the Basic tab, see “Search criteria” on page E-4.
When you are done specifying your search criteria on the Basic tab, go to step 3.
Q
If you want to specify more complex search criteria. Click the Advanced tab to
search on additional fields in the mailbox recording’s Call Log entry, or to define
more complex search criteria than you can specify on the Basic tab.
For a description of each field on the Advanced tab, see “Search criteria” on
page E-4.
Click Add to List after defining each entry. To remove an entry from the list, select it
and then click Remove.
3.
On either tab, you can specify how the results will be sorted. From the Order results
by drop-down lists, select the Browser column on which to sort the search results.
Then select Ascending or Descending from the drop-down list to specify how to sort
the contents of that column.
Note: Search results can also be sorted by clicking any column header in the Archived
Recording Browser.
APPENDIX E. USING THE TELEVANTAGE ARCHIVED RECORDING BROWSER
E-3
4.
When you are done specifying your search criteria on either tab, do any of the
following:
Q
To execute the search, click Find Now.
Q
To reuse the search criteria again at a later time, click Save As. In the Save Search
As dialog box, Enter a name for your search and then click Save.
Q
To reset the contents of the Search Archived Recordings dialog box to the default
settings, click Reset.
Search criteria
The following table describes the search criteria that you can set up on either the Basic or
Advanced tab in the Search Archived Recordings dialog box.
Tab
Basic
E-4
Field
Description
TeleVantage Server
If your system archives mailbox recordings from more than
one TeleVantage Server, you can search all of the Servers, or
select a specific Server from the drop-down list.
Mailbox
You can search all users’ mailbox folders, or select a specific
user from the drop-down list.
From Name or
Number
To search for recordings related to calls from a specific user or
number, select this checkbox, and then enter all or part of the
user’s name (for example, “Janice” or “Jan”) or phone number
(for example, “17815551212”, or “781”.) To search for calls
from an external caller, enter “Unknown”.
To Name or Number
To search for recordings related to calls placed to a specific
user or number, select this checkbox, and then enter all or part
of the user’s name or phone number.
Tab
Field
Description
Received
To limit your search to a specific time period, select this
checkbox, and then select a time period from the drop-down
list (for example, “Yesterday” or “Last 3 months”.) If you select
“Specific date”, enter the date in the text box using the format
provided, or click
to select a date from a calendar.
Length
To search for recordings of a specific length, select this
checkbox. Select an option from the drop-down list, and then
enter the number of minutes in the text box (for example,
“Within 30 sec.of 5 minutes”.)
Note: To enter seconds, use the hh:ss format or decimal
places. For example, to indicate 1 minute 30 seconds, enter
either “1:30” or “1.5”.
Advanced
Flagged for follow up
To search for recordings that were previously flagged for follow
up, select this checkbox.
Call Notes
To search for recordings that contain a specific text string in
the Call Notes field, select the checkbox, and then enter the
string in the text box.
Archive Notes
To search for recordings that contain a specific text string in
the Archive Notes field, select this checkbox, and then enter
the string in the text box.
Show me recordings
that match these
criteria
Lists one or more criteria that you specify on the Advanced
tab. To remove an entry from the criteria list, select it and then
click Remove.
Define more criteria
To add an entry to the criteria list, select a Field and Condition
from the drop-down lists, and then select a Value from the
drop-down list or enter it in the text box (for example, “Account
Code Equals 1074”.)
To search for recordings that match one of several values in a
single field, select the condition Or. When you use Or, you
must specify the complete field contents that you are
searching for, as in:
“From Or Nancy Jones OR Pete Smith OR Irene Orleans”.
Field
Field on which the search criteria is based. For a description of
each field, see “Using the Call Log view” in Chapter 12 in
Administering TeleVantage.
Condition
Select any of the following conditions.
APPENDIX E. USING THE TELEVANTAGE ARCHIVED RECORDING BROWSER
E-5
Tab
Field
Description
Equals, Does
not equal
Use to search based on the exact contents of a
field. For example, to search for recordings of
calls from Kevin McDonough, add the criteria
“From Equals Kevin McDonough”.
Note that when you use Equals and Does not
equal, you cannot search based on part of the
field’s contents—the criteria “From Equals
Irene” would not return any matches.
Equals is the only valid condition for some
fields (Flagged for follow-up, Message Heard,
Call Direction, Call Result, Left Message, and
Recorded By.) For these fields, select one of
the values offered in the drop-down list, for
example, “Call Result Equals Left Message”.
E-6
Greater than,
Less than
Use to search based on the numeric contents
of a field. For example, to search for recordings
of calls that were on hold for more than 10
minutes, add the criteria “Hold Time Greater
than 10”.
Between
Use to search based on a range of values for a
field. For example, to search for recordings of
calls that lasted more than 10 but less than 20
minutes, add the criteria “Call Duration
Between 10 and 20”.
Or
Use to search for recordings based on two or
more values for a field. For example, to search
for recordings of calls from several callers, add
a criteria like “From Or Nancy Jones OR Pete
Smith OR Irene Orleans”.
Tab
Field
Description
Like
Use to search based on wildcard characters
that represent one or more other characters.
Use a question mark (?) to represent a single
alphanumeric character. For example, to
search for recordings of calls from the 617 area
code and 555 exchange, add the criteria,
“Number Like 617555????”.
Use an asterisk (*) to represent one or more
alphanumeric characters. For example, to
search for recordings of calls from anyone with
a first name of Nancy, add the criteria “From
Like Nancy*.”
You can combine wildcard characters in a
single search criteria. For example, to search
for recordings from calls from an area code that
begins with 8 and has the 555 exchange, add
the criteria “Number Like “8??555*”.
Note that if you want to search for the actual
character * or ?, use the Equals or Does not
equal condition.
Contains
Value
Use to search based on a portion of a field. For
example, to search for recordings of calls
where 555 appears anywhere in the number,
add the criteria “Number Contains 555”.
Field contents for which to search. Note that when searching
on the contents of a time-based field (Call Duration, Hold
Time, and so forth), the value is always entered in minutes.
APPENDIX E. USING THE TELEVANTAGE ARCHIVED RECORDING BROWSER
E-7
Saving your current search
There are two ways to save your current search criteria in order to search using the same criteria
at a later time:
1.
In the Search Archived Recordings dialog box, click Save As.
-orIn the Browser, click
on the toolbar.
The Save Search As dialog box opens.
2.
Enter a name for your search and then click Save.
Loading a saved search
To load a saved search, select it in the drop-down list on the toolbar. To change the search
criteria for a saved search, select it and then choose Tools > Find. The Search Archived
Recordings dialog box opens where you can make your changes.
Managing individual recordings_____________________________
Mailbox recordings that match your search criteria are displayed in the Browser.
E-8
The following information is displayed for each recording:
Q
. If
, recording has been flagged for follow-up.
Q
. Identifies the recording type:
Q
. Voice message
Q
. Call recording
Q
Server. TeleVantage Server from which the recording was archived.
Q
Mailbox. User’s mailbox folder from which the recording was archived. If you restore
the recording, it will be returned to this mailbox.
Q
From. Name of the person who placed the call. On incoming calls, “Unknown” is
displayed unless the user identified the caller as a contact. On outgoing calls, this column
contains the user’s name.
Q
Received. Date and time when a voice message was left, or a call recorded.
Q
Length. Length of the recording in minutes:seconds format.
Q
Number. On incoming calls, the extension, Caller ID name and number (if available), or
external number that was dialed. On outgoing calls, the extension or external number
that was dialed.
Q
Created. Date and time when the mailbox recording was archived.
Q
Custom Data. Custom data, if any, associated with the call.
Q
Notes. Starting text of any notes added to a voice message or call recording via the Call
Monitor or Call Log. The complete notes appear in the Call Notes pane at the bottom of
the Browser. For a call recording, TeleVantage automatically adds information about the
stations and/or trunks involved in the call.
If you make changes to Call Notes via the Archived Recording Browser, those changes
are included if you restore the recording to its original Inbox or other folder, but the Call
Log notes remain unchanged.
Q
Archive Notes. Notes added to the archived recording via the Archived Recording
Browser. Archive notes are maintained only in the archive, and are not included if the
recording is restored to its original Inbox or other folder.
Acting on archived call recordings __________________________
To act on archived recordings
1.
Adjust the display in any of the following ways:
Q
Click on any column heading to sort the search results on that column. You can type
characters or words to jump to the first matching record in the sorted column that
begins with that text.
APPENDIX E. USING THE TELEVANTAGE ARCHIVED RECORDING BROWSER
E-9
2.
Q
Enter a number in the Recordings text box at the top right of the Browser and press
Enter to go to that entry in the list. Use the
buttons to browse through the
search results.
Q
To change the number of entries displayed per page, choose Tools > Options. In
the Options dialog box, enter the Number of recordings to display per page.
Click an archived file to select it. You can perform the following actions on a selected
file:
Q
Play. Double-click any column except the first column to play the recording, or use
the audio controls at the bottom of the Browser.
To set a bookmark while listening to a recording, click and drag the orange triangle
under the progress indicator at the bottom of the Browser. The next time
that you play the recording, playback will start at the bookmark location.
Q
Open Call Log Details. Click
on the toolbar to view details about the Call Log
entry associated with the mailbox recording.
Note: You can view Call Log details for all call recordings, and for voice messages
that were left by a caller via the TeleVantage telephone commands. Internal voice
messages will only have associated Call Log details if internal (station-to-station)
call logging is turned on via Tools > System Settings > Call Log tab in the
TeleVantage Administrator. Voice messages sent directly to a user’s voice mailbox
by another user via ViewPoint do not have any associated Call Log details.
Q
Flag recording. Double-click the first column for a recording to flag the selected
recording for follow up. Double-click it again to remove the flag. (You can also use
the Flag this recording for follow-up checkbox for the selected recording.)
Q
E-10
Add notes. To add new notes or edit existing notes to the selected recording, type
in the Call Notes or Archive Notes panes.
Q
Restore recording. Click
on the toolbar to move the selected recording back
to the mailbox from which it was archived. It also stays in the archive until purged.
Q
Export recording. Click
Q
Refresh. Click
, one of the audio controls at the bottom of the
Browser, to export one or more selected recordings to a location on a hard drive
other than the folders from which they were archived. (Exported recordings are not
deleted from the archive folder.)
on the toolbar to refresh the list of mailbox recordings displayed
in the Browser.
Q
Delete recording. Click
on the toolbar to delete one or more selected
recordings from the archive folder. (To delete recordings based on criteria that you
set, see “Purging archived recordings” on page E-11.)
Checking the archive for missing audio files __________________
When you check the archive for missing audio files, all archive database entries that do not have
a corresponding audio file in the archive folder are deleted from the database.
To check the archive for missing audio files.
1.
Choose Tools > Check Archive. Note: If this option is not available, ask your system
administrator to grant you Archive Admin privileges.
2.
Click OK at the warning message to check the archive.
Purging archived recordings _______________________________
You must have Administrator privileges to perform this operation. When you purge archived
recordings, all mailbox recordings in the archive folder that match the criteria that you set are
deleted permanently, as well as the corresponding archive database entries.
To purge archived recordings
1.
Choose Tools > Purge Recordings. Note: If this option is not available, ask your
system administrator to grant you Archive Admin privileges.
APPENDIX E. USING THE TELEVANTAGE ARCHIVED RECORDING BROWSER
E-11
The Purge Archived Recordings dialog box opens:
2.
Specify the recordings that you want to delete from the archive. Selecting recordings
to purge works the same as using the Basic tab to search for recordings. See “Search
criteria” on page E-4 for a description of each field.
3.
Click Delete to purge mailbox recordings that match your criteria from the archive.
Click OK at the warning message to confirm the purge.
Importing a recording archive from TeleVantage 6.x ____________
Important: The information in this section applies only if your system was upgraded from
TeleVantage 6.x, which stored archived recordings in XML format. Perform the steps in this
section to import an existing recording archive into the SQL Server database used by the
TeleVantage 7 archive service.
Note: Depending on the number of recordings in the archive, importing can take a long time.
To import a recording archive via the Archived Recording Browser
E-12
1.
Start the Archived Recording Browser according to the instructions on page E-1.
2.
Choose File > Import XML Archive.
3.
Navigate to the network location of the recording archive (Index.xml) that you want
to import, and click Open.
APPENDIX F
APPENDIX F
USING THE TELEVANTAGE H.323
SOFTPHONE
CHAPTER CONTENTS
About the TeleVantage H.323 SoftPhone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
Defining the TeleVantage SoftPhone as your external station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3
Using the TeleVantage SoftPhone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-4
Configuring the TeleVantage SoftPhone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5
Using the stand-alone SoftPhone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-7
SoftPhone notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8
About the TeleVantage H.323 SoftPhone ______________________
The TeleVantage H.323 SoftPhone is included with TeleVantage ViewPoint. If your system has
properly configured H.323 trunks, the SoftPhone can turn your PC into an H.323-based
voice-over-IP telephone. To speak and listen, you can use your PC's microphone and speakers,
or a USB phone which will provide better quality. To place calls, you can use ViewPoint or the
SoftPhone keypad window.
Important: If your system is configured to use only SIP-based Voip, the TeleVantage H.323
SoftPhone will not work. Use the eyeBeam SIP softphone instead, which also provides higher
audio quality than the H.323 SoftPhone. See Appendix G, “Using the CounterPath SIP
softphones.”
Recommended USB phones
The following are recommended USB phones for use with the TeleVantage H.323 SoftPhone:
Q
Desk phone: Eutectics IPP400. Choose “Drivers Only” for the Integration Package and
Protocol Options.
http://www.eutecticsinc.com/products/business.html#IPP400
Q
Headset: Plantronics DSP-400.
http://www.plantronics.com/north_america/en_US/products/cat640035/cat640035/pro
d440042
While other USB phones may work, no other USB phones are recommended at this time,
including other devices from Eutectics and Plantronics.
F-2
SoftPhone requirements
Your computer must have the following to run the TeleVantage SoftPhone:
Q
Microsoft Windows XP or higher
Q
Either of the following:
Q
Q
A sound card, speakers, and microphone
Q
A USB phone
A network connection to a TeleVantage Server running TeleVantage 6.1 or higher
Defining the TeleVantage SoftPhone as your external station ____
The TeleVantage SoftPhone is included with TeleVantage ViewPoint and you can use it as your
TeleVantage phone at any time. However, if you will primarily be using SoftPhone as your
TeleVantage phone, it is more convenient to have it defined as your external station (see “Using
an external station” on page 6-10). Talk to your system administrator about assigning SoftPhone
as your external station.
If you already have an external station, you can configure the SoftPhone as your external station
destination at any time. To do so:
1.
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2.
Click the Phone \ Station Features tab.
3.
From the Destination dropdown list, choose “TeleVantage SoftPhone.”
4.
Choose an H.323 Internet dialing service under Call Using.
5.
Enter your PC’s IP address under Address.
6.
Click OK.
APPENDIX F. USING THE TELEVANTAGE H.323 SOFTPHONE
F-3
Using the TeleVantage SoftPhone ___________________________
The following sections provide instructions for starting and using the TeleVantage SoftPhone.
Starting the TeleVantage SoftPhone
To start the TeleVantage SoftPhone, do the following:
1.
When logging on to ViewPoint, click Options to expand the Login dialog box.
2.
If the SoftPhone is defined as your external station (see “Defining the TeleVantage
SoftPhone as your external station” on page F-3), simply enter your external station ID
under Station ID.
If not, click TeleVantage H.323 SoftPhone. Your PC’s IP address displays in the
dialog box. If your PC has more than one IP address, you can select a preferred IP
address, or choose Use best IP address.
3.
Click OK.
Once selected as your TeleVantage phone, TeleVantage routes your incoming calls to the
SoftPhone at the selected IP address.
F-4
Showing the SoftPhone keypad window
To display the SoftPhone keypad window, choose Tools > SoftPhone in ViewPoint. You can
also double-click the SoftPhone icon in the system tray at the bottom right of your screen.
Placing a call with the SoftPhone
To place a call with the SoftPhone, use any of the following methods:
Q
Use ViewPoint's dial bar, contact list, Extensions pane, or any other method to place a
call from ViewPoint. See “Placing a call” on page 12-2.
Q
Enter the number to dial in the SoftPhone keypad. Type the number into the text box or
use the keypad numbers, and then click Start Call.
Your SoftPhone connection behaves just like a TeleVantage internal station, so you can dial
TeleVantage extensions directly. When placing an external call, you must use an access code
(see “Entering account codes when placing calls” on page 3-3).
Exiting the SoftPhone
Important: Exiting the SoftPhone disables it so that it no longer rings for incoming calls. It is the
same as unplugging your phone. Callers to your number will hear ringing, then be transferred to
voice mail or the next action in your routing list. To take calls at your regular phone after exiting
SoftPhone, first choose File > Use a different station and switch your TeleVantage phone. Then
exit SoftPhone.
The SoftPhone Add-in runs from within ViewPoint, so it exits whenever you exit ViewPoint.
You can also disable SoftPhone from within ViewPoint by choosing Tools > Add-in Manager
and unchecking Enabled for the SoftPhone Add-in.
Configuring the TeleVantage SoftPhone______________________
The following sections describe how to configure the SoftPhone for your personal use.
APPENDIX F. USING THE TELEVANTAGE H.323 SOFTPHONE
F-5
Adjusting microphone and speaker volume
1.
Open the SoftPhone keypad window (see “Showing the SoftPhone keypad window”
on page F-5).
2.
Click the audio icon to expand the dialog box.
3.
Use the slider bars for Volume and Mic to adjust the audio volume and microphone
pickup. Uncheck a field to mute it.
Setting preferences
1.
From the SoftPhone keypad window (see “Showing the SoftPhone keypad window”
on page F-5), choose Tools > Options. You can also right-click the SoftPhone icon in
the system tray and choose Options.
2.
Click the Preferences tab.
3.
Set any of the following options:
Q
Auto answer. If checked, SoftPhone automatically answers incoming calls. If
unchecked, incoming calls cause the New Call window to open, where you can
either accept or decline the call.
Q
Always on top. If checked, the dialog box will remain on top of all other windows.
You can set it separately for the main SoftPhone window and the New Call window.
Q
Audio device to use for playback. Select the sound card on your computer to use
for playing SoftPhone audio.
Q
Audio device to use for recording. Select the microphone or other audio device to
use for speaking and recording with SoftPhone.
Q
Check USB Phone. Click to check the connection with a USB phone connected to
your PC.
4.
Click OK.
Setting call restrictions
You can use Call Restriction tab in Options to make sure that your SoftPhone can only be called
by sources you approve, for example, the IP address of the TeleVantage Server's Internet span.
To do so:
F-6
1.
From the SoftPhone keypad window (see “Showing the SoftPhone keypad window”
on page F-5), choose Tools > Options. You can also right-click the SoftPhone icon in
the system tray and choose Options.
2.
Click the Call Restrictions tab.
3.
Check Accept calls from only the following IP addresses. This blocks all incoming
calls from IP addresses other than the ones you specify.
4.
Click Add and enter an IP address (typically the IP address of the TeleVantage Server's
Internet span), then click to add that IP address to the list of approved IP addresses.
Repeat to add multiple IP addresses.
Click Remove to remove the selected IP address from the list.
5.
Click OK.
Keeping the keypad window always on top
To keep the SoftPhone keypad window always on top of other applications, choose View >
Always on top from the keypad window.
Using the stand-alone SoftPhone ___________________________
You can use a lightweight, downloadable, stand-alone version of the SoftPhone without
ViewPoint. To install the stand-alone SoftPhone, open the ViewPoint Web Access login page
and at the bottom select the link To use the Softphone option, install the TeleVantage
Softphone. When starting the stand-alone SoftPhone for the first time you must provide your
TeleVantage Server's Internet Span IP Address.
When running, the SoftPhone appears as a blue keypad icon in the Windows notification area.
To exit the SoftPhone stand-alone application, right-click the SoftPhone system tray icon and
click Exit.
Configuring the stand-alone SoftPhone
To set up the stand-alone SoftPhone to connect to TeleVantage, do the following:
1.
From the SoftPhone keypad window (see “Showing the SoftPhone keypad window”
on page F-5), choose Tools > Options. You can also right-click the SoftPhone icon in
the system tray and choose Options.
2.
Click the Connection tab.
3.
Specify the following information:
Q
H.323 Gateway. Enter the computer name or IP address of the TeleVantage Server's
H.323 span. (Depending on how your H.323 span is configured, the span's IP
address may be different from the Server's IP address.)
4.
Q
Extension. Enter your TeleVantage extension.
Q
Password. Enter your TeleVantage password.
Click OK.
APPENDIX F. USING THE TELEVANTAGE H.323 SOFTPHONE
F-7
SoftPhone notes _________________________________________
The following notes pertain to using the TeleVantage SoftPhone:
F-8
Q
The SoftPhone uses Windows H.323 TAPI support, which has a limited ability to
manage VoIP echo, jitter and packet loss, compared to a 'hard' IP phone such as the
Uniden or Polycom phone. If you are unsatisfied with the SoftPhone's audio quality on
your network, you should instead use a recommended IP, analog or digital phone as
listed in Chapter 6 of Installing TeleVantage.
Q
When using the TeleVantage SoftPhone, if you switch to using a station or exit
ViewPoint, Call Forwarding is automatically turned off so calls are routed to the user's
regular station.
Q
PCs running Windows 2000 or below cannot use the SoftPhone as it only runs on
Windows XP or higher.
Q
You cannot place a call using Microsoft NetMeeting while SoftPhone is running.
APPENDIX G
APPENDIX G
USING THE COUNTERPATH SIP
SOFTPHONES
CHAPTER CONTENTS
About the CounterPath SIP softphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-2
Before installing the eyeBeam softphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-3
Installing and configuring the eyeBeam SIP softphone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4
Launching the eyeBeam softphone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6
Using CounterPath SIP softphones with TeleVantage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-8
About the CounterPath SIP softphones_______________________
TeleVantage supports the following CounterPath Solutions, Inc. SIP softphones:
Q
eyeBeam SIP softphone
Q
Pocket PC SIP softphone
See page G-8 for a table that describes how eyeBeam and Pocket PC softphone features interact
with TeleVantage.
Note: The configuration procedures in this manual describe only those steps necessary for the
CounterPath SIP softphones to work with TeleVantage. Other settings may be left in their default
configuration. For information on using other softphone features, see the documentation that
came with your softphone.
For configuration instructions:
Q
See the next section for the eyeBeam SIP softphone.
Q
See Chapter 14 of Administering TeleVantage for the Pocket PC SIP softphone.
About the eyebeam SIP softphone___________________________
TeleVantage supports the eyeBeam SIP softphone on platforms running Windows XP, 2003,
and 2000. If your system has properly configured SIP trunks, the eyeBeam softphone can turn
your PC into a SIP-based voice-over-IP telephone. To speak and listen, you can use your PC's
microphone and speakers, or a USB phone which will provide much higher quality. To place
calls, you can use ViewPoint or the eyeBeam window.
This section describes how to install and configure an eyeBeam SIP softphone for use with
TeleVantage.
G-2
Important: If your system is configured to use only H.323-based Voip, the eyeBeam SIP
softPhone will not work. Use the TeleVantage H.323 SoftPhone instead. See Appendix F, “Using
the TeleVantage H.323 SoftPhone.” Note that the eyeBeam SIP softphone provides higher audio
quality.
Note: TeleVantage supports multiple line appearances with the eyeBeam SIP softphone.
Contact your system administrator for more information.
Recommended USB phones
While many headsets work with the eyeBeam softphone, the following headsets are
recommended:
Plantronics (www.plantronics.com)
Q
The CS50-USB VoIP Headset (cordless)
Q
The DSP-500 USB Folding Headset (corded)
Q
The DSP-400 USB Multimedia Headset (corded)
GN Netcom (http://www.gnnetcom.com)
Q
The GN 8120 USB digital USB-to-headset adapter (corded; compatible with any GN
Netcom QD Headset)
Before installing the eyeBeam softphone_____________________
Before installing an eyeBeam SIP softphone on your computer, talk to your system
administrator and make sure you know the following:
Q
The IP address or name of the TeleVantage SIP span.
Q
The preferred codec(s), in order, of the TeleVantage SIP span, for example, G.711.
Q
The authentication username and password required, if any.
Q
Whether or not you have an external station. See the next section.
If you have an external station
If you have an external station, you must configure it for a SIP phone before you can use the
eyeBeam softphone. See “Configuring a SIP phone” on page 6-14 for instructions.
If you don’t have an external station
If you don’t have an external station, choose Tools > Options, click the Phone tab, and check
Imitate a station when routing my incoming calls to external numbers.
APPENDIX G. USING THE COUNTERPATH SIP SOFTPHONES
G-3
Installing and configuring the eyeBeam SIP softphone __________
Use this procedure to install the eyeBeam softphone on your PC and configure it for use with
TeleVantage.
Notes
Q
These procedures describe the eyeBeam audio-only softphone version 1.1 3004w or
higher. It is recommended that you have the eyeBeam User's Manual available as you
install the softphone.
Q
The configuration procedure describes only those steps necessary for the eyeBeam
phone to work with TeleVantage. Other settings may be left in their default configuration.
For information on using other eyeBeam features, see the eyeBeam documentation.
To install and configure an eyeBeam softphone
G-4
1.
Install the softphone on the PC that will be using it.
2.
Start the softphone. When prompted, enter the license key that you were supplied, and
click OK.
3.
In the Audio Tuning Wizard, configure the phone with the desired audio settings. See
the eyeBeam documentation for how to set audio settings.
4.
Next, the Settings dialog box opens. Choose the SIP Accounts \ Add a New SIP
Account \ Server tab.
Note: If you accidentally exit the dialog box, right-click anywhere on the eyeBeam
phone and choose Settings to open it again.
5.
Check Enable this SIP account. This enables the eyeBeam phone to register with
TeleVantage.
6.
Under User details, enter the following information:
Q
Display name. Enter your name as you want it displayed to callers.
Q
User name. Enter one of the following:
Q
If you have an external station. Enter a name that matches the Userinfo field
in your external station configuration as shown in Tools > Options, Phone \
Station Features tab. (See “Configuring a SIP phone” on page 6-14.)
Q
If you don’t have an external station. Enter a name that matches the Userinfo
of SIP URI field of the SIP account that you want to use with the phone, as
shown in Tools > Options, Personal \ SIP Account tab. (See “Customizing SIP
accounts” on page 18-19.)
Q
Password/Authentication user name. Enter the authentication credentials your
system administrator provided (or leave blank if not required by your system).
Q
Domain. Enter the name or IP address of the TeleVantage SIP Span to which this
phone is registered, as provided by your administrator.
7.
Under Domain Proxy, check both Register with domain and Use as outbound
proxy.
APPENDIX G. USING THE COUNTERPATH SIP SOFTPHONES
G-5
8.
Click the SIP Accounts \ Add a New SIP Account \ Advanced tab and uncheck Send
SIP keep alives.
9.
Click the Media \ Audio \ Devices tab. Uncheck Enable VAD.
Disabling VAD creates a more natural audio sound, since the eyeBeam will transmit
audio continuously rather than stopping transmission when it doesn't detect voice
(which results in silence gaps). Note that disabling VAD increases the bandwidth used
during phone calls since audio is always transmitting.
10. Click the Media \ Audio \ Advanced \ Codecs tab. The following codecs on the
eyeBeam are supported by TeleVantage:
Q
G711 uLaw.
Q
G711 alaw.
Q
GSM.
Q
G729.
For best results, arrange the codecs in the Enabled Codecs pane in the same
preference order as provided by your system administrator.
11. Choose the System \ General tab. Configure the following settings:
Q
Auto answer. Enter the amount of time that the phone rings before connecting
audio, when Auto Answer is enabled.
Q
Auto Dial Enabled. If checked, you do not have to press the Dial button to initiate
a call. Note that if you find auto dialing to be slow you can decrease the Minimum
and Maximum Wait times.
12. Choose the Media \ Audio \ Devices tab. Under Microphone Settings and Speaker
Settings, make sure that the correct audio devices on your PC are selected for voice
capture and audio.
13. Click OK or Apply to save your changes. If the configuration has been made correctly
the eyeBeam should show "Logged in - enter phone number" and "Your Number is
<username>". In the Settings dialog box you should also see a submenu under SIP
Accounts with the name/address of your TeleVantage Server.
Launching the eyeBeam softphone __________________________
To use the eyeBeam softphone with TeleVantage, do the following when you log on to
ViewPoint:
G-6
1.
Click Options to expand the Logon dialog box.
2.
Select one of the following under Use this phone with ViewPoint:
Q
If you have a properly-configured SIP phone external station (see “Configuring a
SIP phone” on page 6-14), simply choose Station ID and enter your station ID.
Q
If you don’t have an external station, choose eyeBeam SIP softphone. If you have
more than one eyeBeam SIP account defined, use the dropdown list select the one
you defined in step 6 in the previous section.
Note: If you don’t have an external station, then make sure you have Imitate a station
when my incoming routing calls to external numbers checked (Tools > Options,
Phone tab).
3.
Click OK.
APPENDIX G. USING THE COUNTERPATH SIP SOFTPHONES
G-7
Using CounterPath SIP softphones with TeleVantage ___________
This following table describes how eyeBeam and Pocket PC softphone features interact with
TeleVantage.
eyeBeam
softphone
Pocket PC Feature
softphone
Dialing a number
Directions
Dial numbers just as you would from a
TeleVantage phone, including access codes to
place external calls. You can dial TeleVantage
extensions or access the telephone commands
without an access code.
Note that if the eyeBeam phone is set up as a
TeleVantage external station, you cannot dial
SIP addresses from it.
Place a call by clicking the Dial icon:
You can either dial the number first, then click
the icon, or click the icon first, then dial the
number.
Note: When placing a TeleVantage call that requires dialing an access code from
an eyeBeam phone, you do not hear dial tone after dialing the access code. You
can continue dialing the number and the call will be placed correctly. Or, to hear dial
tone, you can press the Dial button again after dialing the access code—for
example, Dial, 9, Dial—and then dial the number.
Ending a call
To end a call, click the End Call icon:
n/a
Do Not Disturb
Click the phone’s DND button to turn on the Do
Not Disturb TeleVantage personal status.
Auto Answer
Click the phone’s AA button to turn on automatic
answering of incoming calls, similar to
TeleVantage’s hands-free answering.
You can use TeleVantage call screening in
combination with the eyeBeam auto answer
feature.
G-8
eyeBeam
softphone
Pocket PC Feature
softphone
Auto
Conferencing
Directions
Click the eyeBeam phone’s AC button to enable
or disable Auto-Conference. Combined with
Auto-Answer, these two features control how
participants are added to a conference, as
follows:
AA off / AC off - Manual conference. The
conference host manually accepts calls and
adds them each to the conference.
AA on / AC off - Auto-answer, manual add to
conference. eyeBeam automatically answers
calls and the conference host manually adds
each to the conference.
AA off / AC on - Individual answer, auto add to
conference. The conference host answers each
call and each is automatically added to the
conference.
AA on / AC on - Conference Server Mode.
eyeBeam acts as a fully automated conference
server, automatically answering each incoming
call and adding them to the conference.
Conferencing
Click the phone’s CONF button to create a
3-way conference call when calls exist on
multiple lines. (The user must have multiple line
appearances enabled by the system
administrator.) See the eyeBeam 1.1 User Guide
about create 3-way conference calls with
additional features enable such as Auto Answer
and Auto-Conferencing. See also “Creating
conference calls” on page 12-12.
Hold
Click either the phone’s Hold button or an active
Line button to put a caller on hold.
Phone-activated hold is silent and does not play
the TeleVantage telephone commands.
Note: If a call on hold exceeds the hold ringback
time, the ringback call is placed on a different
line. You can either follow the ringback call
prompts to connect to the call on hold, or hang
up the ringback call and retrieve the call on hold
yourself.
APPENDIX G. USING THE COUNTERPATH SIP SOFTPHONES
G-9
eyeBeam
softphone
Pocket PC Feature
softphone
Directions
Flash
The phone’s Flash button is not supported by
TeleVantage. Pressing Flash puts the caller on
hold, like with the Hold button. To generate a
TeleVantage Flash command, press **.
Mute
Click the phone’s Mute button to mute the call.
Transfer
Click the phone’s Xfer button to perform a
TeleVantage blind transfer.
To perform a supervised transfer, dial ** and use
the TeleVantage transfer telephone command.
Record
Clicking Record performs a local eyeBeam
recording, not a TeleVantage call recording. See
the eyeBeam documentation for details.
Speakerphone
Note that the eyeBeam will not Auto Answer via
the speakerphone. To automatically answer calls
via the speakerphone, turn on TeleVantage’s
hands-free answering (see “Using hands-free
answering” on page 4-4).
G-10
APPENDIX H
APPENDIX H
LOGGING ON WITH COMMAND-LINE
SWITCHES
You can add various switches to the command line that ViewPoint shortcut uses to start
ViewPoint. To change the command line, right-click ViewPoint shortcut icon, choose
Properties, and then click the Shortcut tab. The Target field shows the command line.
Add switches to the end of the command line (after the quote mark) with a space before the
switch. You can add multiple switches separated by spaces. For example:
“C:\Program Files\TeleVantage\Client\TVViewPoint.exe” /Server:TeleVantage /station=77
The command line switches for ViewPoint are:
Q
/allowmultiple. Enables you to run multiple instances of ViewPoint at the same time on
your computer.
Q
/Server. Syntax: /Server:<Servername>. Example: /Server:TeleVantage. Runs
ViewPoint against a specific TeleVantage Server on your network. This is useful when
you want to have one ViewPoint session using a Server other than the one your
ViewPoint runs against by default.
Q
/user /password /showloginoptions. Syntax: /user:<username>
/password:<password> /showloginoptions. Example: /user:Neil Pratt
/password:2112. (The three switches can be used separately.) Use to automatically log
on to ViewPoint as a specific user. With just /user and /password present, ViewPoint
skips the Logon dialog box. To have TeleVantage still display the full Logon dialog
box—for example, to change phone information—add /showloginoptions.
Q
/station. See the next section.
Q
/stationconflict. Syntax: /stationconflict:<ask/ignore>. Example:
/stationconflict:ignore. The ignore option lets you skip the Select Your
TeleVantage Phone dialog box when launching ViewPoint with an associated phone
other than your default station (see “Using ViewPoint with a different phone or Server”
on page 8-4). If you use the ignore option without /stationusage, the default selection
is owner (see the next bullet).
Q
/stationusage. Syntax: /stationusage:<visitor/owner/forward>. Example:
/stationusage:visitor. Lets you make a selection in the Select Your TeleVantage
Phone dialog box as follows:
/stationusage:visitor corresponds to Use station n as a visitor.
/stationusage:owner corresponds to Use <this phone > to place and answer
calls.
/stationusage:forward corresponds to Use <this phone > to place and answer
calls plus Forward my calls to this <phone>.
Q
/terminalsvrmode. Set this to “terminalsvrmode=1” when running a ViewPoint
application that will be accessed by multiple users over Terminal Server or Citrix.
With terminalsvrmode=1, the individual users’ logon settings are preserved for
each user, instead of being reset by each user.
Note that with terminalsvrmode=1, ViewPoint does not perform a version check on
startup and will not prompt for automatic upgrade if the Server has been or is being
upgraded.
Using the /station command
The /station command associates ViewPoint with a specific phone, either a station ID or a
remote number. You can use this switch to set up various ViewPoint shortcuts for different
remote locations, so you don’t have to wait for ViewPoint to launch, then choose File > Use a
different station, and wait for it to launch again.
Syntax
/station:<station number/remote number>
For <station number>, specify an internal or external station ID, for example /station:77.
For <remote number>, use the following syntax:
<access code><extension/phone number/IP address>
Q
access code. Syntax: ac=<code>. Example: ac=9. Specifies the dialing service access
code for TeleVantage to use when placing calls to you. If omitted, TeleVantage uses the
default dialing service for your number type.
Q
extension. Syntax: ext:<ext>. Example: ext:7601. Specifies a Centrex/PBX
extension, not a TeleVantage extension.
Q
phone number. Syntax: phone:<+><number>. Example: phone:+12125551212. Include
the + to have TeleVantage use dialing rules when dialing the number. Omit the + to have
TeleVantage dial the number exactly as you enter it without applying dialing rules.
Q
IP address. Syntax ip:<address>. Example: ip:11.22.33.44. Example:
ip:dotcomaddress.com/1234.. As when entering IP addresses in ViewPoint, you can
specify the address by either name or number, and optionally add a slash and append a
dial-through number for H.323 Gateways. See “Entering an IP address” on page 12-9.
Examples
/station:0
/station:phone:+16175551212
/station:ac=77;phone:+16175551212
/station:ip:foo.bar.com/1234
/station:ac=68;ip:foo.bar.com/1234
H-2
APPENDIX I
APPENDIX I
REPORTING PROBLEMS
Using the Problem Report Wizard___________________________
If you experience a problem with one of the TeleVantage workstation applications—ViewPoint,
the Administrator, the Call Center Reporter, the Contact Manager Assistant, or the TAPI Service
Provider—report the problem to your TeleVantage system administrator by using the Problem
Report Wizard. The Problem Report Wizard is a tool that collects appropriate log files and
prompts you for information that can help solve the problem.
The Problem Report Wizard creates a problem report package as a ZIP file in the location of
your choice. You can then send the ZIP file to your system administrator.
To prevent ZIP files from being overwritten, the Wizard gives each problem report package a
unique name based on your company name and a unique sequence number, as shown in the
following example.
The Wizard increments the sequence number in the file name each time it creates a new problem
report package.
Reporting a problem that involves a specific call
If you encountered a problem that involved a call, the best way to report the problem is as
follows:
1.
In the TeleVantage ViewPoint or Administrator, go to the Call Log folder and select
the call during which the problem occurred.
2.
Choose Actions > Report a Problem. The Problem Report Wizard opens with details
about the call already entered.
3.
Complete the Problem Report Wizard screens.
Reporting other problems
If your problem does not involve a specific call, run the Problem Report Wizard as follows:
1.
Do one of the following:
Q
From ViewPoint, choose Help > Report a Problem.
Q
Run the file C:\Program Files\Common
Files\Vertical\TeleVantage\TVPRWizard.exe.
2.
Answer the questions presented in each Wizard window.
3.
Optionally, check Send Problem Report Package via e-mail in the final window to
e-mail the problem report package to your TeleVantage system administrator. It can
be helpful to include in your e-mail the time at which the problem occurred, as closely
as you can identify it.
Because a problem report package can be large, after you send it to your TeleVantage system
administrator, you should delete it from your system to regain disk space.
I-2
INDEX
Symbols
A
# (for options after leaving a voice message), 2-3
#, to skip delay dialing extensions, 3-3
"& others" in Call Log, 14-5
* (to skip over a voice mail greeting), 2-3
* commands (table for call center queue agents), A-5
* commands (table for normal users), A-3
** (for Flash at remote phone), 6-5
*10 (enable and disable hands-free answering), 4-4
*11 (enter an account code), 3-4
*16 (record call), 4-9
*50 (select Available personal status), 9-6
*55 (monitor queue statistics), C-16
*66 (redial your last call), 3-5
*69 (return your last call), 3-5
*70 (disable call waiting for the next call), 3-6
*91 (answer another ringing phone), 4-4
*93 (dial by name), 3-4
F11 (return your last call), 12-10
F12 (redial your last call), 12-10
, (comma, for pauses in page strings), 13-14
Aastra phones
configuring in ViewPoint, 18-5
with voice-first answering, 4-5
access codes
entering using the phone, 3-3
selecting using ViewPoint, 12-8
accessing account, 1-2
account codes
entering for contacts, 16-5
entering using the phone, 3-3
entering using ViewPoint, 11-16, 12-3, 12-4
account management commands, A-7
ACD workgroups
going on break, D-4
marking agents as ready and unavailable, D-2
receiving a call, D-3
voice mail for, D-4
working as an agent in, D-2
Act!, 1-3
actions for routing lists, 15-10
active greeting, 13-19
active routing list, 15-9
active settings
changing, 9-10
defined, 9-9
hierarchy of, 9-12
viewing in one place, 9-10
Add-ins, 18-25
Adobe Acrobat PDF books, 1-7
agents
Call Monitor tabs, B-7
changing personal status, C-19
handling queue calls, B-6
marking as ready and unavailable for ACD
workgroups, D-2
monitoring, coaching, and joining calls, C-16
Numerics
0 (transfer to Operator)
changing destination of transfer, 18-9
from greeting, 15-11
from routing list, 15-8
from voice mail, 2-3
while on hold with Pause and Repeat, 15-13
411 (dial by name), 3-4
7 (leave a callback number with a voice message), 2-3
9 (usual number to dial an external call), 3-3
I-1
personal statuses for, 9-4
placing on and off call, C-18
signing in and out, B-2
states, defined, C-5
taking breaks, B-2
using Extensions list tabs, 10-3
viewing them being monitored, C-17
working as in ACD workgroups, D-2
working at another phone, B-4
Agents Pane, C-4
All tab
display options for, 11-4
in Call Monitor, 11-3
in Extensions list, 10-3
answering calls
at another ringing phone, 4-4
opening Call Monitor automatically, 11-5
using ViewPoint, 11-7
with call announcing, 4-2
with call waiting, 4-3
with hands-free answering, 4-4
archive database, checking for missing audio files, E-11
Archived Recording Browser
about, E-1
acting on recordings, E-9
adding notes to recordings, E-10
browsing search results, E-10
changing number of entries per page, E-10
checking archive for missing audio files, E-11
deleting recordings, E-11
exporting recordings, E-11
flagging recordings for follow-up, E-10
importing recordings archived in earlier
versions, E-12
loading saved search, E-8
logging on, E-1
managing recordings, E-8
opening Call Log details for recordings, E-10
playing recordings, E-10
purging recordings, E-11
refreshing search results, E-11
restoring recordings to Servers, E-11
running, E-1
saving current search, E-8
searching for recordings, E-2
sorting search results, E-9
specifying search criteria, E-4
archived recordings
managing individual recordings, E-8
purging, E-11
searching for, E-2
archived voice mail, 13-3
associating
from a Call Log entry, 14-8
from a voice message, 13-7
from an active call, 11-14
audio controls, using, 8-26
audio messages, playing into calls, 11-13
audio output, changing, 8-12
Available personal status, 9-3
B
beep
double, for contact account code prompt, 3-3
with call waiting, 18-8
blind transfers
defined, 4-8
using the phone, 4-8
using ViewPoint, 11-11
bookmarks for voice mail, 8-26
bottom line of ViewPoint screen. See status bar
breaks, taking in ACD workgroups, D-4
busy, handling calls when, 15-14
C
call announcing
overview, 4-2
answering calls with, 4-2
commands for answering, A-1
turning off, 18-6
I-2
using with certain calls only, 18-6
call center
agent availability, B-2
agent workday procedures, B-2
determining if you are on call for a queue, B-2
ending your shift, B-3
ready, B-2
starting your shift, B-2
taking a break, B-3
taking breaks, B-2
unavailable, B-2
using Contact Manager Assistant, B-9
viewing pop-up information about a caller, B-9
wrap-up time, B-8
call forwarding. See forwarding calls
"Call From" prompt
overview, 4-2
turning off, 18-6
call history
in Call Log, 14-8
in Call Monitor, 11-17
Call Log folder
overview, 14-2
adding notes to calls in, 14-8
associating a call with a contact, 14-8
exporting, 8-32
filters for, 14-2
opening a contact record from, 14-9
playing call recordings from, 14-9
reporting on, 14-10
result codes for exported, 8-33
returning calls from, 14-8
searching, 14-7
viewing additional call details, 14-5
Call Monitor folder
overview, 11-2
adding as pane to other folders, 8-15
adding Phonebook pane to, 8-15
commands
answer, 11-7
associate with contact, 11-14
disconnect, 11-16
I-3
insert audio, 11-13
mute, 11-16, 12-13
park, 11-15
play caller’s name, 11-16
put on hold, 11-9
put on hold while ringing, 11-8
record call, 11-12
send incoming call to voice mail, 11-7
take call, 11-7
transfer, 11-10
transfer while ringing, 11-8
unpark, 11-15
conference calls in, 12-12
display options for All tab, 11-4
displaying on incoming calls, 18-17
displaying when placing calls, 10-5
double-clicking in, 11-7
opening automatically, 11-5
ownership of calls in, 11-6
panes in, 11-5
selecting calls in, 11-6
sharing, 8-24, 11-19
tabs
overview, 11-3
flashing for incoming calls, 18-17
for call center agents, B-7
showing and hiding, 11-4
call notification of voice mail, 13-12
call ownership, 11-6
call recordings, managing, 13-8
call rules
overview, 17-2
call handling options, 17-8
caller conditions for, 17-5
combining caller and schedule conditions, 17-5
creating, 17-4
enabling and disabling, 17-8
examples of, 17-3
how system resolves conflicts, 17-9
ignoring all, 17-10
ignoring when forwarding calls, 15-5
ignoring while a personal status is in effect, 9-8
INDEX
organizing by priority, 17-9
schedule conditions for, 17-6
Call Rules folder, 17-3
Call Wait button, 4-2
call waiting
answering calls with, 4-3
customizing, 18-8
disabling for a call, 3-6
from your telephone company, 4-11
multiple calls, 4-4
tone from phone company, 4-4
turning off, 18-8
callback number
leaving with a voice message, 5-2
using to identify contacts, 16-11
caller ID
displaying on a phone, 18-8
including with pager notification, 13-13
selecting name or number as contact
identification, 16-11
specifying outbound for ISDN, 18-17
used to bypass the call announcing prompt, 18-7
used to identify contacts, 16-8
call-handling commands after pressing Flash, 4-7
calling back
a Call Log entry, 14-8
a voice message, 5-6, 13-6
your last caller, 3-5, 12-10
calls
answering
another ringing phone, 4-4
opening Call Monitor automatically, 11-5
using ViewPoint, 11-7
with call announcing, 4-2
with call waiting, 4-3
with hands-free answering, 4-4
associating with a contact, 11-14
checking a phone number to dial, 12-9
conferencing
using drag-and-drop, 12-13
using the phone, 4-10
using ViewPoint, 12-12
declining, 4-2
disabling call waiting for, 3-6
disconnecting without hanging up, 3-5, 6-11, 11-16
forwarding
overview, 15-3
and Where I Am, 15-2
as displayed in Extensions list, 10-2
prompting for password, 15-5
prompting to accept or decline, 15-5
status bar button for, 8-12
to Centrex extensions, 15-6
turning off, 15-5
using the phone, 5-9
using ViewPoint, 15-3
and voice mail, 15-6
when logging on, 8-7
handling differently when busy, 15-14
handling individual ones differently, 17-2
handling, table of commands, A-2
hold using the phone, 4-7
hold using ViewPoint, 11-8, 11-9
indications of incoming, 11-18
muting, 11-16, 12-13
notification of voice mail, 13-12
parking using the phone, 4-10
parking using ViewPoint, 11-15
placing
by clicking shortcuts, 12-11
from another user’s phone, 3-2
from Extensions list, 10-5
from other contact manager applications, 1-3
over Internet using the phone, 3-6
over Internet using ViewPoint, 12-9
quickly from ViewPoint folders, 12-6
through system from a remote phone, 6-7
to contacts, 12-3
to extensions, 12-4
to My Numbers, 12-4
to voice mail, 3-4
to workgroups, 12-4
using dialing services, 12-8
using the phone, 3-3
I-4
using the toolbar’s dial field, 12-2
using ViewPoint, 12-2
while on another call, 3-5
with hands-free answering, 4-5
playing audio into, 11-13
recording
using the phone, 4-9
using ViewPoint, 11-12
screening with call announcing, 4-2
screening with ViewPoint, 11-7
selecting in Call Monitor, 11-6
sending all to voice mail using the phone, 5-10
sending all to voice mail using ViewPoint, 9-3
sending incoming to voice mail using the phone, 4-9
sending incoming to voice mail using
ViewPoint, 11-7
sorting in Call Monitor, 11-2
taking notes on, 11-17
transferred to you, announcing who is
transferring, 18-7
transferring
blind or supervised, 4-8
one of multiple, 4-9
tips for Operators, 11-12
using drag-and-drop, 11-10
using the phone, 4-8
using ViewPoint, 11-10
without talking to the caller first, 11-8
unparking using the phone, 4-11
unparking using ViewPoint, 11-15
Calls pane, 8-15
Camp on station, routing list final action, 15-13
camp-on calls, placing, 12-7
Centrex extensions
forwarding calls to, 15-6
placing calls to, 12-8
Centrex system, sending a Flash command to, 4-11
checking numbers, 12-9
CMA. See Contact Manager Assistant
coaching
agents’ calls, C-16
I-5
users’ calls, 12-14
columns
freezing, 18-24
keeping on-screen during scrolling, 18-24
moving and resizing, 18-23
showing and hiding, 18-22
sorting by, 18-23
conference calls
as displayed in Call Monitor, 12-12
creating from incoming calls, 4-3
creating using the phone, 4-10
creating using ViewPoint, 12-12
using drag-and-drop, 12-13
Contact Manager Assistant, 16-13
contacts
overview, 16-2
account codes for, 16-5
adding and deleting phone numbers for
identification, 16-9
associating "Unknown" callers with, 16-9
benefits of recognition, 16-8
default phone number, 16-6
deleting phone numbers used for identification, 16-9
entering, 16-4
entering phone numbers for, 16-6
folders for, 16-2
identifying by caller ID, 16-8
importing and exporting, 8-27
in other contact manager applications, 16-13
PINs for, 16-12
placing calls to, 12-3
private and public, 16-3
recording voice titles for, 16-7
searching for, 16-3
telephone prompt language for, 16-6
Contacts folder
adding as a pane in Call Monitor, 8-15
A-Z buttons in, 16-3
double-click behavior in, 18-22
sharing, 8-24
copying and pasting ViewPoint items, 8-18
INDEX
creating items, 8-17
CSV files, importing and exporting, 8-27
custom data, viewing, 11-5
custom hours, for call rules, 17-7
cutting and pasting ViewPoint items, 8-18
Cybiolink phones
configuring in ViewPoint, 18-5
with voice-first answering, 4-5
D
default phone number, for contacts, 16-6
default station, changing, 8-7
delay when dialing extensions, skipping, 3-3
Deleted folder, 8-23
deleting ViewPoint items, 8-17
deleting voice mail
permanently, 8-17
using the phone, 5-5
using ViewPoint, 8-17
Desktop Alert Add-in, 18-26
dial bar, 12-2
dial tone, stutter at beginning of, 5-3
dial-by-name
customizing your listing in, 18-9
using, 3-4
dialing services
entering access code for using the phone, 3-3
selecting using ViewPoint, 12-8
dialing. See placing calls
digital phones
configuring, 18-13
using, 4-11
direct transfer, 4-8
disconnecting calls without hanging up, 3-5, 6-11, 11-16
distribution algorithms for routing calls to
workgroups, 15-15
Do Not Disturb
personal status, 9-3
using the phone, 5-10
documentation, 1-5
double beep, as contact account code prompt, 3-3
drag-and-drop transferring, 11-10
drag-and-drop, in ViewPoint, 8-19
E
E, special character in page strings, 13-14
e-mail notification of voice mail, 13-12
e-mailing greetings, 13-20
e-mailing voice mail, 13-6
emptying the Deleted folder, 8-23
ending calls without hanging up, 3-5, 6-11, 11-16
exiting ViewPoint, 8-8
exporting
Call Log, 8-32
contacts, 8-27
Extensions list, 8-31
voice files, 8-27
extensions
dialing by name, 3-4
placing calls to, 12-4
Extensions list
overview, 10-2
adding as pane in Call Monitor, 8-15
exporting, 8-31
setting up workgroup tabs for, 16-16
tabs in, 10-3
external calls, defined, 3-3
external stations, using, 6-10
F
F11 (return your last call), 12-10
F12 (redial your last call), 12-10
Favorite Folders list, 8-10
faxes, disabling call waiting for, 3-6
feature comparison table, 1-4
final actions in routing lists, 15-12
Flash
during a call (table of commands), 4-7
I-6
sending to Centrex or another PBX, 4-11
to put a call on hold, 4-7
using, 4-2
using ** for at a remote phone, 6-5
with direct transfer, 4-8
Folder List
hiding and showing, 8-12
using, 8-21
viewing shared folders in, 8-25
folders
overview, 8-21
adding Calls pane to, 8-15
columns in, 18-22
for contacts, 16-2
for voice mail, 13-2
locking current one, 8-16
managing, 8-22
opening in new windows, 8-14
private and public, 8-22
sharing, 8-24
sorting by column, 18-23
viewing shared, 8-25
fonts, changing in ViewPoint, 18-24
forwarding calls
overview, 15-3
and Where I Am, 15-2
as displayed in Extensions list, 10-2
prompting for password, 15-5
prompting to accept or decline, 15-5
status bar button for, 8-12
to Centrex extensions, 15-6
turning off, 15-5
using the phone, 5-9
using ViewPoint, 15-3
and voice mail, 15-6
when logging on, 8-7
forwarding voice mail
using the phone, 5-5
using ViewPoint, 13-4
freezing columns, 18-24
FrontOffice 2000, 1-3
FWD button on status bar, 8-12
I-7
G
GoldMine, 1-3
grab-and-hold, 11-8
grab-and-hold greeting, default text of, 11-8
greetings
overview, 13-18
active, 13-19
available space for, 5-8
e-mailing, 13-20
for when you’re on the phone, 15-14
grab-and-hold, 11-8
hierarchy for, 13-20
managing using the phone, 5-7
options after recording, 5-8
personal status default, 13-20
playing into a call, 11-13
recording using the phone, 2-3
recording using ViewPoint, 13-20
system camp-on, 15-14
System Hold Greeting, 15-13
text of initial one, 2-3
used with
call rules, 17-8
personal statuses, 9-8
routing list final actions, 15-15
routing lists as an action, 15-11
Greetings folder, 13-19
groups, placing calls to, 12-4
H
H.323 terminals. See Internet calls
handling calls, table of commands, A-2
handling calls. See calls
hands-free answering
enabling and disabling using the phone, 4-4
enabling and disabling using ViewPoint, 18-11
using, 4-4
Help, online, 1-6
hiding
columns, 18-22
INDEX
toolbar buttons, 18-24
window elements, 8-12
hierarchy for active settings, 9-12
hold
putting calls on using the phone, 4-7
putting calls on using ViewPoint, 11-9
putting calls on without answering first, 11-8
retrieving from other phones (call
parking), 4-10, 11-15
ringback if you leave a call on, 18-9
switching between multiple calls on, 3-5
without hearing telephone prompts, 4-11
hold music, customized, 18-12
HTML books, 1-6
I
I, special character in page strings, 13-14
identifying contacts
adding and deleting phone numbers for, 16-9
by caller ID, 16-8
by PIN, 16-12
imitating a station on routed calls, 6-10
importing
contacts, 8-27
voice files, 8-27
Index buttons, 8-15
instant messages, 10-5
intercom calls, 3-6
intercom, using your phone as, 4-5
internal calls, defined, 3-3
internal dial tone, getting, 4-11
Internet calls
placing using the phone, 3-6
placing using ViewPoint, 12-9
IP calls. See Internet calls
ISDN outbound caller ID, 18-17
J
joining
agents’ calls, C-16
users’ calls, 12-14
L
L, special character in page strings, 13-14
line appearances, using, 4-12
Link button, 4-2
lock line, 18-24
locking folders, 8-16
locking ViewPoint display, 8-13
logging on
as a visitor, 8-6
changing default station, 8-7
from a remote number, 6-6
skipping, 8-3
telephone commands available after, A-7
to ViewPoint with another phone, 8-6
using the phone, 5-2
using ViewPoint, 8-3
with command line switches, H-1
with new options, 8-7
M
Macintosh, using ViewPoint on, 1-3
mailbox, viewing size of, 13-9
making a call. See placing calls
menu bar, 8-9
message waiting light, enabling and disabling, 13-12
messages. See voice mail
Microsoft Exchange Server, synchronizing with, 13-7
Microsoft Outlook, 1-3
mobile phones, issues with routing lists, 15-8
monitoring
agents’ calls, C-16
users’ calls, 12-14
moving items between folders in ViewPoint, 8-22
multiple line appearances, with call waiting, 4-4
music-on-hold, customized, 18-12
muting
a call, 11-16
I-8
parties in a conference call, 12-13
My Numbers
entering, 12-4
placing calls to, 12-4
My Phone tab in Call Monitor, 11-3
N
names
changing ViewPoint display of, 18-24
dialing by, 3-4
of callers displayed in Call Monitor, 11-7
playing caller’s over speakers, 11-16
playing caller’s over speakers automatically, 18-17
recording for your voice title, 2-2
yours in dial-by-name directory, 18-9
navigation pane, 8-10
NetMeeting. See Internet calls
notes
adding to active calls, 11-17
adding to calls in Call Log, 14-8
adding to voice mail, 13-8
notifications of new voice mail, 13-12
O
online books, 1-6
online Help, 1-6
Operators
changing your personal one, 18-9
customizing ViewPoint for, 18-21
tips on transferring calls, 11-12
Options dialog box, 18-2
Options dialog box, guide to, 18-2
orbit number, 11-15
"& others" in Call Log, 14-5
Outlook, 1-3
ownership of calls in the Call Monitor, 11-6
P
page string, special characters for, 13-14
I-9
pager notification of voice mail, 13-12
pages, placing, 3-6
panes
Call, 8-15
in Call Monitor folder, 11-5
locking layout of, 8-13
Phonebook, 8-15
view bar, 8-11
parking calls
Call Monitor tab for, 11-4
using the phone, 4-10
using ViewPoint, 11-15
password
changing using the phone, 5-10
changing using ViewPoint, 8-7
prompting for in routing lists, 15-11
prompting for when forwarding calls, 15-5
resetting if you have turned off, 8-3
skipping entry at logon, 8-3
pasting ViewPoint items, 8-18
Pause and repeat, routing list final action, 15-13
PDF books, 1-7
PDNs, using, 4-12
personal status
overview, 9-2
and state, C-13
changing an agent’s, C-19
changing another user’s, 9-14
changing yours. See personal statuses/selecting
creating custom, 9-6
in call rules, 17-8
list for call center queue agents, 9-4
list of pre-defined, 9-3
modifying, 9-6
preferences for call handling, 9-7
recording names for, 9-7
selecting
using the phone, 5-10
using the status bar button, 9-3
using ViewPoint, 9-5
setting as default, 9-13
INDEX
table of telephone commands to select, A-8
viewing in Extensions list, 10-2
personal status defaults, defined, 9-12
Personal Statuses folder, 9-9
phone
audio output from, 8-12
changing ViewPoint’s, 8-4
remote. See remote phone use
ringing of. See ringer
ringing when you leave a call on hold, 18-9
sharing with other users, 7-2
phone notifications for new voice mail, 13-14
phone numbers, checking, 12-9
"Phone" pane on status bar, 8-12
PINs, for contacts, 16-12
Place Call command, 12-6
placing calls
by clicking shortcuts, 12-11
directly to voice mail, 3-4
from a queue, B-8
from another user’s phone, 3-2
from Extensions list, 10-5
from other contact manager applications, 1-3
over Internet using the phone, 3-6
over Internet using ViewPoint, 12-9
pages and intercom calls, 3-6
quickly from ViewPoint folders, 12-6
through system from a remote phone, 6-7
to contacts, 12-3
to extensions, 12-4
to My Numbers, 12-4
to workgroups, 12-4
using dialing services, 12-8
using the dial bar, 12-2
using the phone, 3-3, 12-2
while on another call, 3-5
with hands-free answering, 4-5
play button, 8-26
"Please say your name" prompt
about, 4-3
turning off, 18-7
popping up caller information, B-9
Prevent Switching Folders command, 8-16
priority
of call rules, 17-9
of greetings, 13-20
private
contacts, 16-3
folders, 8-22
voice mail, 13-8
workgroups, 16-15
Problem Report Wizard, I-1
problems, reporting, I-1
prompts
"Call From"
overview, 4-2
turning off, 18-6
changing language of for contacts, 16-6
for account code, 3-3
for password with call forwarding, 15-5
for password with routing lists, 15-11
"Please say your name"
about, 4-3
turning off, 18-7
selecting language of, 18-6
to accept or decline calls from routing lists, 15-11
to accept or decline forwarded calls, 15-5
to callers following routing lists, 15-11
See also telephone commands
public
contacts, 16-3
folders, 8-22
My Numbers, 12-5
workgroups, 16-15
purging archived recordings, E-11
Q
Queue Monitor folder, B-8, C-3
Queue Statistics pane, C-8
queues
personal statuses for agents, 9-4
I-10
signing in and out, B-2
statistics by phone, C-16
supervising overview, C-2
tabs for in Extensions list, 10-3
viewing statistics for, C-3
voice mailbox for, C-20
quick tour, 8-8
R
ready, marking yourself in ACD workgroups, D-2
receiving and handling queue calls, B-6
record button, 8-26
recording calls
using the phone, 4-9
using ViewPoint, 11-12
recordings
how to make and play, 8-26
options after making, 5-7
redialing your last call, 3-5, 6-8, 12-10
remote phone use
overview, 6-2
list of features, 6-2
placing calls through the system, 6-7
redialing numbers, 6-8
ViewPoint logon options, 8-6
with ViewPoint, 6-9
without ViewPoint, 6-5
renaming ViewPoint items, 8-18
replying to voice mail
using the phone, 5-5
using ViewPoint, 13-5
reporting on Call Log, 14-10
reporting problems, I-1
reset times for queue statistics, C-12
returning your last call, 3-5, 12-10
Reverse Phone Number Lookup Add-in, 18-26
ringback, 4-7, 11-10, 18-9
ringer
changing pattern of, 18-11
customizing duration of ringing, 18-10
turning off with personal statuses, 9-8
ringing phone, answering another, 4-4
routing lists
overview, 15-7
actions, 15-10
active, 15-9
in call rules, 17-8
caller options while following, 15-8
creating, 15-10
final actions for, 15-12
greetings and final actions, 15-15
and hands-free answering, 4-5
mobile phone issues with, 15-8
personal status default, 15-9
prompting for password, 15-11
prompting to accept or decline, 15-11
routing calls to workgroups, 15-14
Standard, 15-8
when station is busy, 15-14
Routing Lists folder, 15-8
S
scheduling
call rules, 17-6
notifications of voice mail, 13-15
screening calls
with call announcing, 4-2
with ViewPoint, 11-7
screening voice mail
using the phone, 4-3
using ViewPoint, 11-7
screen-pops for calls, 1-3
SDNs, using, 4-12
searching
for call log entries, 14-7
for contacts, 16-3
Server, changing ViewPoint’s, 8-4
shared folders, viewing, 8-25
shared voice mail, deleting, 8-25
sharing folders, 8-24
I-11
sharing stations, 7-2
shortcuts to dial calls, 12-11
showing
columns, 18-22
toolbar buttons, 18-24
window elements, 8-12
signing in and out, B-2
silent hold, 4-11
SIP accounts, customizing, 18-19
SIP phones
configuring, 6-14
tips for using, 6-15
speakerphone, as intercom, 3-6
speakers, audio output from, 8-12
Speed Dial command, 12-6
speed dial shortcuts, 12-11
Standard routing list, 15-8
stations
imitating on routed calls, 6-10
sharing, 7-2
statistics for queues
displayed, C-3
when reset, C-12
status bar, 8-12
statuses. See personal statuses
stop button, 8-26
stutter dial tone
defined, 5-3
turning on and off, 13-12, 18-20
supervised transfers
defined, 4-8
using the phone, 4-8
using ViewPoint, 11-11
supervising call center queues
overview, C-2
changing agents’ personal status, C-19
monitoring, coaching, and joining agents’ calls, C-16
without receiving calls, C-2
supervising users’ calls, 12-14
support, technical, 1-4
synchronizing with Microsoft Exchange Server, 13-7
System camp on greeting, 15-14
System Hold Greeting, 15-13
T
tabs
in Call Monitor folder, 11-3
in Extensions list, 10-3
TAPI Service Provider
overview, 1-3
using from other contact manager
applications, 16-13
technical support, 1-4
telephone commands
overview, 1-2
after making a recording, 5-7
call handling commands, 4-7
selecting language of, 18-6
silencing during hold, 4-11
tables
call announcing commands, A-1
call handling commands, A-2
personal status selection, A-8
quick call commands using *, A-3
voice mail/account menu, A-7
voice message commands, 5-4
when answering a call with call announcing, 4-2
tip of the day, 8-8
tips of the day, 8-3
title bar, flashing on incoming calls, 18-17
toolbar
overview, 8-9
dial field on, 12-2
hiding and showing buttons, 18-24
transferring calls
announcing name of person doing the transfer, 18-7
blind or supervised, 4-8
one of multiple, 4-9
tips for Operators, 11-12
using drag-and-drop, 11-10
I-12
using the phone, 4-8
using ViewPoint, 11-10
without talking to the caller first, 11-8
triangles in audio controls, 8-26
U
undeleting voice mail, 5-5
UNIX, using ViewPoint on, 1-3
"Unknown" callers, associating with contacts, 16-9
unparking calls
using the phone, 4-11
using ViewPoint, 11-15
urgent voice mail, 13-8
V
verbal call screening. See call announcing
view bar, 8-11
ViewPoint
overview, 1-3
changing Server and phone, 8-4
columns in, 18-22
customizing for Operators, 18-21
exiting, 8-8
hiding and showing window elements, 8-12
layout, 8-9
locking display of, 8-13
logging on using, 8-3
quick tour, 8-8
reporting problems with, I-1
starting using with command line switches, H-1
tip of the day, 8-8
tips of the day, 8-3
using drag-and-drop in, 8-19
using on Macintosh and UNIX, 1-3
using remotely, 6-8
Welcome Wizard, 8-8
ViewPoint Web Access
overview, 1-3
accessing, 8-2
visitor, logging on as, 8-6
voice files
importing and exporting, 8-27
recording and playing, 8-26
voice mail
adding notes to, 13-8
associating with a contact, 13-7
bookmarks, 8-26
and call forwarding, 15-6
caller options while leaving, 2-3
calling back using the phone, 5-6
calling back using ViewPoint, 13-6
deleting shared, 8-25
deleting using the phone, 5-5
deleting using ViewPoint, 8-17
dialing directly, 3-4
disappearing from folders, 5-3
disappearing from ViewPoint, 13-3
e-mailing, 13-6
folders, 13-2
for ACD workgroups, D-4
forwarding using the phone, 5-5
forwarding using ViewPoint, 13-4
from caller’s point of view, 5-2
heard, 13-7
listening to using ViewPoint, 13-4
listening to while caller leaves, 4-3, 11-7
new, indications of, 13-11
notification of, 13-12
options while listening to, 5-4
playback order of, 18-20
playing a sound for, 18-20
playing as audio into call, 13-6
playing into a call, 11-13
private, 13-8
replying to using the phone, 5-5
replying to using ViewPoint, 13-5
scheduling notifications, 13-15
screening using the phone, 4-3
screening using ViewPoint, 11-7
sending a call directly to
using the phone, 4-9
I-13
using ViewPoint, 11-7
sending all calls to, 5-10
sending using the phone, 5-6
sending using ViewPoint, 13-10
setting maximum length of, 13-9
space for, 13-9
synchronizing with Microsoft Exchange
Server, 13-7
undeleting, 5-5
unheard, 13-7
urgent, 13-8
viewing contact record for, 13-6
voice mail folder
overview, 13-2
sharing, 8-24
voice mail/account menu commands, A-7
voice mailbox, viewing size of, 13-9
voice messages
dragging to other applications, 8-21
voice over IP. See Internet calls
voice titles
avoiding "Please say your name" prompt with, 4-3
capturing for contacts in their own voice, 16-11
recording for contacts, 16-7
recording for yourself using the phone, 2-2
recording for yourself using ViewPoint, 18-5
voice-first answering, 4-5
voice-mail greetings. See greetings
VOIP. See Internet calls
VOX format, 8-27
workgroups
overview, 16-14
answering another ringing phone within your, 4-4
benefits of using, 16-14
personal and public, 16-15
placing calls to, 12-4
routing calls to, 15-14
setting to appear as Extensions list tab, 16-16
Workgroups folder, 16-15
working remotely, B-9
W
WAV format, 8-27
Welcome Wizard, 8-8
Where I Am
default, 9-13
in personal statuses, 9-7
in routing lists, 15-10
with call forwarding, 15-2
windows, opening folders in new, 8-14
I-14
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising